HPE ArcSight Management Center Administrator's Guide Arc MC Admin 2 6 X

User Manual:

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 316

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

HPE Security
ArcSight Management Center
Software Version: 2.6x

Administrator's Guide

July 13, 2017

Administrator's Guide

Legal Notices
Warranty
The only warranties for Hewlett Packard Enterprise products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements
accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.
Hewlett Packard Enterprise shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.
The network information used in the examples in this document (including IP addresses and hostnames) is for illustration
purposes only.
HPE ArcSight products are highly flexible and function as you configure them. The accessibility, integrity, and confidentiality
of your data is your responsibility. Implement a comprehensive security strategy and follow good security practices.
This document is confidential.

Restricted Rights Legend
Confidential computer software. Valid license from Hewlett Packard Enterprise required for possession, use or copying.
Consistent with FAR 12.211 and 12.212, Commercial Computer Software, Computer Software Documentation, and Technical
Data for Commercial Items are licensed to the U.S. Government under vendor's standard commercial license.

Copyright Notice
© Copyright 2017 Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development, LP
Follow this link to see a complete statement of copyrights and acknowledgements:
https://www.protect724.hpe.com/docs/DOC-13026

Support
Contact Information
Phone

A list of phone numbers is available on the HPE ArcSight Technical Support
Page: https://softwaresupport.hpe.com/documents/10180/14684/esp-support-

contact-list
Support Web Site

https://softwaresupport.hpe.com

Protect 724 Community

https://www.protect724.hpe.com

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 2 of 316

Contents
Chapter 1: HPE ArcSight Management Center Overview
New Features and Enhancements
Chapter 2: Software Installation

15
15
17

Overview

17

Installing ArcSight Management Center
Prerequisites for Installation
Installation Steps
GUI Mode Installation
Console Mode Installation
Silent Mode Installation
About Licenses for Silent Mode Installations
Generating the Silent Install Properties File
Installing Using the Generated Properties File
Next Steps After Installation
Enabling/Disabling ArcSight Management Center as a System Service
Starting Services Automatically for a Non-Root Installation
Configuring Firewall Rules
Configuring the Firewall on ArcSight Management Center Appliance

19
19
20
20
22
23
23
23
25
25
26
26
27
28

ArcSight Management Center Operations
Connecting to the ArcSight Management Center User Interface
ArcSight Management Center Processes
The ArcSight Management Center Daemon (arcmcd)
Uninstalling Software ArcSight Management Center
Uninstalling in GUI Mode
Uninstalling in Console Mode
Uninstalling in Silent Mode

29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32

Installing the ArcSight Management Center Agent

32

ArcSight Management Center Agent Operations
Uninstalling the ArcSight Management Center Agent

34
35

Chapter 3: The User Interface

36

Overview

36

The Menu Bar

36

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 3 of 316

Administrator's Guide

Monitoring Summary
Node Management
Configuration Management
User Management
Administration

36
37
37
38
38

Stats (EPS In/Out)

38

Site Map

38

History Management

39

Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

40

Overview

40

Node Management

41

The Navigation Tree

41

The Management Panel
Management Tabs
Tab Controls
The Locations Tab
The Hosts Tab
The Containers Tab
The Connectors Tab
The Connector Summary Tab
Connector Data
Connector Parameters
Table Parameters (WUC Connectors Only)
Destinations
The ConApps Tab
The Loggers Tab
The ArcMCs Tab
The EB Nodes Tab

42
42
43
43
43
45
47
48
48
48
48
49
49
50
51
52

Locations
Adding a Location
Editing a Location
Viewing All Locations
Deleting a Location

52
52
53
53
53

Hosts
About Adding a Host
Prerequisites for Adding a Host (for each Host Type)
Node Authentication Credentials

54
54
55
57

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 4 of 316

Administrator's Guide

Managing SmartConnectors on ArcMC
Preparing to Add Event Broker as a Host
Adding a Host
Adding a Host with Containers
Importing Multiple Hosts
Prerequisites for Importing Multiple Hosts
CSV File Format
Host Field Values
Import Hosts Procedure
Import Hosts Job Logs
Exporting Hosts
Viewing All Hosts
Viewing Managed Nodes on a Host
Deleting a Host
Moving a Host to a Different Location
Updating (or Installing) the ArcMC Agent
Scanning a Host
The Scan Process
Downloading and Importing Host Certificates
Updating Host Credentials
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

58
59
59
60
60
60
61
61
62
63
64
64
65
65
65
66
66
67
68
68
70

Overview

70

Managing Connector Appliances (ConApps)
Rebooting a ConApp
Shutting Down a ConApp
Editing or Removing a Configuration for a ConApp
Setting a Configuration on ConApps

70
71
71
71
72

Managing Other ArcSight Management Centers
Rebooting an ArcMC
Shutting Down an ArcMC
Editing or Removing a Configuration for ArcMC
Upgrading ArcMC
Setting a Configuration on Managed ArcMCs
Managing SmartConnectors on ArcMC

73
73
73
74
74
75
76

Managing Loggers
Rebooting a Logger
Shutting Down a Logger
Editing or Removing a Configuration for a Logger

76
77
77
77

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 5 of 316

Administrator's Guide

Upgrading a Logger
Setting a Configuration on Loggers
Managing Containers
Viewing All Containers
Viewing Connectors in a Container
Editing a Container
Deleting a Container
Updating Container Properties
Changing Container Credentials
Sending a Command to a Container
Upgrading All Connectors in a Container
Modifying logger.properties
Restarting a Container
Viewing Container Logs
Deleting a Container Log
Enabling FIPS on a Container
Enabling FIPS Suite B on a Container
Adding a Connector to a Container
Running Logfu on a Container
Managing Certificates on a Container
Adding CA Certificates to a Container
Removing CA Certificates from a Container
Adding a CA Certs File to a Container
Enabling or Disabling a Demo Certificate on a Container
Adding Multiple Destination Certificates to a Container
Viewing Certificates on a Container
Resolving Invalid Certificate Errors
Running Diagnostics on a Container
Managing Connectors
Viewing All Connectors
Adding a Connector
Prerequisites
Editing Connector Parameters
Updating Simple Parameters for a Connector
Updating Table Parameters for a Connector
Updating Simple and Table Parameters for Multiple Connectors
Managing Destinations
Adding a Primary Destination to a Connector
Adding a Failover Destination to a Connector
Adding a Primary or Failover Destination to Multiple Connectors

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

78
79
80
80
81
81
81
82
82
82
83
84
85
85
86
86
87
88
88
89
89
90
91
91
92
92
93
93
94
94
94
94
97
97
97
98
99
99
100
101

Page 6 of 316

Administrator's Guide

Removing Destinations
Re-Registering Destinations
Editing Destination Parameters
Editing Destination Runtime Parameters
Managing Alternate Configurations
Defining a New Alternate Configuration
Editing an Alternate Configuration
Editing Alternate Configurations in Bulk
Sending a Command to a Destination
Deleting a Connector
Sending a Command to a Connector
Running Logfu on a Connector
Remote File Systems
Managing a Remote File System
Changing the Network Interface Address for Events
Developing FlexConnectors
Editing FlexConnectors
Sharing Connectors in ArcExchange
Packaging and Uploading Connectors
Downloading Connectors
Configuration Suggestions for Connector Types
Included FlexConnectors
Configuring the Check Point OPSEC NG Connector
Adding the MS SQL Server JDBC Driver
Adding the MySQL JDBC Driver
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

102
102
103
103
104
105
105
106
106
106
107
107
108
108
110
110
113
113
114
116
117
118
118
121
121
123

Overview

123

Configuration Management
The Configurations Table
The Details Tab
General
Properties
The Subscribers Tab
Non-Compliance Reports
Creating a Subscriber Configuration
Editing a Subscriber Configuration
Deleting a Subscriber Configuration
Importing a Subscriber Configuration

124
124
125
125
125
126
127
127
128
128
129

Managing Subscribers

130

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 7 of 316

Administrator's Guide

Viewing Subscribers
Adding a Subscriber
Unsubscribing a Subscriber

131
131
132

Pushing a Subscriber Configuration
Push Validation
Common Causes for Push Failure
Push Remediation

132
133
133
134

Checking Subscriber Compliance

134

Comparing Configurations

135

Configuration Management Best Practices

136

Subscriber Configuration Types
Connector Configuration Types
BlueCoat Connector Configuration
FIPS Configuration
Map File Configuration
Parser Override Configuration
Syslog Connector Configuration
Windows Unified Connector (WUC) External Parameters Configuration
Limitations to WUC External Parameters Configurations
Windows Unified Connector (WUC) Internal Parameters Configuration
Limitations to WUC Internal Parameters Configurations
ArcMC/Connector Appliance Configuration Types
ArcMC/Connector Appliance Configuration Backup Configuration
Destination Configuration Types
Destination Configuration Parameters
Networks and Zones
Logger Configuration Types
Logger Configuration Backup Configuration
Logger Connector Forwarder Configuration
Logger ESM Forwarder Configuration
Logger Filter Configuration
Logger SmartMessage Receiver Configuration
Logger Storage Group Configuration
Logger TCP Forwarder Configuration
Logger Transport Receiver Configuration
Logger UDP Forwarder Configuration
System Admin Configuration Types
Authentication External
Authentication Local Password

137
137
137
138
138
139
139
139
140
141
141
142
142
143
143
144
144
145
145
146
147
148
148
149
150
151
152
152
153

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 8 of 316

Administrator's Guide

Authentication Session
DNS Configuration
FIPS Configuration
Network Configuration
NTP Configuration
SMTP Configuration
SNMP Poll Configuration
SNMP Trap Configuration

154
154
155
155
155
156
156
156

Initial Configuration Management
Importing an Initial Configuration
Pushing an Initial Configuration
Deleting an Initial Configuration
Event History

157
158
159
160
161

Managing Logger Event Archives
Managing Event Archives

161
162

Managing Logger Peers
Viewing Peers or Peer Groups
Adding or Removing Peers
Importing a Peer Group
Edit a Peer Group
Pushing a Peer Group
Deleting a Peer Group

163
163
164
164
165
165
165

Managing Event Broker
About Topics
Adding a Topic
About Routes
Creating a Route
Editing a Route
Deleting a Route

166
166
166
167
167
168
169

Chapter 7: Managing Users on Managed Products

170

Overview
User Management Workflow

170
171

Users and User Lists

171

Permission Groups

173

Roles

175

Node Lists

176

Associations

177

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 9 of 316

Administrator's Guide

Compliance Report

179

Chapter 8: Dashboard

180

Overview

180

ArcSight Management Center Dashboard
The Monitoring Summary
License Usage Chart
Drilling Down
Data Charts
ADP Licensed Usage for the Last 30 Days

180
180
182
182
183
183

Monitoring Rules
Preset Rules
Managing Rules
Monitoring Rules Parameters
Rule Verification
Custom Rules Examples
Example 1: Warning Breach
Example 2: Critical Breach
Configuring Email Notifications
Example Email Notification
Configuring SNMP Notifications

184
185
185
186
190
190
190
191
191
192
192

Topology View

194

Chapter 9: Managing Backups and Restores

196

Overview

196

Backup

196

Restore

197

Chapter 10: Snapshots

199

Overview

199

Creating a Snapshot

199

Chapter 11: Logger Consumption Report

201

Chapter 12: Managing Repositories

203

Overview

203

Logs Repository

204

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 10 of 316

Administrator's Guide

Uploading a File to the Logs Repository

204

CA Certs Repository
Uploading CA Certificates to the Repository
Removing CA Certificates from the Repository

204
205
205

Upgrade Files Repository
About the AUP Upgrade Process
Uploading an AUP Upgrade File to the Repository
Removing a Connector Upgrade from the Repository

206
206
206
207

Content AUP Repository
Applying a New Content AUP
Applying an Older Content AUP

207
207
208

Emergency Restore

208

User-Defined Repositories
Creating a User-Defined Repository
Retrieving Container Files
Uploading Files to a Repository
Deleting a User-Defined Repository
Updating Repository Settings.
Managing Files in a Repository
Retrieving a File from the Repository
Uploading a File from the Repository
Removing a File from the Repository

209
209
211
211
211
212
212
212
212
213

Pre-Defined Repositories
Settings for Backup Files
Settings for Map Files
Settings for Parser Overrides
Settings for FlexConnector Files
Settings for Connector Properties
Settings for JDBC Drivers
Backup Files
Adding Parser Overrides

213
213
214
215
215
216
217
217
218

Chapter 13: System Administration
System
System Reboot
Network
System DNS
Hosts
NICs
HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

220
220
220
221
221
221
222
Page 11 of 316

Administrator's Guide

Static Routes
Time/NTP
SMTP
License & Update
Updating the Appliance
Updating the License File
Process Status
System Settings
SNMP
SNMP Configuration
Viewing SNMP System Information
SSH Access to the Appliance
Enabling or Disabling SSH Access
Connecting to Your Appliance Using SSH
Diagnostic Tools
Display I/O Statistics
Display file
Display network connections
Display network interface details
Display network traffic
Display process summary
Display routing table
Edit text file
List directory
List open files
List processes
Ping host
Resolve hostname or IP Address
Scan network ports
Send signal to container
Tail file
Trace network route

223
224
225
226
226
226
227
227
228
228
229
230
231
231
231
232
232
233
234
234
235
235
236
236
236
237
237
237
238
238
238
239

Logs
Audit Logs
Configuring Audit Forwarding
For Software ArcSight Management Center
For ArcSight Management Center Appliance
Configuring Audit Forwarding to a Specific Destination

239
239
240
240
240
241

Storage
RAID Controller/Hard Disk SMART Data

241
241

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 12 of 316

Administrator's Guide

FTP
Models Supporting FTP
Enabling FTP
Adding a Subdirectory
Processing Log Data Received via FTP
Using FTPS (FTP over SSL)
Using FTPS with Blue Coat ProxySG

242
243
243
244
245
245
245

Security
SSL Server Certificate
Generating a Self-Signed Certificate
Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
Importing a Certificate
SSL Client Authentication
Uploading Trusted Certificates
Uploading a Certificate Revocation List
Enabling Client Certificate Authentication
FIPS 140-2

246
247
247
248
250
251
251
251
252
252

Users/Groups on ArcMC
Authentication
Sessions
Local Password
Users Exempted From Password Expiration
Forgot Password
External Authentication
Local Password
Client Certificate Authentication
Client Certificate and Local Password Authentication
LDAP/AD and LDAPS Authentication
RADIUS Authentication
Local Password Fallback
Login Banner
User Management
Users
Reset Password
Groups
System Admin Groups
ArcSight Management Center Rights Groups for ArcSight Management Center
Managing a User Group
Change Password

253
253
253
254
256
256
257
257
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
263
265
266
266
267
267
268

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 13 of 316

Administrator's Guide

Appendix A: Audit Logs

270

Audit Event Types

270

Audit Event Information

270

Application Events

271

Platform Events

277

System Health Events
SNMP Related Properties

281
281

Appendix B: Destination Runtime Parameters

284

Appendix C: Special Connector Configurations

292

Microsoft Windows Event Log - Unified Connectors
Change Parser Version by Updating Container Properties
SSL Authentication

292
293
294

Database Connectors

294

Add a JDBC Driver

295

API Connectors

296

File Connectors

297

Syslog Connectors

297

Appendix D: Setting Up Your ArcSight Management Center Appliance

299

Appendix E: Restoring Factory Settings

303

Overview

303

Factory Restore Using HPE System Restore

303

Factory Restore Using Acronis True Image

305

Appendix F: SuperSchema

307

Appendix G: The Topology View and Unmanaged Devices

313

Send Documentation Feedback

316

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 14 of 316

Chapter 1: HPE ArcSight Management Center
Overview
The following topic is discussed here.

• New Features and Enhancements

15

HPE ArcSight Management Center (ArcMC) is a centralized management tool that simplifies security
policy configuration, deployment maintenance, and monitoring in an efficient and cost-effective
manner.
ArcMC offers these key capabilities:
• Management and Monitoring: deliver the single management interface to administrate and monitor
ArcSight managed nodes, such as Connector Appliances, Loggers, Connectors, other ArcMCs, and
Event Broker.
• SmartConnector Hosting: for the hardware appliance, as a platform to instantiate (host and execute)
SmartConnectors
ArcMC includes these benefits:
l

Rapid implementation of new and updated security policies.

l

Increased level of accuracy and reduction of errors in configuration of managed nodes.

l

Reduction in operational expenses.

New Features and Enhancements
This version of ArcMC includes the following new features and enhancements:
l

l

l

Event Broker Management: ArcSight Event Broker management includes route and topic creation,
as well as health and status parameter monitoring. Monitored parameters for Event Broker include
CPU Usage, Memory, Disk Usage, Event Broker Throughput, Total EPS In, Event Parsing Error,
Stream Processing EPS, and Stream Processing Lag.
Improved Node Management Interface: The Node Management interface has been improved for
clarity and ease of use.
Improvements to Topology View: The Topology View now includes time-out settings, to age out
inactive devices and remove them from management.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 15 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 1: HPE ArcSight Management Center Overview

l

l

l

Improved Import Hosts Process: Importing hosts from a CSV will take less time than formerly, as
jobs run in parallel.
Improved License Consumption Report: The License Consumption report can now be run for a
specified time interval, instead of an entire year.
New Rules: Several additional monitoring rules have been enabled by default. These can be edited or
deleted as preferred.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 16 of 316

Chapter 2: Software Installation
This chapter describes how to install Software ArcSight Management Center and the ArcSight
Management Center Agent.
The following topics are discussed here.

•
•
•
•
•

Overview
Installing ArcSight Management Center
ArcSight Management Center Operations
Installing the ArcSight Management Center Agent
ArcSight Management Center Agent Operations

17
19
29
32
34

Overview
The complete process of installing Software ArcSight Management Center includes these steps.

Select an Installation Mode
Select a mode in which to install Software ArcSight Management Center on your selected machine. You
should plan to install as the root user. In addition, during the installation process, ArcMC will prompt
you for a user name, under which the application will be started.
You can install Software ArcSight Management Center in these modes:
l

GUI: In GUI mode, a wizard steps you through the installation and configuration process. For detailed
instructions, see "Installation Steps" on page 20.
Note: If you are using a Windows system to connect to the machine where Software ArcSight
Management Center is to be installed, and prefer to install in GUI mode, you must connect using
an X Window client, such as Xming for Windows.

l

l

Console: In Console mode, a command-line process steps you through the installation and
configuration process. See "Installation Steps" on page 20 for detailed instructions.
Silent: In Silent mode, the installation process is scripted. There is no need to interact with the
installer, as you provide the installation and configuration input through a file. See "Installation Steps"
on page 20 for detailed instructions.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 17 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation

Applying your License
A valid license is required for Software ArcSight Management Center. A license file is uniquely
generated for each instance of a product; therefore, you cannot use the same license file to install
multiple instances of the product.
To obtain your license, follow the instructions in the Electronic Delivery Receipt email received from
HPE after placing your order.
You will be prompted to install a license during the installation of ArcMC. If no license is provided, an
"Instant-On" license will be applied by default. The Instant-On license is valid for 30 days. During this
time, you should obtain and apply the correct license from the HPE Software Entitlement portal.

Start as a Service
If installation was performed as a root user, Software ArcSight Management Center can be configured
to start as a system service. For more information, see "Enabling/Disabling ArcSight Management
Center as a System Service" on page 26

Make Host Resolvable
For the Apache web process to start, the Software ArcSight Management Center hostname must be
resolvable. Add the hostname to either /etc/hosts or DNS.

Secure Your Credentials
After initial setup is complete, connect to the application and change the default password to a secure
password. To change the default password, follow the instructions in "Users/Groups on ArcMC" on
page 253.
Optionally, for additional security, rename the default admin username to a secure name. To change a
username, follow the instructions in "User Management" on page 263.

Install the ArcMC Agent (If Required)
Additionally, if you plan to manage one or more Software ArcMCs, Software Connector Appliances or
Software Loggers, you will need to install the ArcSight Management Center Agent on each. For more
information on manual ArcSight Management Center Agent installation, see "Installing the ArcSight
Management Center Agent" on page 32

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 18 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation

No installation is required for ArcMC appliance or the latest versions of software ArcMC and
software Logger.

Open Firewall Ports
Open any required ports on your firewall for best functionality. For a list of required open ports, see
"Configuring Firewall Rules" on page 27

Create an Account on the ArcSight Marketplace
The ArcSight Marketplace is an app store that enables rapid provisioning of your ArcSight SIEM
deployment with content updates, trusted security content packages, and best practices.
ArcSight Management Center requires a global administrative account with the ArcSight Marketplace in
order to download and perform some content updates. Browse to the Marketplace at
https://marketplace.saas.hpe.com/arcsight to set up your administrative account.

Installing ArcSight Management Center
The following section provides instructions to install Software ArcSight Management Center.
l

"Prerequisites for Installation" below

l

"Installation Steps" on the next page

l

"Enabling/Disabling ArcSight Management Center as a System Service" on page 26

l

"Configuring Firewall Rules" on page 27

Prerequisites for Installation
Please note and verify the following prerequisites before beginning the process of installing software
ArcMC

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 19 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation

Prerequisite

Description

File
Descriptors
Limit

The host must support a limit of 10240 file descriptors. Perform ulimit -n on the host to determine
its current level. If the limit does not equal 10240, then do the following:
1. Open (or create) /etc/security/limits.conf.
2. Set these two parameters:
* hard nofile 10240
* soft nofile 10240
3. Save the file.
4. Restart your session.

UTF-8
Support

Host must support UTF-8.

Unzip Package The unzip command path need to be set before installing Software ArcSight Management Center.
Non-Root
Account

You can installArcSight Management Center as a root or non-root user. However, when
installing as a root user, a non-root user account is required in order to run some required
processes.
l

When installing ArcSight Management Center as a root user, you can select the port on which it
listens for secure web connections (HTTPS). When installing as a non-root user, the port must be
configured to 9000. This value cannot be changed and must be externally accessible.

If ArcSight Management Center is installed as a non-root user, and the host is rebooted, ArcMC
services will fail to start automatically. Start them manually with this command:
/current/arcsight/arcmc/bin/arcmcd start
l

If installed with a non-root account, use an initialization script to launch services automatically. See
"Starting Services Automatically for a Non-Root Installation" on page 26.

Time Zone
Database

tzdata-2016g or later is required.

OS Upgrade

Upgrade to a supported operating system before performing the ArcMC installation. Refer to the
ArcSight Management Center Release Notes, available from the HPE ArcSight software community, for
the most current information on supported operating systems, supported browsers, and other technical
requirements.

Installation Steps
To begin the installation, select a mode in which to install Software ArcSight Management Center on
your selected machine. The three modes available are GUI Mode, Console Mode, and Silent Install.

GUI Mode Installation
In GUI Mode installation, you use the installer wizard to install the application.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 20 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation

To install Software ArcSight Management Center using the GUI mode:
1. Run these 2 commands from the directory where you copied the Software ArcSight Management
Center installer:
l

chmod +x ArcSight-ArcMC-2.6.0..0.bin

l

./ArcSight-ArcMC-2.6.0..0.bin

where is the build number of the latest installer.
The installation wizard starts. Review the dialog box, and then click Next.
2. Review the License Agreement details, and then scroll down to the end of the License Agreement
details. Select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click Next.
3. Specify or browse to a folder where you want to install ArcSight Management Center, as shown
below. The default installation directory is /opt. However, you should specify a new installation
directory in /opt that will easily identify ArcSight Management Center files, such as /opt/arcmc,
to distinguish them from files associated with other HPE ArcSight products.
4. Review the summary of installation information on the Pre-Installation Summary dialog, and
then click Install.
The ArcSight Management Center installer begins the installation process.
5. When installation is complete, click Next to begin the configuration wizard.
6. If you run the ArcSight Management Center software installer as a root user, the next dialog
enables you to specify an existing non-root user and to configure a port through which ArcSight
Management Center users will connect through the UI.
For example, you can enter 443, the standard HTTPS port, or any other that suits your needs. If
any port other than 443 is specified, users will need to enter the port number in the URL they use
to access the ArcSight Management Center UI.
Enter the user name of the non-root user and the HTTPS port number, and then click Next. (These
values may not be changed later in the process.)
7. After the software is installed, click Next to begin ArcSight Management Center initialization.
8. After initialization is complete, click Done to launch the ArcSight Management Center
Configuration wizard.
Note: The Configuration wizard should launch automatically. If it does not, use this command
to launch the wizard:
/current/arcsight/arcmc/bin/arcsight arcmcsetup

9. If you have run the ArcSight Management Center software installer as a root user, the next dialog
enables you to configure ArcSight Management Center to run as a system service. By default,
ArcSight Management Center runs as a standalone application, requiring a manual launch.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 21 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation

When you install ArcSight Management Center as a root user, a service called arcsight_arcmc
can be configured, created, and enabled at runlevel 3 and 5.
Additionally, a few libraries are added using ldconfig. For a complete list of those libraries, see
/etc/ld.so.conf.d/arcsight_arcmc.conf and /current/arcsight/install/ldconfig.out.
10. You have installed ArcSight Management Center. Click Start ArcSight Management Center
Now, or click Start ArcSight Management Center later, and then click Finish.
If you have selected to start ArcSight Management Center later, read the information in "The
ArcSight Management Center Daemon (arcmcd)" on page 30 to understand how to start ArcSight
Management Center at a later time.
11. If you selected Start ArcSight Management Center Now, click Finish to exit the wizard.
Alternatively, wait for the next dialog which provides the URL to access the ArcSight Management
Center interface.
ArcSight Management Center continues to start services and processes in the background. If you
have selected to continue within the wizard, follow the instructions on the dialog or use the
instructions in "Connecting to the ArcSight Management Center User Interface" on page 29 to
connect to the ArcSight Management Center.

Console Mode Installation
In Console Mode installation, you use a command-line interface to install the application.
After some initial steps in the CLI, the installation sequence is the same as the one described for the
GUI mode install in "Console Mode Installation" above. Follow the instructions provided for the GUI
mode install to complete the installation.

To install Software ArcSight Management Center using the Console mode:
1. Run these commands from the directory where you copied the ArcSight Management Center
software:
chmod +x ArcSight-ArcMC-2.6.0..0.bin
./ArcSight-ArcMC-2.6.0..0.bin -i console

where is the build number of the latest installer.
The installation wizard starts in command-line mode.
2. Press Enter to continue. Then, follow the prompts to complete installation and configuration.
Note: If ArcSight Management Center is installed in Console mode, it will be uninstalled in Console
mode as well. See "Uninstalling in Console Mode" on page 32 for more information.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 22 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation

Silent Mode Installation
Silent mode enables scripting of the installation process. Before you install ArcSight Management
Center in silent mode, create two properties files required for the silent mode installation:
l

A file to capture the installation properties

l

A file to capture the configuration properties

After you have generated the two files, you need to merge them into one file and use the resulting file
for silent mode installations.

About Licenses for Silent Mode Installations
As for any Software ArcSight Management Center installation, each silent mode installation requires a
unique license file. Obtain licenses from HPE Customer Support and install them on the machines on
which you will be installing in silent mode, or ensure that the location where the license is placed is
accessible from those machines.

Generating the Silent Install Properties File
This procedure generates the two properties files and then instructs you to combine them into one file.
The resulting file is used for future silent installations.
1. Log in to the machine on which you wish to generate the installation properties file.
If you want the silent mode installations to be done as root user, log in as root in this step.
Otherwise, log in as a non-root user.
2. Run this command:
./ArcSight-ArcMC-2.6.0..0.bin -r 

where  is the build number of the installer file,
and  is the location of the directory where the generated properties file
will be placed. This cannot be the same location where ArcSight Management Center is being
installed.
The properties file must be called installer.properties.
3. Install ArcSight Management Center in GUI mode, as described in "Silent Mode Installation" above
until you arrive at step 10.
At Step 10 of the installation procedure, do the following:
a. Click Previous instead of clicking Done to proceed further.
b. Then, click Cancel to stop the installation.
4. When the confirmation message appears, click Cancel. Click Quit to clear this message.
5. Navigate to the directory location you specified for the installer.properties file earlier.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 23 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation

The following is an example of the generated installer.properties file.
# Replay feature output
# --------------------# This file was built by the Replay feature of InstallAnywhere.
# It contains variables that were set by Panels, Consoles or Custom Code.
#Choose Install Folder
#--------------------USER_INSTALL_DIR=/opt///installdir
#Install
#-------fileOverwrite_/opt///installdir/UninstallerData/Uninstall_ArcSight_Management_Center_
2.1.lax=Yes
#Intervention Required
#--------------------USER_AND_PORT_1=username
USER_AND_PORT_2=443

1. Start the configuration wizard with the option to record configuration properties:
/current/arcsight/arcmc/bin/arcsight arcmcsetup -i recorderui

When prompted to enter a file name to capture the configuration properties, enter a meaningful
name; for example, config.properties, and then browse to choose the same directory as the
installer.properties file.
2. Step through the configuration wizard, as described starting at Step 10 of "Silent Mode
Installation" on the previous page.
3. After the configuration properties file is generated, append the contents of this file to the
installer.properties file generated in the previous procedure, "Generating the Silent Install
Properties File" on the previous page, to create a combined file.
For example, you can use the cat command to concatenate both files:
cat installer.properties config.properties > 

4. Include the following property in the combined file:
ARCSIGHT_CONAPP_SETUP_PROPERTIES=/


where  is the path of the directory where the combined file is located,
and  is the file name of the combined file you created earlier.
Use the combined file for future ArcSight Management Center silent mode installations, as
described in "Installing Using the Generated Properties File" on the next page below.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 24 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation

Installing Using the Generated Properties File
To install ArcSight Management Center using Silent mode, do the following.
1. Uninstall the previously installed version of ArcSight Management Center, as explained in
"Uninstalling Software ArcSight Management Center" on page 31
2. Make sure the machine on which you install ArcSight Management Center complies with the
requirements listed in the HPE ArcSight Management Center Release Notes, and the prerequisites
listed in "Prerequisites for Installation" on page 19.
3. Copy the combined properties file you generated previously to the location where you have copied
the ArcSight Management Center software.
4. Do one of the following:
l

l

Edit the licensePanel.path property in the silent mode properties file to include the location
of the license file for this instance of the installation. (A unique license file is required for each
instance of installation.), OR
Set the licensePanel.path property to point to a file, such as arcmc_license.zip. Then,
for each instance of the silent mode installation, copy the relevant license file to the location and
rename it to arcmc_license.zip. Doing so will avoid the need to update the combined
properties file for each installation.

5. Run these 2 commands from the directory where you copied the ArcSight Management Center
software:
l

l

chmod +x ArcSight-ArcMC-2.6.0..0.bin
./ArcSight-ArcMC-2.6.0..0.bin -i silent -f

where  is the build number of the installer file.

The rest of the installation and configuration proceeds silently without requiring further input.
In some cases, a spurious error message may be displayed: "SLF4J: Failed to load
class "org.slf4j.impl.StaticLoggerBinder". This is a harmless error and may
be ignored.

Next Steps After Installation
Finally, to get started managing products with ArcMC, you need to add hosts to manage. For more
information on adding hosts, see "About Adding a Host" on page 54.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 25 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation

Enabling/Disabling ArcSight Management Center as a System Service
If ArcSight Management Center is installed to run as a system service, you can use arcmcd to manage
ArcMCprocesses. For more information, see "The ArcSight Management Center Daemon (arcmcd)" on
page 30.

To enable or disable ArcSight Management Center as a system service:
1. On the menu bar, click Adminstration > System Admin.
2. In the navigation bar, click Startup Settings.
3. Under Software Startup Options, select Start as a Service to enable starting as a system
service, or select Do not start as a service to disable.
4. Click Save.
After enablement, you can reboot (which will automatically restart the service) or start the
service manually without a reboot.

Starting Services Automatically for a Non-Root Installation
If ArcSight Management Center is installed as a non-root user, and the host is rebooted, ArcMC services
will fail to start automatically. However, you can set them to start automatically by using an initialization
script.
Since the initialization script runs as su, it does not log to the console.
An example script is shown here. This is only an example. Your own script will need to be tailored for
your environment.
#!/bin/sh
# ArcMC

Wrapper script for the Arcsight Management Center

# processname:

arcsight_arcmc

# chkconfig:

2345 99 01

# description:

Arcsight Management Center

DAEMON=//current/arcsight/arcmc/bin/arcmcd
DAEMON_USER=
# Exit if the package is not installed
[ -x "$DAEMON" ] || exit 0

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 26 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation

if [ $UID -ne 0 ] ; then
echo "You must run this as root."
exit 4
fi
su $DAEMON_USER -c "$DAEMON $1 $2"
exit $?

The DAEMON variable is used to specify the directory where arcmcd process is running.
The DAEMON_USER variable is used to specify which non-root user ArcMC will run as.
Finally, the su command simply wraps your existing script (defined in the variable DAEMON) and passes
any parameters to the $DAEMON script/

To configure an initialization script:
1. SSH to the VM using root user credentials.
2. Go to /etc/init.d
3. Enter the command vi arcsight_arcmc to create a service.
4. Enter the text of your script and save the file.
5. Give execute permission for the script using the command chmod +x arcsight_arcmc
6. Register the script using the command
chkconfig –add arcsight_arcmc
7. Enter the command chkconfig | grep arcsight_arcmc to determine what the
chkconfig will report after you add the init script. Expected results:
arcsight_arcmc 0:off 1:off 2:on 3:on 4:on 5:on 6:off

Configuring Firewall Rules
Before ArcSight Management Center can receive data, some ports on must be opened through the
firewall.
l

l

For Software ArcSight Management Center, you are responsible for setting up the firewall. HPE
ArcSight recommends that you configure your firewall so that only the required ports are open.
For the ArcSight Management Center Appliance, HPE ArcSight provides a script to configure your
firewall. See "Configuring Firewall Rules" above for more information.

You can configure the firewall on your ArcSight Management Center as you would on any server, by
editing iptables-config and white-listing the appropriate ports. For ArcSight Management Center
Appliances only, you can use the provided script to close all but the appropriate ports in your firewall.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 27 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation

Tip: Be sure to update the firewall configuration when you add or remove any service or function
that requires an open port, such as FTP, SNMP, or local connector.
After you first install or upgrade ArcMC, configure the firewall to be open only for the following ports,
depending on your form factor and install:
Default Inbound Ports
Service

ArcMC
Appliance

Software ArcMC root
install

Software ArcMC non-root
install

ArcMC Agent

7913

7913

7913

FTP

21

N/A

N/A

HTTPS

443

443

9000

NTP

123

N/A

N/A

Remote management of
connectors

9001-9008

N/A

9001-9008

SSH

22

22

22

Configuring the Firewall on ArcSight Management Center Appliance
Your ArcSight Management Center Appliance includes a script that you can use to configure the
firewall. This script looks at your current ArcSight Management Center configuration and decides what
ports to keep open. Alternatively, you can configure the firewall on your appliance as you would on any
server, by editing iptables-config and white-listing the appropriate ports.
When called without arguments, the /usr/sbin/arcfirewall script previews and displays the ports
that it will keep open, but takes no action to alter the firewall configuration. To alter firewall
configuration, use the -set option.

To preview the list of ports the script will open:
1. Log into the appliance as root.
2. Run the following command:
/usr/sbin/arcfirewall

The script displays the ports that it would open, as shown in the following example.
[root@myserver ~]# /usr/sbin/arcfirewall
PREVIEW MODE - NO FIREWALL CHANGES...
List of ports that firewall would allow inbound from any IP address:
21/tcp
22/tcp
443/tcp

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 28 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation

7913/tcp
9001/tcp
9002/tcp
9003/tcp
9004/tcp
9005/tcp
9006/tcp
9007/tcp
9008/tcp
123/udp

To configure the firewall:
1. Log into the appliance as root.
2. Run the following command:
[root@myserver ~]# /usr/sbin/arcfirewall --set

The script configures the firewall leaving the previewed ports open.
If you configure an ArcMC appliance local container and assign it a network port, and then run
arcfirewall, the script will detect that the new port should be opened and list it in the preview of
ports. You can then run arcfirewall with the --set option, as described above, to actually
open the port.
If arcfirewall is not run, and the port not opened, the connector will not receive any events.

ArcSight Management Center Operations
This section details the operation of ArcSight Management Center: how to connect, which processes
run while ArcSight Management Center is active, and commands for using the ArcSight Management
Center command-line utility (arcmcd).

Connecting to the ArcSight Management Center User
Interface
Use this URL to connect to ArcSight Management Center:
https://:

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 29 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation
where hostname or IP address is the system on which you installed ArcSight Management Center.
If ArcSight Management Center was installed as root and the default port was used, then  is optional.
To login for the first time, use the following default credentials:
Username: admin
Password: password

For security, change the default credentials immediately after first logging in. For more information on
changing credentials, see "User Management" on page 263.

ArcSight Management Center Processes
The following processes run as part of ArcSight Management Center:
l

apache

l

aps

l

postgresql

l

web

Logging Into ArcMC If the Web Service is Down
If the web service stops, you can connect to ArcMC to restart it.
1. SSH to the ArcMC host.
2. Enter /current/arcsight/arcmc/bin/arcmcd stop
all
3. Enter /current/arcsight/arcmc/bin/arcmcd status.
Wait for some time until all process status report “Not monitored”.
4. Enter /current/arcsight/arcmc/bin/arcmcd start
all. Wait for some time until all the process status report “running".
5. Log into the ArcMC web UI as usual.

The ArcSight Management Center Daemon (arcmcd)
arcmcd is available only for the software form factor of ArcMC.
The arcmcd utility enables a number of management and control tasks for the ArcSight Management
Center software process, including starting, stopping and restarting. The syntax to run arcmcd is as
follows:
/current/arcsight/arcmc/bin/arcmcd 

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 30 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation
Where  is the installation directory of ArcSight Management Center, and 
is a command listed below.
If ArcSight Management Center is installed to run as a system service, you can use arcmcd to manage a
specific ArcMCprocess.
arcmcd Commands
Command

Description

start

Starts aps, apache, postgresql, and web processes.

stop

Stops aps, apache, postgresql, and web processes.

restart

Restarts aps, apache, postgresql, and web processes.

status

Displays the current status of all processes.

quit

Stops aps, apache, postgresql, and web processes, as well as the ArcSight
Management Center application.

start 

Starts the named process. For example, start apache.

stop 

Stops the named process. For example, stop apache.

restart 

Restarts the named process. For example, restart apache.

Uninstalling Software ArcSight Management Center
Uninstall ArcSight Management Center in the same user mode in which the installation was performed.
For example, if you performed the installation as root, then you must perform the uninstallation as root

Uninstalling in GUI Mode
To uninstall Software ArcSight Management Center in GUI mode:
1. In the directory where you installed ArcSight Management Center, enter:
/UninstallerData/Uninstall_ArcSight_Management_Center_2.6.0

2. The uninstall wizard starts. Click Uninstall to start uninstalling ArcSight Management Center and
follow the prompts in the wizard.
3. After uninstalling, manually delete the /userdata directory.
Note: If using GUI mode and uninstalling ArcSight Management Center software over an SSH
connection, make sure that you have enabled X window forwarding using the -X option, so
that you can view the screens of the uninstall wizard.
If using PuTTY, you also need an X11 client on the host from which you are connecting.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 31 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation

Uninstalling in Console Mode
If you installed ArcSight Management Center in Console mode, then, by default, uninstallation occurs in
Console mode.

To uninstall in Console mode:
1. At the command line, enter: /UninstallerData/Uninstall_ArcSight_
Management_Center_2.6.0

2. After uninstalling, manually delete the /userdata directory.
At the prompt, press Enter again to confirm uninstallation. The application will be uninstalled.

Uninstalling in Silent Mode
If you installed ArcSight Management Center in Silent mode, then, by default, uninstallation occurs in
Silent mode.

To uninstall in Silent mode:
1. At the command line, enter: /UninstallerData/Uninstall_ArcSight_
Management_Center_2.6.0.
The application will be uninstalled without further interaction.
2. After uninstalling, manually delete the /userdata directory.

Installing the ArcSight Management Center Agent
The ArcSight Management Center Agent runs on managed hosts and enables their management by
ArcSight Management Center. Whether you need to install the ArcSight Management Center on a
managed host depends on the host’s form factor, which is summarized in the table and explained in
detail below.
Host Type

ArcMC Agent
Required?

Agent Installation

ArcMC, Logger, or Connector Appliance hardware form
factor (all versions)

Yes

Automatically performed when adding
host.

Software Connector Appliance (all versions)

Yes

Manual installation required; perform
before adding host.

Software Logger (before version 6.0)

Yes

Manual installation required; perform
before adding host.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 32 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation

Host Type

ArcMC Agent
Required?

Agent Installation

Software Logger (version 6.0 or later)

Yes

Automatically performed when adding
host.

Software ArcMC (before version 2.1)

Yes

Manual installation required; perform
before adding host.

Software ArcMC (version 2.1 or later)

Yes

Automatically performed when adding
host.

Software Connector (any)

No

None. ArcMC Agent is not required.

Event Broker

No

None. ArcMC Agent is not required.

Automatic Installation
The ArcMC Agent is automatically installed when adding any of the following host types to ArcMC:
l

Any hardware appliance (ArcSight Management Center Appliance, Connector Appliance, or Logger
Appliance)

l

Software Logger 6.0 or later

l

Software ArcMC 2.1 or later

As part of the Add Host process, ArcSight Management Center automatically pushes the ArcSight
Management Center Agent installer to the added host, installs the Agent, and then starts the service.
The host is then ready to manage in ArcSight Management Center. You will not need to take any
manual installation steps. For more information about the Add Host process, see "About Adding a Host"
on page 54.
Perl is required for the automatic installation of the ArcMC Agent. Ensure that Perl is installed on
the host prior to attempting to add the host to ArcMC.

Manual Installation
You must perform a manual installation of the ArcMC Agent on any of these host types prior to adding
them to ArcMC for management:
l

Software ArcSight Management Center (before version 2.1)

l

Software Logger (before version 6.0)

l

Software Connector Appliance (all versions)

An ArcMC used to manage products must have an Agent installed with the same version number as the
ArcMC. For example, if your ArcMC 2.1 will be used to manage products, then the ArcMC Agent running
on that ArcMC must also be version 2.1.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 33 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation

To manually install the ArcSight Management Center Agent:
1. In the directory to where you transferred the installer, run these 2 commands:
l

l

chmod +x ArcSight-ArcMCAgent-2.6.0..0.bin
./ArcSight-ArcMCAgent-2.6.0..0.bin LAX_VM
/current/local/jre/bin/java

where is the build number of the latest installer and
 is the installation directory of the software product.
The installation wizard starts.
2. Review the dialog box, and then click Next.The required installation path is the install directory
(that is, the same directory where Software Connector Appliance or Software Logger is installed).
3. Follow the prompts to complete the installation. The ArcMC Agent is automatically started upon
completion of the installation process.
If the ArcMC Agent fails to install on the localhost, localhost management will not be enabled.
To verify correct installation of the Agent, check on the Hosts tab under Issues. Follow the
instructions shown in the tooltip to install the Agent properly and resolve any issues shown.

Software Connectors and Event Broker
Software connectors and Event Broker do not require the installation of the ArcSight Management
Center Agent in order to be managed by ArcMC.

ArcSight Management Center Agent Operations
After installation, the arcmcagent process runs on the managed host. This process automatically starts
after either automatic or manual installation. However, if the Agent stops for any reason, it can be
manually started.

To manually start, stop, or restart the Agent on an appliance host:
1. On the managed host, click Setup > System Admin > Process status.
2. Select arcmcagent from the list of processes.
3. Click Start, Stop, or Restart, as necessary.
On Software ArcMC, Software Connector Appliance, or Software Logger

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 34 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 2: Software Installation

To manually start or stop the Agent on Software ArcMC, Software Connector Appliance,
or Software Logger:
1. Run /current/arcsight//bin/  arcmcagent

Agent Verification
To verify that the Agent is running on a host, use one of the following procedures:
In the managed host’s GUI, click Setup > System Admin > Process Status. The ArcSight
Management Center Agent (arcmcagent) will be shown as a process in the running state.

l

(For Software ArcMC, Software Connector Appliance, or Software Logger Only) After you install the
Agent, run this command at the command line:

l

/current/arcsight//bin/ status

The Agent is shown as a service in the running state.

Uninstalling the ArcSight Management Center Agent
To uninstall the ArcSight Management Center Agent, run the following command:
/arcmcagent/UninstallerData/Uninstall_ArcSight_Management_
Center_Agent_

where  is the name of the installation directory, and  is the
version, of the ArcMC Agent.
The Uninstall Wizard will launch. Click Uninstall to begin the wizard. When the uninstallation completes,
click Done.
l

l

Always stop and then uninstall any previous version of the ArcSight Management Center Agent
before installing a new version.
If uninstalling either Software ArcMC, Software Logger, or Software Connector Appliance, make
sure that the ArcSight Management Center Agent is uninstalled from the node before beginning
the uninstall of the managed product.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 35 of 316

Chapter 3: The User Interface
The following topics are discussed here.

•
•
•
•
•

Overview
The Menu Bar
Stats (EPS In/Out)
Site Map
History Management

36
36
38
38
39

Overview
This chapter provides a general overview of the ArcSight Management Center interface. ArcSight
Management Center uses a browser-based user interface. Refer to the ArcSight Management Center
Release Notes for the latest information on supported browsers.

The Menu Bar
The menu bar provides access to the main functional components of ArcSight Management Center. The
menu bar includes the Dashboard, Node Management, Configuration Management, User
Management and Administration menus.

Monitoring Summary
The Monitoring Summary page displays information on all monitored products.
l

l

l

The aggregated health status for products of each type is displayed in pie graph format, showing
total number of nodes, as well as the number corresponding to each status. A summary table shows
the same data in percentage format.
The management panel displays the Monitoring Summary table, showing all products which are
currently reporting issues.
The navigation panel enables you to display a monitoring summary for individual product types in
the management panel. Click the product type to display the product’s monitoring summary.

For more information on viewing and configuring monitoring, see "Dashboard" on page 180.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 36 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 3: The User Interface

Node Management
Use Node Management to manage any of the following node types:
l

Software Connectors

l

Hardware or Software Connector Appliances

l

Hardware or Software Loggers

l

Hardware or Software ArcSight Management Centers

l

Event Broker

For more information on adding and managing nodes, see "Managing Nodes" on page 40. From the
same menu, you can also perform selected management tasks on managed ArcSight products. See
"Managing HPE ArcSight Products" on page 70.

Configuration Management
Use Configuration Management to create and manage node configurations, synchronization
(pushing) of configurations across multiple nodes, and expedite the initial configuration of Loggers.
You can manage any of these configuration types:
l

l

Subscriber configurations for:
o

ArcSight Management Center

o

Connectors

o

Connector Appliances

o

Destinations

o

Loggers

o

System administration

Other configurations:
o Initial configurations for Loggers
o

Logger event archives

o

Management of Logger peers

o

Management of Event Broker

For more information on subscriber configuration management, see "Managing Configurations" on
page 123.
For more information on initial configurations, see "Initial Configuration Management" on page 157.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 37 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 3: The User Interface

User Management
User management enables you to manage users across all of your managed nodes. You can create and
edit users, user lists, their associations, and roles. You can also check to see if each node complies with a
list of authorized users on the managing ArcMC.
For more information about user management, see "Overview" on page 170

Administration
The Administration menu contains these items:
l

l

l

l

l

l

Backup enables you to back up your current ArcSight Management Center configuration. For more
information, see "Managing Backups and Restores" on page 196.
Repositories enables you to manage repositories that store files, such as logs, certificates, and
drivers. For more information, see "Managing Repositories" on page 203.
Snapshot enables you to take a snapshot image of HPE ArcSight Management Center, to produce
logs that are useful in troubleshooting. For more information, see " Snapshots" on page 199.
Restore enables you to restore your configuration from a saved backup. For more information, see
"Managing Backups and Restores" on page 196.
System Admin describes the system administration tools that enable you to create and manage
users and user groups, and to configure security settings for your system. For more information, see
"System Administration" on page 220.
Consumption Report: generates a report on Logger data consumption for selected managed nodes.

Stats (EPS In/Out)
The Stats menu item shows the total Events Per Second (EPS) in and out from all managed connectors
(standalone SmartConnectors and connectors running on managed hosts).

Site Map
For ease of accessibility and convenience, the Site Map links to all pages in the ArcSight Management
Center UI.
To access the site map: on the main ArcMC toolbar, click Site Map. Select the desired link to navigate.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 38 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 3: The User Interface

History Management
History management enables you to quickly and easily access previously-navigated pages. History
management is available for Node Management, Configuration Management, User Management pages,
and for some Administration pages.
In Node Management, the navigation tree shows the full path for any item selected on the tree. Click
any node in the path to navigate directly to the corresponding page.
You also can return to any previously-browsed page by clicking the corresponding link in the
breadcrumb trail.
In addition, you can use your browser's Back and Forward buttons to navigate to previously visited
pages.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 39 of 316

Chapter 4: Managing Nodes
The following topics are discussed here.

•
•
•
•
•
•

Overview
Node Management
The Navigation Tree
The Management Panel
Locations
Hosts

40
41
41
42
52
54

Overview
A node is a networked HPE ArcSight product that can be centrally managed throughArcSight
Management Center. Each node is associated with a single networked host which has been assigned a
hostname, an IP address, or both.
Node types can include any of the following HPE ArcSight products:
l

Connector Appliances or Software Connector Appliances

l

Logger Appliances or Software Loggers

l

Containers or software connectors

l

Other ArcSight Management Centers, either software or appliances.

l

Event Broker

A single host, such as a single deployed Event Broker, can comprise multiple nodes for management
purposes. In addition, a node can be in a parent or child relationship with other nodes.
You can perform any of the following node management tasks:
l

View managed nodes by location, by host, or by node type.

l

Add, view, edit, and delete locations for hosts.

l

Add nodes from a host, import hosts from a CSV file, view and delete hosts, view all hosts in a
location, update software on hosts, move hosts to different locations, and scan hosts for new
connectors or containers.

For more information on adding hosts, see "About Adding a Host" on page 54.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 40 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

Node Management
To manage nodes, on the menu bar, click Node Management > View All Nodes. The Node
Management UI displays. The Node Management UI comprises two panels:
l
l

The left side displays the navigation tree.
The right side displays the management panel, enabling you to perform management operations on
items selected in the navigation tree.

The Navigation Tree
The navigation tree organizes managed nodes into a hierarchy, and comprises the following:
System: System displays the entire set of nodes managed by ArcSight Management Center.
Location: Individual locations are displayed under System, listed in the order in which they were
added. Locations are logical groupings you can use to organize a list of hosts. For more information, see
"Locations" on page 52.
Host: Each location branch shows all hosts assigned to that location, listed by hostname, in the
order in which they were added. For more information, see "Hosts" on page 54.
Node Types: Each host branch shows all managed nodes associated with that host. A node can be any
of the following types:
Connector Appliance or Software Connector Appliance: Each Connector Appliance (hardware
or software) is shown as a separate node.
Logger Appliance or Software Logger: Each Logger (hardware or software) is shown as a
separate node.
ArcSight Management Center: Each ArcSight Management Center (hardware or software) is
shown as a separate node.
Container: If the host includes any containers, each is shown as a node.
Connector: If a container node contains a connector, the connector is shown under the container
node in which it is contained.
Event Broker: A managed Event Broker is shown as a node.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 41 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes
Since items in the tree are organized hierarchically, each item in the tree includes all branches displayed
below it. For example, a Location branch includes all hosts assigned to that location. Click the wedge
icon to toggle the view of any branch and any items included in the branch.

The Management Panel
Select an item in the navigation tree to display its details on one of the tabs in the central management
panel. For example, to display the details of a host shown in the navigation tree, select the host in the
tree. The management panel to the right of the tree will display details and controls pertaining to
selected host.

Management Tabs
The tabs displayed in the management panel depend on the type of item selected in the navigation tree.
The management tabs displayed will show detailed information associated with the selected item,
depending on its position in the hierarchy.
Selected Item Type in Navigation
Tree

Tabs Shown in Management Panel

System

Locations, Hosts, Containers, Connectors, ConApps, Loggers, ArcMCs,
EB Nodes

Location

Hosts, Containers, Connectors, ConApps, Loggers, ArcMCs, EB Nodes

Host

Containers, Connectors, ConApps, Loggers, ArcMCs, EB Nodes

Node

Connectors, ConApps, Loggers, ArcMCs, EB Nodes

For example, if you selected a location item from the navigation tree, the Hosts, Containers,
Connectors, ConApps, Loggers ArcMCs and EB Nodes tabs would be shown. Each tab would display
the items of the named type associated with the selected location, including details on those items.

Working with Items in the Management Panel
Selecting One or Multiple Items: To select an item from a list of items in the management panel, click
the item. Use Shift+Click to select multiple adjacent list items, or Ctrl+Click to select multiple nonadjacent items.
Column Settings:Click the gear icon to change column settings:
l
l

Sorting: To sort data by a column, select either Sort Ascending or Sort Descending.
Column Display: To change the columns displayed in a table, select Columns. Then toggle one or
more columns to display.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 42 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

l

Filter: To filter a list of items, select Filters. Then enter one or more filter criteria to display items
matching those criteria.

Refreshing a List: To refresh the data in a list, click Refresh in the upper right corner.

Tab Controls
These controls are commonly displayed on all tabs in the management panel:
l
l

l

Toolbar Buttons: Toolbar buttons enable operations related to the items on the tab.
Items Table: Items corresponding to the tab header are displayed in a table. For example, locations
are listed in tabular format on the Locations tab.
Bulk Operations Buttons: On most tabs, bulk operations buttons enable you to perform operations
on one or more items. Choose one or multiple items in the list, and then click the button to perform
the indicated operation. For example, to delete multiple items such as hosts, select one or more hosts
on the Hosts tab, and then click Delete. The selected hosts would be deleted.

In addition, each tab may have controls individual to that item type. For example, the Connectors tab
includes controls related to the management of connectors (see "Managing Connectors" on page 94).

The Locations Tab
The Locations tab displays all locations defined in ArcSight Management Center. The Locations tab
includes these buttons:
Add
Location

Adds a new location. For more information, see "Adding a Location" on page 52

Delete

Deletes one or more selected locations from ArcMC. For more information, see "Deleting a Location" on
page 53

The Locations table displays these parameters for each location.
l

Name: Location name.

l

Number of Hosts: Number of hosts assigned to the location.

l

Action: Drop-down includes a control for editing a location. For more information on editing a
location, see "Editing a Location" on page 53.

For more information on managing locations, see "Locations" on page 52.

The Hosts Tab
The Hosts tab displays all hosts associated with the location selected in the navigation tree. The Hosts
tab includes these buttons:

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 43 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

Add
Host

Adds a host. Available on the Hosts tab when a location is selected in the navigation tree. For more
information on adding a host, see "About Adding a Host" on page 54.

Move

Moves selected hosts to a new location. For more information, see "Moving a Host to a Different Location" on
page 65

Update Updates the ArcMC Agent on selected hosts. If the Agent is not currently installed, this button will install the
Agent Agent. For more information, see "Updating (or Installing) the ArcMC Agent " on page 66.
Delete

Deletes selected hosts from ArcMC. For more information, see "Deleting a Host" on page 65

The Hosts table displays these parameters for each host:
l

Hostname: Fully qualified domain name (FQDN) or IP address of the host. The hostname must
match the hostname in the host’s SSL certificate. (If IP address was used to add the host, then the
certificate will match the IP address used.)

l

Path: Path to the host.

l

Agent Version: Version number of the ArcSight Management Center Agent running on the host.

l

Issues: Status of any issues associated with the host. Possible indicators include:
o

None: No issues are associated with the host.

o

Internet connection Not Present: The host is currently not reachable by internet connection.
Displayed when ArcMC is not able to connect to the Marketplace for retrieving parser upgrade
versions. If the user environment needs a proxy server for an internet connection, configure the
logger.properties file. If the user environment is an appliance, save the DNS settings on the System
Admin > Network page.

o

Valid Marketplace Certificate Not Found in ArcMC: Displayed when the Marketplace certificate
does not match the one found in ArcMC's trust store.

o

Host Certificate Mismatch: The hostname does not match the hostname in the SSL certificate.
For instructions on downloading and importing certificates for the host, see "Downloading and
Importing Host Certificates" on page 68. If this issue is displayed for the localhost, and the
certificate cannot be downloaded, please restart the web service on the localhost.

o

ArcMC Agent Out of Date: The host’s Agent version cannot be upgraded from the managing
ArcMC, or the ArcSight Management Center cannot communicate with the ArcSight Management
Center Agent on the managed node. You may need to manually install the ArcMC Agent. For
requirements and instructions, see "Installing the ArcSight Management Center Agent" on page 32

o
o

ArcMC Agent Stopped: The Agent process on the host has been stopped.
ArcMC Agent Upgrade Recommended: The host's Agent version is older than the one on the
managing ArcMC. An Agent upgrade is recommended.

o

ArcMC Agent Uninstalled: The Agent on the host has been uninstalled.

o

ArcMC Agent Down: The Agent on the host is not running.

o

Update the authentication credentials on the localhost, and then install the ArcMC Agent.: For a
localhost added for remote management, authentication credentials need to be updated to ensure

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 44 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

authentication, and then the ArcMC Agent needs to be installed to enable management. Take both
of these steps to correct this issue.
o

Error in REST Authentication.: The Event Broker node lacks the ArcMC certificate,
ArcMC session ID, or ArcMC URL and port. To resolve this issue:
l Make sure the user has the permission rights for the Event broker operations.
l

l

l

l

Make sure the valid ArcMC certificate (with FQDN and .crt extension) is present in the Event
Broker's location: /opt/arcsight/k8s-hostpath-volume/eb/arcmccerts
Make sure that the ArcMC URL is updated with correct FQDN and port in ArcSight Installer
> Event Broker Configuration > ArcMC_Monitoring field.
Note that each time time the user replaces the ArcMC certificate to the EB's location, the EB's
webservice pod has to be restarted for the new certificate to be read and to be updated in the
trust store.

Model: If the host is an appliance, this shows the HPE ArcSight model number of the appliance. If the
host is not an appliance, the label Software is shown.

l

Type: Type of installation, either ArcMC Appliance or Software.

l

Version:Version number of the software on the host.

l

Action: Drop-down shows controls for executing host management tasks, which include:
o Scanning a host
o

Downloading certificate details

o

Updating host credentials

For more information on host management, see "Hosts" on page 54.

The Containers Tab
The Containers tab displays all containers associated with the item selected in the navigation tree. For
example, if you selected a location in the tree, since locations include hosts, the Containers tab would
display all containers associated with all hosts in the selected location. The Containers tab includes
these buttons:
Properties

Set properties on selected containers. For more information, see "Updating Container Properties" on
page 82.

Certificates Manage certificates on selected containers. For more information, see "Managing Certificates on a
Container" on page 89.
FIPS

Enable or disable FIPS on selected containers. For more information, see "Enabling FIPS on a Container" on
page 86.

Upgrade

Upgrades all connectors in selected containers. For more information, see "Upgrading All Connectors in a
Container" on page 83.

Credentials Manage credentials on selected containers. For more information, see "Changing Container Credentials" on
page 82.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 45 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

Logs

Manage logs on selected containers. For more information, see "Viewing Container Logs" on page 85.

Restart

Restart all connectors in selected containers. For more information, see "Restarting a Container" on page 85.

Delete

Deletes the selected containers from ArcSight Management Center. For more information, see "Deleting a
Container" on page 81.

The Containers table includes the following columns:
l

Name: Name of the container.

l

Path: Path to the container.

l

Issues: Status of any issues associated with the container.

l

Port: Port number through which the container is communicating.

l

Framework Ver: Framework version number of the container.

l

Parser Ver: Parser version number of the container.

l

Status: Status of the container. Possible values for container status are:

l
l

o

Improper configuration: Initial default state.

o

Initializing connection: The connector has a resolvable URL, but ArcSight Management Center has
not logged in to the connector yet.

o

Down: There was an exception trying execute the login command.

o

Unauthorized: The login command was executed, but login has failed.

o

Connecting: The login is in progress.

o

Connected: The login was successful.

o

Empty: Login successful, but the container doesn't have connectors.

o

Initialized: Login successful and the container has connectors.

o

Unknown: No information on status. To resolve, manually SSH to the system and restart the
container.

Last Check: Date and time of last status check.
Action: Drop-down shows a variety of controls for executing container management tasks, which
include:
o

Edit Container

o

Send Container Command

o

Add Connector

o

Run Logfu

o

Download Certificate

o

Display Certificates

o

Deploy (to ArcExchange)

o

Run FlexConnector Wizard

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 46 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes
For more information on container management, see "Upgrading All Connectors in a Container" on
page 83

The Connectors Tab
The Connectors tab displays all software connectors associated with the item selected in the navigation
tree. For example, if you selected a container in the navigation tree, the Connectors tab would show all
connectors in the selected container. For the details on managing connectors, see "Managing
Connectors" on page 94.
The Connectors tab includes these buttons, which perform operations on one or more selected
connectors:
Add
Connector

(Only shown when a container is selected in the navigation tree.) Adds a connector to the selected
container.

Runtime
Parameters

Edit the runtime parameters on selected connectors. For more information, see "Editing Connector
Parameters" on page 97.

Destinations

Sets the destinations of selected connectors. For more information, see "Managing Destinations" on
page 99.

Parameters

Sets parameters for selected connectors. For more information, see "Editing Connector Parameters" on
page 97.

Delete

Deletes connectors from ArcSight Management Center. For more information, see "Deleting a Connector"
on page 106.

The Connectors table displays the following parameters for each connector:
l

Name: Name of the connector.

l

Path: Path to the connector.

l

Type: Type of connector.

l

EPS In: Events per second received by the connector.

l

EPS Out: Events per second sent by the connector to its destination.

l

Cache: Connector cache size.

l

Last Check: Date and time of the last status check.

l

Action: Drop-down shows a variety of controls for executing software connector management tasks.
These include:
o

Send Connector Command

o

Share a connector to ArcExchange

o

Edit a FlexConnector

For more information on connector management, see "Managing Connectors" on page 94.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 47 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

The Connector Summary Tab
To view a single connector in detail, click the connector in the navigation tree. The toolbar on the
summary tab includes the following buttons for operations on the connector:
Connector
Command

Sends a command to the connector. For more information, see "Sending a Command to a
Connector" on page 107.

Remove
Connector

Removes the connector. For more information, see "Deleting a Connector" on page 106.

Run Logfu

Run Logfu diagnostics on the connector. For more information, see "Running Logfu on a
Connector" on page 107.

Share

Shares the connector through ArcExchange. For more information, see "Sharing Connectors in
ArcExchange" on page 113.

Tables below the toolbar show connector specifics, including basic connector data, parameters, and
connector destinations. These tables include the following columns:

Connector Data
l

Type: Type of connector.

l

Status: Connector status.

l

l

l

Input Events (SLC): Total number of events received by the connector since it was last checked
(generally once per minute).
Input EPS (SLC): Events per second received by the connector since it was last checked (generally
once per minute).
In addition, the columns to the right include tools for editing a connector, editing runtime
parameters, adding a failover destination, and sending a destination command.

Connector Parameters
Click Connector Parameters to toggle display of this table. Connector Parameters includes:
l
l

l

Click to edit parameters.
Parameters: Parameters can include connector network port, IP address , and protocol, and other
information.
Value: Parameter value.

Table Parameters (WUC Connectors Only)
WUC connectors (only) display these parameters.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 48 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

l

Domain Name: Connector domain name.

l

Host Name: Connector host name.

l

User Name: Connector user name.

l

Security Logs: Indicates whether security events are collected.

l

System Logs: Indicates whether system events are collected.

l

Application: Indicates whether application events are collected from the Common Application Event
Log.

l

Custom Log Names: List of custom application log names, if any.

l

Microsoft OS Version: Microsoft operating system for the connector.

l

Locale: Connector locale.

Destinations
Click Destinations to toggle display of this table. The Destinations table includes:
l
l
l

l

Click to add additional destinations.
Name: Destination name.
Output Events (SLC): Total number of events output by the connector to the destination since it
was last checked (generally once per minute).
Output EPS (SLC): Events per second output by the connector to the destination since it was last
checked (generally once per minute).

l

Cached: Total number of events cached to be transmitted to the destination.

l

Type: Destination type. Destination types are described in the SmartConnector User's Guide.

l

Location: Location of the destination.

l

Device Location: Location of the device on which the destination is located.

l

Comment: Comments on the destination.

l

Parameters: Destination-specific parameters, such as IP address , port, and protocol.

l

Action Buttons: Action buttons enable destination management tasks, such as editing the
destination, editing the runtime parameters, adding a new failover destination, sending destination
commands and removing the destination.

For more information on managing connectors, see "Managing Connectors" on page 94.

The ConApps Tab
The ConApps tab displays all hardware and software Connector Appliances associated with the item
selected in the navigation tree. For example, if you selected System in the navigation tree, the
Connector Appliances tab would display all Connector Appliances in ArcSight Management Center; if
you selected a Location, the tab would display all Connector Appliances in the selected location.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 49 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes
The Connector Appliances tab includes the following button, which operates on one or more selected
Connector Appliances:
Sets the configuration for selected Connector Appliances. For more information, see "Setting a
Set
Configuration Configuration on ConApps" on page 72

The Connector Appliances table displays these parameters for each Connector Appliance:
l

Name: Name of the Connector Appliance.

l

Path: Path to the Connector Appliance.

l

Port: Port number through which the Connector Appliance is communicating.

l

Version: Software version of the Connector Appliance.

l

Status: Status of the Connector Appliance.

l

Last Check: Date and time of last status check.

l

Action: Drop-down shows a variety of controls for executing Connector Appliance management
tasks, including the following:
o

Rebooting

o

Shutting down

o

Editing or removing a configuration

For more information on Connector Appliance management, see "Managing Connector Appliances
(ConApps)" on page 70.

The Loggers Tab
The Loggers tab displays all hardware and software Loggers associated with the item selected in the
navigation tree. For example, if you selected System in the navigation tree, the Loggers tab would
display all Loggers in ArcSight Management Center; while if you selected a Location, you would see all
Loggers in that location.
The Loggers tab includes the following buttons, which perform operations on one or more selected
Loggers:
Set
Configuration

Sets the configuration for selected Loggers. For more information, see "Setting a Configuration on
Loggers" on page 79.

Upgrade
Logger

Upgrades selected Loggers. For more information, see "Upgrading a Logger " on page 78

The Loggers table displays these parameters for each Logger:
l

Name: Name of the Logger.

l

Path: Path to the Logger.

l

Port: Port number through which the Logger is communicating.

l

Version: Software version of the Logger.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 50 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

l

Top Storage Use: Displays the most used storage group and its percentage of storage.

l

Status: Status of the Logger.

l

Last Check: Date and time of last status check.

l

Action: Shows controls for executing Logger management tasks, including the following:
o Rebooting
o

Shutting down

o

Editing or removing a configuration

The ArcMCs Tab
The ArcMCs tab displays all Software ArcSight Management Centers and ArcSight Management
Center Appliances associated with the item selected in the navigation tree. For example, if you selected
System in the navigation tree, the ArcMCs tab would display all managed ArcSight Management
Centers; while if you selected a Location, you would see all ArcMCs in that location.
The ArcMCs tab includes the following buttons, which perform operations on one or more selected
ArcMCs:
Sets the configuration for selected ArcMCs. For more information, see "Setting a Configuration on
Set
Configuration Managed ArcMCs" on page 75

Upgrade
ArcMC

Upgrades selected ArcMCs. For more information, see "Upgrading ArcMC" on page 74

The ArcMCs table displays these parameters for each ArcMC:
l

Name: Name of the ArcSight Management Center.

l

Path: Path to the ArcSight Management Center.

l

Port: Port number through which the ArcSight Management Center is communicating.

l

Version: Software version of the ArcSight Management Center.

l

Status: Status of the ArcSight Management Center.

l

Last Check: Date and time of last status check.

l

Action: Shows controls for executing ArcMC management tasks, including the following:
o Rebooting
o

Shutting Down

o

Editing a configuration

For more information on managing other ArcSight Management Centers in ArcSight Management
Center, see "Managing Other ArcSight Management Centers" on page 73.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 51 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

The EB Nodes Tab
ArcMC can only manage a single Event Broker. However, the single managed Event Broker may have
any number of Event Broker nodes, each of which can be managed and monitored by ArcMC. When you
add an Event Broker as a host to ArcMC, you add all of its nodes.
The EB Nodes tab displays all Event Broker nodes present in the managed Event Broker. For example, if
you selected System in the navigation tree, the EB Nodes tab would display all managed Event Broker
nodes; while if you selected a Location, you would see all Event Broker nodes in that location.
The tab displays these parameters for each managed Event Broker node:
l

Name: Name of the Event Broker node.

l

Port: Port number through which the Event Broker node is communicating.

l

Type: Type of Event Broker node.

Last Check: Date and time of last status check.
For more information on managing Event Broker in ArcSight Management Center, see "Managing
Event Broker" on page 166.
l

Locations
A location is a logical grouping of hosts. The grouping can be based on any criteria you choose, such as
geographical placement or organizational ownership. Locations are a useful way to organize a set of
hosts.
For example, you could group all hosts in New York separately from hosts in San Francisco and assign
them to locations named “New York” and “San Francisco”. Similarly, you could group hosts in a location
named “Sales” and others in the location “Marketing”.
A location can contain any number of hosts. For information on adding hosts to locations, see "About
Adding a Host" on page 54.
Note: ArcSight Management Center includes one location by default (called Default) but you may
add any number of others. The name of the Default location may be edited, and the location itself
may be deleted.

Adding a Location
You can add any number of locations.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 52 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

To add a location:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. In the management panel, click Add Location.
4. Enter the name of the new location, and then click Next.
5. Click Done. The new location is shown in the System tree.

Editing a Location
You can edit the name of a location.

To edit a location:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System, and then click the Locations tab.
3. On the Locations tab, choose a location to rename.
4. In the Action drop-down of the selected location, select Edit Location.
5. Enter the new name of the location, and then click Next.
6. Click Done. The location is renamed.

Viewing All Locations
You can see all the locations that exist in ArcSight Management Center.

To view all locations:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System, and then click the Locations tab to view all locations.

Deleting a Location
When you delete a location from ArcSight Management Center, any hosts in the location (and their
associated nodes) are also deleted.
Tip: If you want to delete a location but still want to keep its hosts in ArcSight Management Center,
relocate the hosts before deleting the location. See "Moving a Host to a Different Location" on
page 65.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 53 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

To delete a location:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System, and then click the Locations tab.
3. On the Locations tab, choose one or more locations to delete.
4. Click Delete.
5. Click OK to confirm deletion. The selected locations are deleted.

Hosts
A host is a networked system associated with a unique IP address or hostname. A host can be an
ArcSight appliance, or a system running an ArcSight software product, such as Software Logger.
For information on adding hosts to manage, see "About Adding a Host" below.

About Adding a Host
After a host is added to ArcSight Management Center, ArcSight products on the host becomes nodes,
and can be managed. For example, adding a host running Connector Appliance with 4 containers
would add 5 nodes to ArcSight Management Center: the Connector Appliance itself, and each
container.
In ArcMC 2.2 and later, the ArcMC localhost is added automatically for remote management. You
will be able to manage the localhost as you would any other node.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 54 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

Prerequisites for Adding a Host (for each Host Type)
Connection Information for Adding a Host
Host Type
Appliance with Local
Connectors
(includes ArcSight Management
Center Appliance, Connector
Appliance, or Logger Appliance
(L3XXX))

Required Information
l

l

Hostname (FQDN) or IP address . Hostname or IP must be resolvable by ArcSight
Management Center: either through DNS for a hostname, or directly for an IP
address. If hostname is used, the hostname entered must match the hostname
from the host’s SSL certificate. (If the FQDN fails to resolve, restart the web
service.)
Authentication credentials (username and password) for logging into the host. If
the host is configured for external authentication, such as LDAP or RADIUS, use
the external authentication credentials, if possible, or use the fall back credentials.
Note: See "Prerequisites for Adding a Host (for each Host Type)" above for more
information about authentication credentials.

l

Appliance without Local
Connectors (includes Logger
Appliance (non-L3XXX))

l

l

Authentication credentials (username and password) for any local containers. If
the appliance includes multiple containers, then the credentials for each
container must be identical. For example, if the username and password for one
container managed by a Connector Appliance is myusername and mypassword,
then myusername and mypassword must be the credentials for all local
containers managed by the same Connector Appliance.
Hostname (FQDN) or IP address . Hostname or IP must be resolvable by ArcSight
Management Center: either through DNS for a hostname, or directly for an IP
address. If hostname is used, the hostname entered must match the hostname
from the host’s SSL certificate. (If the FQDN fails to resolve, restart the web
service.)
Authentication credentials (username and password) for logging into the host. If
the host is configured for external authentication, such as LDAP or RADIUS, use
the external authentication credentials, if possible, or use the fall back credentials.
Note: See "Prerequisites for Adding a Host (for each Host Type)" above for more
information about authentication credentials.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 55 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes
Connection Information for Adding a Host, continued
Host Type
Software Form Factor
(includes Software ArcSight
Management Center, Software
Connector Appliance, or
Software Logger)

Required Information
Hostname (FQDN) or IP address . Hostname or IP must be resolvable by ArcSight
Management Center: either through DNS for a hostname, or directly for an IP
address. If hostname is used, the hostname entered must match the hostname
from the host’s SSL certificate. (If the FQDN fails to resolve, restart the web
service.)

l

Authentication credentials (username and password) for logging into the host. If
the host is configured for external authentication, such as LDAP or RADIUS, use
the external authentication credentials if possible, or use the fall back
credentials.`

l

Note: See "Prerequisites for Adding a Host (for each Host Type)" on the previous
page for more information about authentication credentials.
Port number assigned to the product.

l

Software Connector

Hostname (FQDN) or IP address . Hostname or IP must be resolvable by ArcSight
Management Center: either through DNS for a hostname, or directly for an IP
address. (If the FQDN fails to resolve, restart the web service.)

l

(includes SmartConnectors of all
types)

Authentication credentials (username and password) for the connector.

l

Note: See "Prerequisites for Adding a Host (for each Host Type)" on the previous
page for more information about authentication credentials.
Optionally, specify an inclusive port range separated by a hyphen (such as 90049008) to scan a port range for all software connectors.

l

Note: If the port range includes multiple connectors, then the credentials for each
connector in the range must be identical. For example, if the username and
password for one connector in the range was myusername and mypassword, then
myusername and mypassword must be the credentials for every connector in the
port range.
Prior to adding a software-based SmartConnector as a host, you must prepare
the Smart Connector as explained in SmartConnectors on ArcMC.

Event Broker

Hostname (FQDN) or IP address. Hostname or IP must be resolvable by ArcSight
Management Center: either through DNS for a hostname, or directly for an IP
address. (If the FQDN fails to resolve, restart the web service.)

l

l
l

Port number for the Event Broker (default 38080)
In order to add Event Broker as a host, the active user must belong to an ArcMC
permission group with rights to do so. By default, the admin user has such rights.

Note: Prior to performing the Add Host process, you will need to generate the
ArcMC certificate with complete FQDN and download the .crt file, and then copy the
certificate file to your Kubernetes master node. See Preparing to Add Event Broker
as a Host for details on this process.
l

An SSL Certificate: An SSL certificate must be generated for any of the following host types to be
managed:

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 56 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

o

Connector Appliance or Software Connector Appliance

o

Logger Appliance or Software Logger

o

Event Broker

o

ArcSight Management Center Appliance or Software ArcSight Management Center
The hostname in the certificate must match the hostname you will add to ArcSight Management
Center. For more information on generating certificates for these host types, consult the HPE
ArcSight Administrator’s Guide for each product. (If a host to be added already has a certificate
installed, you can use the existing certificate, as long as the hostname on the certificate matches the
hostname of the host you will be adding.)
Note: If the hostname does not match the hostname in the SSL certificate, you can regenerate
a matching certificate by doing one of the following:
l

l

l

For a hardware appliance, in System Admin > Network, click the NICS tab. Under Host
Settings, note the entry in the Hostname field. (This is the value you should use to add the
host to ArcSight Management Center.) Click Restart Network Service. Then, in the
navigation menu, under Security, pick SSL Server Certificate. Click Generate Certificate.
A new certificate will be generated that matches the hostname from the NICS tab.
For software form factor, in System Admin > SSL Server Certificate, under Enter
Certificate Settings, verify that the hostname from the NICS tab noted previously is
entered in the Hostname field. Then, click Generate Certificate. A new certificate will be
generated that matches the hostname from the NICS tab.

Check for Agent Installation:Check the table under "Installing the ArcSight Management Center
Agent" on page 32 to determine if the ArcMC Agent needs to be installed on a host prior to adding it
to ArcMC. For some host types, the Agent will be installed automatically upon adding a host.
Perl is required for the automatic installation of the ArcMC Agent. Ensure that Perl is installed on
the host prior to attempting to add the host to ArcMC.

Node Authentication Credentials
ArcSight Management Center authenticates to each managed node each time it communicates with the
node, using the node's authentication credentials—that is, username and password—you supply when
first adding the host. If the host includes connectors or containers, then authentication credentials must
also be supplied for these as well. (Exception: Event Broker does not require authentication credentials
for individual nodes.) As a result, valid credentials for each node are required when adding a host.

Determining a Node’s Credentials:
Consult the system administrator for each managed node to determine its current login credentials.
Each ArcSight product ships with a default set of credentials. However, for optimal security, it is

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 57 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes
expected that the default credentials are changed as soon as possible by the administrator, so the
default credentials may no longer be valid for authentication.
l

l

For default credentials for HPE ArcSight products, consult the relevant product administrator’s
guide. (For SmartConnector default credentials, consult the SmartConnector User's Guide, available
from the HPE support community at Protect724.)
Some products can be configured by administrators to use external authentication, in which case the
external authentication credentials or fallback credentials should be provided when adding the host
to ArcSight Management Center. (SmartConnectors may not be configured for external
authentication.)

Changed or Expired Credentials
If the username or password on a node are changed (or expire) any time after the node is added to
ArcSight Management Center, then the node will no longer be managed. However, it will still appear in
the list of managed nodes. For example, on some hosts, passwords are set to expire automatically after
some time period, which would prevent successful authentication by ArcSight Management Center
using the node’s initial credentials. To avoid this issue, you may wish to use node credentials that do not
expire. To continue management of node on which the credentials have changed or expired, use the
Update Host Credentials feature.

Dynamic Credentials
If authentication credentials are configured to change dynamically (such as with RADIUS one-time
passwords), then instead of providing external authentication credentials, you can instead provide the
credentials of a local user on the managed node who is permitted to use fallback authentication.
ArcSight Management Center will then try to authenticate to the managed node using the external
authentication method first, and if this fails, it will try to authenticate to the managed node using the
local user credentials.

Managing SmartConnectors on ArcMC
ArcMC can remotely manage previously-installed, software-based SmartConnectors; however, the
remote management feature is disabled on software SmartConnectors by default.
You can install several SmartConnectors on a single host if supported by the hardware. ArcSight
certifies a maximum of 4 SmartConnectors on Windows hosts and 8 on Linux hosts.
To manage software-based SmartConnectors with ArcMC, you need to enable remote management on
each connector, as follows:
1. In a text editor, in the installation directory for the SmartConnector, open the file //user/agent/agent.properties.
2. Add the line: remote.management.enabled=true

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 58 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

3. If desired, customize the connector's listening port. The default is 9001. To change this value, add
the line: remote.management.listener.port=, where  is the new port number.
4. Save the file.
5. Restart the SmartConnector for changes to take effect.

Preparing to Add Event Broker as a Host
Before you can add Event Broker as a managed host, you will need to generate the ArcMC certificate
with complete FQDN and download the .crt file, and then copy the certificate file to your Kubernetes
master node.

To prepare for adding Event Broker as a host:
1. In ArcMC, click Administration > System Admin.
2. Under Security > SSL Server Certificate, under Hostname, enter the FQDN of the ArcMC.
3. Click Generate Certificate.
4. Save the certificate locally.
5. Connect to your Kubernetes master node.
6. Copy the previously generated certificate to /opt/arcsight/k8shostpath/eb/arcmccerts.
7. Launch the ArcSight Installer.
8. Click Configuration > ArcSight Event Broker.
9. On the ArcMC Monitoring tab, in ArcMC URL, enter the FQDN and port number of the managing
ArcMC.
In ArcMC, you can now follow the process outlined under Adding a Host.

Adding a Host
Before adding a host, ensure that the host meets the prerequisites for the process. For more
information, see "Prerequisites for Adding a Host (for each Host Type)" on page 55.

To add a host to ArcMC:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, select a location to which you plan to add the host.
3. On the Hosts tab, click Add Host.
4. On the Add a new Host dialog, in Hostname/IP, enter either the hostname or IP address of the

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 59 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

host.
5. In Type, select the type of node from the drop-down list.
6. Enter values for the required settings. (Required information will depend on the node type.)
l

l

In Host Credentials or Connector Credentials, enter the username and password required for
authentication.
In Port, if required, enter the value of the port on which ArcSight Management Center will
connect to the host.

7. Click Add. The host is added to ArcSight Management Center.

Adding a Host with Containers
When you add a host that includes containers (such as Connector Appliance), ArcSight Management
Center also attempts to retrieve the SSL certificates from any containers that reside on the host, and
add each container as a separate node. Containers on the remote host can be managed only if ArcSight
Management Center can authenticate using the certificates and supplied credentials. When the
certificates are retrieved, you are prompted to import them into ArcSight Management Center.
Note: On ArcSight Management Center Appliance, all local containers are added automatically as
hosts of type Software Connector.

Importing Multiple Hosts
To quickly and easily add multiple hosts in bulk, you can import a comma-separated values (CSV) file
that lists the names and required attributes of the hosts to be added.
Note: ArcSight Management Center 1.0 used a slightly different file format for importing connector
hosts. That file format is not supported by ArcSight Management Center 2.1. Use the file format
described here instead.

Prerequisites for Importing Multiple Hosts
The following prerequisites apply to importing hosts.
l

l

l

Add Host Prerequisites: Any prerequisites for the Add Host process also apply to importing
multiple hosts by a CSV file. See "About Adding a Host" on page 54.
Valid CSV File: Ensure the values in your CSV file are valid and correct. An import hosts job will fail
immediately upon receiving an invalid or incorrect value. The CSV file format is described under "CSV
File Format" on the next page.
Stop the Agent 1.0 Process: In addition, if any of the hosts to be imported are running the ArcSight

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 60 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

Management Center 1.0 Agent, stop the Agent process on each such host before the import. (This is
not needed for later versions of the ArcMC Agent.)

CSV File Format
The CSV (comma-separated value) file requires the following header line to be its first line:
location,hostname,type,host username,host password,connector
username,connector password,port/port range

Each subsequent line represents one host to be imported. Each line must include values for the
following comma-separated fields for each host:
, ,,,,
,,

Some host types require values for all fields, and some are optional. An optional field with no value
specified must still include a comma to represent the empty field.

Host Field Values
Valid values for host fields are detailed in the following table. An asterisk (*) indicates a required field.
An optional field with no value specified must still include a comma to represent the empty field.
Field

Description

Location*

Location to which the host will be assigned.

Hostname* Hostname (FQDN) or IP address of the host.
l

l
l

Host
Type*

FQDN or IP must be resolvable by ArcSight Management Center: either through DNS for a hostname,
or directly for an IP address.
If hostname is used, the hostname entered must match the hostname from the host’s SSL certificate.
For a hardware appliance, DNS must be configured on the managing appliance (System Admin >
DNS).

Host type. Valid (case-insensitive) values are:
l

l
l

l

appliance_with_local_connectors: includes ArcSight Management Center Appliance,
Connector Appliance and Logger Appliance (L3XXX)
appliance_without_local_connectors: includes Logger Appliance (non-L3XXX).
software_form_factor: includes Software ArcSight Management Center, Software Connector
Appliance or Software Logger.
software_connector: includes all software connectors and SmartConnectors.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 61 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

Field

Description

Host
Username/
Password*

User name and password used to authenticate to the host.

Connector
Username/
Password

Username and password used to authenticate to the software connector. Required for hosts of type
Appliance with Local Connector and Software Connector; otherwise optional.

Port/Port
Range

Starting port or port range for connector scan. Valid values:

Note: See "About Adding a Host" on page 54 for more information about authentication credentials.

Note: See "About Adding a Host" on page 54 for more information about authentication credentials.

l

Port number

l

Port range

l

Comma-separated port numbers (for example, 9000,9004,9007)

Notes:
l
l

l

For software form factors, port is required.
For appliance form factors, to add all local containers, leave the field blank. However, if any port
numbers are entered, then certificates will be downloaded only for the specified port numbers, and only
those containers will be imported.
For software connectors, either a port or port range is required. If using port range, specify an inclusive
port range, using a hyphen between starting and ending port. For example, a specified port range of
9001-9003 would scan ports 9001, 9002, and 9003.
Note: If the port range includes multiple connectors, then the credentials for each connector in the
range must be identical. For example, if the username and password for one connector in the range
was myusername and mypassword, then myusername and mypassword must be the credentials for
every connector in the port range.

An example of a valid import file, importing two hosts, is shown here:
location,hostname,type,host_username,password1,connector_
username,password2,port/port range
CorpHQ,hostname.example.com,software_connector,username,password,connector__
username,connector_password,9001-9010
EMEA,hostname2.example.com,appliance_without_local_connectors,
logger_user,logger_pword,,,

In this example, the first line would represent the required header line, the second line a Software
Connector, and the third line would represent a Logger Appliance.

Import Hosts Procedure
Only a single Import Hosts job may be executed at one time.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 62 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

To import hosts from a CSV file:
Note: Before beginning the import, stop the Agent processes on any hosts running version 1.0 of
the ArcMC Agent.
1. Create and save your CSV file in a text editor.
2. Log into ArcSight Management Center.
3. Select Node Management > Import Hosts. The Import Hosts wizard starts.
4. Click Browse, and browse to the location of your hosts CSV file.
5. Click Import. The hosts are imported as a background job.
If the CSV file is valid, connector certificates are retrieved automatically so that ArcSight
Management Center can communicate with each connector in a container. The Upload CSV wizard
lists the certificates. (To see certificate details, hover over the certificate.).
Automatic installation of the ArcMC Agent may increase the time required for the Import Hosts job.
l

l

Select Import the certificates..., and then click Next to import the certificates and continue.
Select Do not import the certificates..., and then click Next if you do not want to import the
certificates. The Upload CSV wizard does not complete the upload CSV process.
Note: The Import Hosts wizard does not complete the upload if certificate upload failed for
any of the connectors in a container, or if any of the certificates failed to import into the trust
store.

2. The Import Hosts job executes.

Import Hosts Job Logs
ArcSight Management Center logs the results of all Import Hosts jobs. Each job produces a new log,
named import_hosts__.txt, where  and  are the date and time of
the import hosts job.
l

For Software ArcSight Management Center, logs are located in the directory /userdata/logs/arcmc/importhosts.

l

For ArcSight Management Center Appliance, logs are located in the directory
opt/arcsight/userdata/logs/arcmc/importhosts.

Log Format
Each entry in the log will show the success or failure of each host import attempt, in the format:
, , ,,

For example:

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 63 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

admin, my_csv_file.csv, Tue Apr 08 14:16:58 PDT 2015, host.example.com, Host
added successfully

If the import hosts job has failed due to one or more invlaid entries in the CSV file, the result file will
show the parsing error details with the line number and error.
For example:
Line [1] has [connector password] field empty. [connector password] field is
required for this host type.

Exporting Hosts
Exporting hosts from an ArcSight Management Center will create a CSV list of hosts managed by that
ArcSight Management Center. (Password information is not included in this file.)
After adding passwords for each host to the file, you can then import this list of hosts into another
ArcSight Management Center, using the Import Hosts feature described under "Importing Multiple
Hosts " on page 60
Exporting hosts is most useful when you are reassigning management of hosts from one ArcMC to
another.
For example, consider two ArcSight Management Centers, called ArcMC East and ArcMC West. ArcMC
East currently manages 50 hosts. However, you are consolidating management of all hosts to the new
ArcMC West. To do this quickly and easily, you would export the hosts from ArcMC East into a CSV
file.Then, you would add an additional entry for ArcMC East to the CSV file.
After adding in password data for each host, you would import the resulting CSV file into ArcMC West.
At the end of the process, all of ArcMC East’s hosts, and ArcMC East itself, would be managed by
ArcMC West.

To export hosts in ArcSight Management Center:
1. Select Node Management > Export Hosts.
2. All hosts managed by the ArcSight Management Center are exported to the local CSV file
(exporthosts.csv).
3. Optionally, open the file in a CSV editor. Add the password information for each host to the CSV
file, and then save the file.

Viewing All Hosts
You can see all the hosts managed by ArcSight Management Center, or view hosts by location.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 64 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

To view all hosts:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System. (To view by location, click the location you wish to view.)
3. Click the Hosts tab. All managed hosts are displayed.

Viewing Managed Nodes on a Host
You can view all the managed nodes on a host, by host type.

To view managed nodes on a host:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click the location to which the host is assigned. Then, click the host.
3. Click the appropriate tab to view the node types for the managed host: Containers, Connectors,
Connector Appliances, Loggers, or ArcMCs.

Deleting a Host
When you delete a host, any nodes associated with the host are also deleted. Deleting a host removes
its entry from ArcSight Management Center, but otherwise leaves the host machine unaffected.
Use caution when deleting a host. Deleting a host will delete its associated nodes from any node list,
association, peers listing, or subscribers listing that includes those nodes. .

To delete one or more hosts:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System, and then click the Hosts tab.
3. Choose one or more hosts to delete.
4. Click Delete.
5. Click Yes to confirm deletion. The host (and any associated nodes) are deleted.

Moving a Host to a Different Location
You can assign one or more hosts to a new location. When you move a host, any nodes associated with
it are also moved. For example, if you moved a Connector Appliance to a new location, all of its
containers and managed connectors would also be moved to the new location.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 65 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

To move one or more hosts:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System, and then click the Hosts tab.
3. Choose one or more hosts to move.
4. Click Move.
5. Follow the prompts in the Host Move wizard.The selected hosts are reassigned to their new
locations.

Updating (or Installing) the ArcMC Agent
Hosts running an outdated version of the ArcSight Management Center Agent can be quickly
upgraded to the latest version.
Agent installation or upgrade is supported on all versions of ArcMC Appliance, Connector Appliance
(hardware) and Logger Appliance, Software Logger 6.0 or later, and software ArcMC 2.1 or later.
Tip: Check the version of the Agent on each host by clicking the Hosts tab and reviewing the
Agent Version column.

To upgrade or install the Agent on one or more hosts:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System, and then click the Hosts tab.
3. Select one or more hosts to update.
4. Click Update Agent. The Agent Upgrade wizard launches. Follow the prompts to complete the
Agent Upgrade wizard.

Scanning a Host
Scanning a host will inventory all currently running containers on the host and the connectors
associated with them.
Note: Any host that includes containers is scanned automatically when first added to ArcSight
Management Center.
To ensure accuracy and currency of container inventory, you will need to manually scan for new
containers in any of the following circumstances:
l

Additional containers or connectors are added to a remote host after it has been added to ArcSight
Management Center.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 66 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

l

l

l

Containers or connectors are removed from a remote host managed in ArcSight Management
Center.
Any containers which were down when the initial, automatic scan was performed have since come
back up.
The license for a managed ArcSight Management Center (managed by another ArcSight
Management Center) is upgraded to increase the number of licensed containers.

You can manually scan any host types that can run containers. These types include:
l

Connector Appliances

l

Loggers (L3XXX models only)

l

ArcSight Management Center Appliances

l

Software Connectors

The Scan Process
A host scan retrieves information on all CA certificates from any running containers on the host. The
containers on the remote host can be managed only if ArcSight Management Center can authenticate
using the certificates and the credentials. You are prompted to import any retrieved certificates into the
ArcSight Management Center trust store.
A manual scan will be discontinued if any of the following are true:
l
l
l

Any containers on a scanned Connector Appliance host are down.
If you choose not to import any certificates that are retrieved.
Authentication fails on any of the containers.

To manually scan a host:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, select the location to which the host has been assigned.
3. Click the Hosts tab.
4. In the Action drop-down for the host to be scanned, click Scan Host. The Host Scan wizard starts.
5. Click Next in the Host Scan wizard.
6. Enter values for the parameters in the following table, and then click Next.
Parameter

Description

Starting
Port

The port number on the host on which ArcSight Management Center starts scanning for
containers.

Ending Port The port number on the host on which ArcSight Management Center ends scanning for
containers.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 67 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

Parameter

Description

User

The user name to authenticate with the host.

Password

The password for the user name you provide.

7. Connector certificates are retrieved automatically so that the ArcSight Management Center can
communicate with each connector in a container. The Host Scan wizard lists the certificates. (To see
certificate details, hover over the certificate.)
l

l

To continue the scan, select Import the certificates, and then click Next to import the
certificates and continue.
Otherwise, select Do not import the certificates, and then click Next. The Host Scan wizard
discontinues the scan.

Downloading and Importing Host Certificates
In case of a mismatch between the hostname and the hostname in the SSL certificate, you can
download and import the host’s current certificates.

To download and import host certificates:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, select the location to which the host has been assigned.
3. Click the Hosts tab.
4. In the Action drop-down for the desired host, select Download Certificate.
5. Click Next in the Download wizard.
6. Follow the prompts in the wizard to complete the process.

Updating Host Credentials
ArcMC relies on a host's login credentials to connect and authenticate to the managed host. You specify
these credentials when adding the host to ArcMC for management. If these credentials ever change, the
management link between ArcMC and the host will be broken.
However, you can update the credentials ArcMC uses to authenticate to a managed host, which will
prevent the management link from being broken.
Updating host credentials on ArcMC does not change the actual credentials on the managed host. You
will need to change those on the host directly, either immediately before or immediately after
performing this operation. Updating credentials will only update the credentials that ArcMC uses to
authenticate to the host.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 68 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 4: Managing Nodes

To update host credentials:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, select the location to which the host has been assigned.
3. Click the Hosts tab.
4. In the Action drop-down for the desired host, select Update Credentials.
5. In Username and Password, enter the new credentials that ArcMC will use to connect to the host.
6. Click Save.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 69 of 316

Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products
The following topics are discussed here.

•
•
•
•
•
•

Overview
Managing Connector Appliances (ConApps)
Managing Other ArcSight Management Centers
Managing Loggers
Managing Containers
Managing Connectors

70
70
73
76
80
94

Overview
ArcSight Management Center enables management tasks on a variety of HPE ArcSight products,
including the following:
l

Hardware and Software Connector Appliances

l

Hardware and Software ArcSight Management Centers

l

Hardware and Software Loggers

l

Containers

l

Software connectors

l

Event Broker

This chapter discusses the remote management of these products.

Managing Connector Appliances (ConApps)
You can perform any of the following management tasks on managed Connector Appliances or
Software Connector Appliances using ArcSight Management Center:
l

Reboot or shut down.

l

Edit or remove a configuration.

l

Set a configuration on one (or multiple) Connector Appliances.
Note: Not all Connector Appliance functionality is manageable through ArcSight Management
Center. For a complete discussion of Connector Appliance features, see the Connector Appliance
Administrator’s Guide.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 70 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Rebooting a ConApp
To remotely reboot a managed Connector Appliance:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. In the management panel, click ConApps.
4. In the list of Connector Appliances, locate the Connector Appliance to be rebooted.
5. In the Action drop-down of the Connector Appliance, select Reboot ConApp.
6. Click Next to confirm reboot.
7. The Connector Appliance is rebooted. Click Done.

Shutting Down a ConApp
To remotely reboot a managed Connector Appliance:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. In the management panel, click ConApps.
4. In the list of Connector Appliances, locate the Connector Appliance to be shut down
5. In the Action drop-down of the Connector Appliance, select Shutdown ConApp.
6. Click Next to confirm shutdown.
7. The Connector Appliance is shut down. Click Done.

Editing or Removing a Configuration for a ConApp
You can edit a configuration on, or remove property values of a list configuration from, a managed
Connector Appliance.
Editing or removing a configuration will overwrite the node’s current configuration. This may make the
node non-compliant with its current subscriptions.

To edit or remove a configuration on Connector Appliance:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. In the management panel, click ConApps.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 71 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

4. In the list of Connector Appliances, locate the desired Connector Appliance.
5. In the Action drop-down of the Connector Appliance, select Edit/Remove Config. The Update
Configurations wizard is launched.
6. Review the dialog box, and then click Next.
7. Follow the prompts to complete the wizard.
8. When the wizard is complete, click Done.
Note: In order to edit a backup configuration on a Connector Appliance node, the node must
have a scheduled backup to begin with.

Setting a Configuration on ConApps
You can set a configuration on one or multiple Connector Appliances using the Set Configuration
wizard.
l

l

For list configurations, use the Set Configuration wizard to append property values to an existing
configuration on multiple Connector Appliances. Only new values will be appended. For more
information on list configurations, see "List Configurations" on page 125.
For non-list configurations, use the Set Configuration wizard to overwrite the configuration on
multiple Connector Appliances.
Caution: Setting a configuration on one or multiple Connector Appliances may make each
Connector Appliance node non-compliant with its current subscriptions.

To set a configuration on one or more Connector Appliances:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. In the management panel, click Connector Appliances.
4. In the list of Connector Appliances, select one or more Connector Appliances.
5. Click Set Configuration. The Set Configuration wizard is launched.
6. Review the dialog box, and then click Next.
7. Follow the prompts to complete the wizard.
l

Click Add Row to add a new Property to a list configuration, and then enter values as needed.

8. The configuration is set on the selected Connector Appliances. Click Done.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 72 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Managing Other ArcSight Management Centers
You can perform any of the following management tasks on managed Software ArcSight Management
Centers or ArcSight Management Center Appliances:
l

Reboot or shut down.

l

Edit or remove a configuration.

l

Remotely upgrade an ArcMC.

l

Set a configuration on one (or multiple) ArcSight Management Centers.

Rebooting an ArcMC
To remotely reboot a managed ArcSight Management Center:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. In the management panel, click ArcMCs.
4. In the list of ArcSight Management Centers, locate the ArcSight Management Center to be
rebooted.
5. In the Action drop-down of the ArcMC, select Reboot ArcMC
6. Click Next to confirm reboot.
7. The ArcSight Management Center is rebooted. Click Done.

Shutting Down an ArcMC
To remotely shut down a managed ArcSight Management Center:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. In the management panel, click ArcMCs.
4. In the list of ArcSight Management Centers, locate the ArcSight Management Center to be shut
down.
5. In the Action drop-down of the ArcMC, select Shutdown ArcMC.
6. Click Next to confirm shutdown.
7. The ArcSight Management Center is shut down. Click Done.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 73 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Editing or Removing a Configuration for ArcMC
You can edit a configuration on, or remove property values of a list configuration from, a managed
ArcSight Management Center.
Editing or removing a configuration will overwrite the node’s current configuration. This may make the
node non-compliant with its current subscriptions.

To edit or remove a configuration on ArcSight Management Center:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. In the management panel, click ArcMCs.
4. In the list of ArcSight Management Centers, locate the desired ArcSight Management Center.
5. In the Action drop-down, select Edit/Remove Config. The Update Configurations wizard is
launched.
6. Review the dialog box, and then click Next.
7. Follow the prompts to complete the wizard.
8. When the wizard is complete, click Done..
Note: In order to edit a backup configuration on an ArcMC node, the node must have a
scheduled backup to begin with.

Upgrading ArcMC
In ArcMC, you can remotely upgrade any of the following managed ArcMC types.
Form
Factor

Upgrade File
Name

Can
Upgrade
From...

Can
Upgrade
To...
Comments

Appliance arcmcVersion
2.0 or
.enc later

Any later
version.

Software

Any later Remote operating system upgrade is not supported for
version.
software ArcMC, and, if required, must be performed
manually.

arcmc-swremote.enc

Version
2.1

Upgrade first requires that you upload the appropriate file to your ArcMC repository first. You can then
apply the upgrade file to managed ArcMCs.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 74 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

To upload the upgrade file to your repository:
1. Download the ArcMC upgrade file for the upgrade version, as outlined in the table above, and
store it in a secure network location.
2. Click Administration > Repositories.
3. In the navigation tree, pick Upgrade Files.
4. In the management panel, click Upload.
5. Click Choose File and browse to your upgrade file, then click Submit. The file is uploaded.

To remotely upgrade one or more managed ArcMCs:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. In the management panel, click ArcMCs.
4. In the list of ArcMCs, select one or more ArcMCs for upgrade. (You may select only the form factor
appropriate for the upgrade file type, as outlined above.)
5. Click Upgrade ArcMC. The Upgrade wizard is launched.
6. Review the dialog box, and then click Next.
7. Follow the prompts to complete the wizard.
8. When the wizard is complete, click Done.
In some cases, after the upgrade of a localhost with an .enc file completes, an empty page is
displayed. You may navigate away from this page as normal.

Setting a Configuration on Managed ArcMCs
You can set a configuration on one or multiple ArcSight Management Centers using the Set
Configuration wizard.
l

l

For list configurations, use the Set Configuration wizard to append property values to an existing
configuration on multiple ArcSight Management Centers. Only new values will be appended. (For
more information on list configurations, see "The Configurations Table" on page 124.).
For non-list configurations, use the Set Configuration wizard to overwrite the configuration on
multiple ArcSight Management Centers.
Caution: Setting a configuration on one or multiple ArcSight Management Centers may make
each ArcSight Management Center node non-compliant with its current subscriptions.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 75 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

To set a configuration on one or more ArcSight Management Centers:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. In the management panel, click ArcMCs.
4. In the list of ArcSight Management Centers, select one or more ArcSight Management Centers for
which to set a configuration.
5. Click Set Configuration. The Set Configuration wizard is launched.
6. Review the dialog box, and then click Next.
7. Follow the prompts to complete the wizard.
l

Click Add Row to add a new Property to a list configuration, and then enter values as needed.

8. The configuration is set on the selected ArcSight Management Centers. Click Done.

Managing SmartConnectors on ArcMC
ArcMC can remotely manage previously-installed, software-based SmartConnectors; however, the
remote management feature is disabled on software SmartConnectors by default.
You can install several SmartConnectors on a single host if supported by the hardware. ArcSight
certifies a maximum of 4 SmartConnectors on Windows hosts and 8 on Linux hosts.
To manage software-based SmartConnectors with ArcMC, you need to enable remote management on
each connector, as follows:
1. In a text editor, in the installation directory for the SmartConnector, open the file //user/agent/agent.properties.
2. Add the line: remote.management.enabled=true
3. If desired, customize the connector's listening port. The default is 9001. To change this value, add
the line: remote.management.listener.port=, where  is the new port number.
4. Save the file.
5. Restart the SmartConnector for changes to take effect.

Managing Loggers
You can perform any of the following management tasks on managed Logger Appliances or Software
Loggers using ArcSight Management Center.
l

Reboot or shut down.

l

Edit or remove a configuration.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 76 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

l

Set a configuration on one (or multiple) Loggers.

l

Remotely upgrade a Logger.
Note: Not all Logger functionality is manageable through ArcSight Management Center. For a
complete discussion of Logger features, see the Logger Administrator’s Guide.

Rebooting a Logger
To remotely reboot a managed Logger:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. In the management panel, click Loggers.
4. In the list of Loggers, locate the Logger to be rebooted.
5. In the Action drop-down of the Logge, click Reboot Logger.
6. Click Next to confirm reboot.
7. The Logger is rebooted. Click Done.

Shutting Down a Logger
To remotely shut down a managed Logger:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. In the management panel, click Loggers.
4. In the list of Loggers, select the Logger to be shut down.
5. In the Action drop-down of the Logger, select Shut Down Logger.
6. Click Next to confirm shut down.
7. The Logger is shut down. Click Done.

Editing or Removing a Configuration for a Logger
You can edit a configuration on, or remove property values of a list configuration from, a managed
Logger.
Editing or removing a configuration will overwrite the node’s current configuration. This may make the
node non-compliant with its current subscriptions.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 77 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

To edit or remove a configuration on a managed Logger:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. In the management panel, click Loggers.
4. In the list of Loggers, locate the desired Logger.
5. In the Action drop-down of the Logger, selectEdit/Remove Config. The Update Configurations
wizard is launched.
6. Review the dialog box, and then click Next.
7. Follow the prompts to complete the wizard.
8. When the wizard is complete, click Done..
Note: In order to edit a backup configuration on a Logger node, the node must have a
scheduled backup to begin with.

Upgrading a Logger
In ArcMC, you can remotely upgrade any of the following managed Logger types.
Can
Upgrade
From
Version...

Can
Upgrade
To
Version...

Appliance logger-.enc

6.0 or later

6.1 or later

Software

6.0 or later

6.1 or later

Form
Factor

Upgrade File Name

logger-swremote.enc

Comments
The filename format for the remote upgrade file for
Logger Appliance is logger-.enc
l

l

The filename format for the remote upgrade file for
software Logger is logger-sw--remote.enc
Remote operating system upgrade is not supported
for software Logger, and, if required, must be
performed manually.

Upgrading to Logger version 6.0 requires ArcMC Agent 1167.1 or later to be running on the
managed Logger. Upgrade the Agent on the managed Logger before performing the upgrade to
Logger 6.0.

To upload the upgrade file to your repository:
1. Download the Logger upgrade file for the upgrade version, as outlined in the table above, and
store it in a secure network location.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 78 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

2. Click Administration > Repositories.
3. In the navigation tree, pick Upgrade Files.
4. In the management panel, click Upload.
5. Click Choose File and browse to your upgrade file, then click Submit. The file is uploaded.

To remotely upgrade one or more managed Loggers:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. In the management panel, click Loggers.
4. In the list of Loggers, select one or more Loggers. (You may only select one form factor type to
upgrade.)
5. Click Upgrade Logger. The Upgrade wizard is launched.
6. Review the dialog box, and then click Next.
7. Follow the prompts to complete the wizard.
8. When the wizard is complete, click Done.
In some cases, after the upgrade of a localhost with an .enc file completes, an empty page is
displayed. You may navigate away from this page as normal.

Setting a Configuration on Loggers
You can set a configuration on one or multiple Loggers using the Set Configuration wizard.
l

l

For list configurations, use the Set Configuration wizard to append property values to an existing
configuration on multiple Loggers. Only new values will be appended. For example, if you had a
common group of users on three Loggers, you could use the Set Configuration wizard to add the
same new user to all three Loggers with a single action. (For more information on list configurations,
see "The Configurations Table" on page 124.)
For non-list configurations, use the Set Configuration wizard to overwrite the configuration on
multiple Loggers.
Caution: Setting a configuration on one or multiple Loggers may make each Logger node noncompliant with its current subscriptions.

To set a configuration for one or more Loggers:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. In the management panel, click Loggers.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 79 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

4. In the list of Loggers, select one or more Loggers for which to set a configuration.
5. Click Set Configuration. The Set Configuration wizard is launched.
6. Review the dialog box, and then click Next.
7. Follow the prompts to complete the wizard.
l

Click Add Row to add a new Property to a list configuration, and then enter values as needed.

8. The configuration is set on the selected Loggers. Click Done.

Managing Containers
A container is a single Java Virtual Machine (JVM) that can run up to four connectors. The exact
number of connectors depends on your current service agreement and the type of connector.
Containers may run on ArcMCs, on Connector Appliances, and on L3XXX model Loggers. The number
of containers that can be run at one time is based on the product license. Check under System Admin >
License & Update for this information.
Scanning a managed host will ensure all currently running containers on the host (and the connectors
associated with them) are accurately inventoried. For more information, see "Scanning a Host" on
page 66.
Note: A connector of any of the following types must be the single connector running in its
container:
l

Trend Micro Control Manager (TMCM)

l

Syslog

l

Windows Unified Connector (WUC)

Viewing All Containers
You can view all containers managed in ArcSight Management Center.

To view all containers:
1. Click Node Management
2. In the navigation tree, click System. (Alternatively, to view containers on a specific host, select the
host from the navigation tree.)
3. Click the Containers tab to display the containers.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 80 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Viewing Connectors in a Container
You can see all the connectors in a container.

To view connectors in a container:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, navigate to the container whose connectors you wish to view.
3. Click the tree branch corresponding to the container.
4. Click the Connectors tab. The connectors in the container are displayed.

Editing a Container
The default name for a container is Container N, where N is a sequential number that indicates the order
in which the container was added. However, you can edit a container’s default name.

To edit a container:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, navigate to the host with container you wish to rename.
3. In the list of containers, locate the container you wish to edit.
4. In the Action drop-down of the container, click Edit Container.
5. In Name, enter the new container name, and then click Next.
6. Click Done. The container is renamed.

Deleting a Container
When you delete a container, the connectors that it contains are also deleted.

To delete a container:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, navigate to the host on which the container resides.
3. Click the Containers tab.
4. On the Containers tab, select one or more containers to delete.
5. Click Delete.
6. Click OK to confirm deletion. The selected containers are deleted.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 81 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Updating Container Properties
You can update existing container properties, delete them, or add new ones.

To update container properties:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, navigate to the host on which the container resides.
3. Click the Containers tab.
4. On the Containers tab, select one or more containers to update.
5. Click Properties.
6. Follow the instructions in the wizard to update the container properties.
Note: When a property is removed, it is still visible until the container is restarted.

Changing Container Credentials
You can change the user name and password associated with each container.
Caution: A container's default user name is connector_user and the default password is
change_me. HPE ArcSight strongly recommends that for optimal security, you should change each
container’s credentials to a non-default value before deploying it to production.

To change container credentials:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, navigate to the host on which the container resides.
3. Click the Containers tab.
4. On the Containers tab, select one or more containers for which to change the credentials.
5. Click Credentials.
6. Follow the instructions in the wizard to update the credentials for the selected containers.

Sending a Command to a Container
You can run commands on a container to configure memory settings, pull an OPSEC certificate,
generate a key, or restart the container.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 82 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

To run a command on a container:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, navigate to the host on which the container resides.
3. Click the Containers tab.
4. In the Action drop-down of the container, click Send Container Command. The Send Command
wizard starts.
5. From the drop-down list, select the command you want to send, and then click Next.
6. Enter appropriate values for the parameters and then click Done.

Upgrading All Connectors in a Container
You can upgrade all connectors in a container to a specific parser or framework version number.

Before Performing the Upgrade
Prior to performing an upgrade of a container, you will need one of the following:
l

You can use a connector AUP file of the new parser or framework version in your ArcMC repository.
If you opt to use this method, you will need to upload the version file to your repository as follows:

To upload a version file to your repositories.
1. Click Administration > Repositories.
2. In the navigation tree, pick Upgrade Files.
3. In the management panel, click Upload.
4. Click Choose File and browse to your connector AUP file, then click Submit. The file is uploaded.
l Alternatively, instead of using a parser AUP file from the repository, you can download and use
parser files from the ArcSight Marketplace. (Framework files are not available from the Marketplace.)
Create your administrative account on the ArcSight Marketplace. If you have not created your
Marketplace account, you will be given an opportunity to sign up for an account during the parser
upgrade process.

To perform the parser or framework upgrade on all connectors in a container:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, navigate to the host on which the container resides.
3. Click the Containers tab.
4. On the Containers tab, select one or more containers to upgrade.
5. Click Upgrade.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 83 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

6. On the upgrade page, under Select Upgrade Type, choose either Parser upgrade or Framework
upgrade.
7. Under Select Upgrade Version, from the drop-down list, choose the version to which you want to
upgrade the selected containers. (You can control the number of parser upgrade versions
displayed in the drop-down, as described in Modifying logger.properties.)
a. For a parser upgrade, if the selected parser version is from the Marketplace and not the local
repository, save your Marketplace credentials in ArcMC. This is a one-time task unless you wish
to update these credentials.
8. Click Upgrade. The upgrade is performed on all containers.
If you are performing parser upgrades through a proxy server, additional configuration is required.
See Modifying logger.properties for more information.

Modifying logger.properties
To enable or modify some functionality, such as performing you may need to edit the file /userdata/arcmc/logger.properties with additional parameters in any text editor.

General Editing Procedure
If /userdata/arcmc/logger.properties does not exist, then create one
in a text editor. This file must be owned by a non-root user. For an ArcMC appliance, use the 'arcsight'
user, and for software ArcMC, use the non-root account used to install the ArcMC.
The logger.properties file may not be readable and writable by all users. Apply the following
commands to the file.
chown : logger.properties
chmod 660 logger.properties

Finally, restart the web process after making any edits to logger.properties.

For Parser Upgrades Through a Proxy Server
If performing parser upgrades, and your environment connects to the Marketplace through a proxy
server, you will need to modify the /userdata/arcmc/logger.properties file
with the proxy details.
proxy.server=
proxy.port=
#Enter the proxy server credentials if the proxy server needs authentication
proxy.username=

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 84 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

proxy.password=

For the Number of Parser Upgrade Versions Displayed
You can control the number of parser upgrade versions displayed in the parser upgrade drop-down list.
In logger.properties, set the parameter
marketplace.parser.update.latest.versions.count = 

To Disable the Marketplace Connection
To disable ArcMC's Marketplace connection, in logger.properties, set the parameter
marketplace.enable=false

If set to false, parser upgrade versions from the Marketplace will not be shown in the drop-down list. In
addition, the Parser Out of Date status (on Node Management > Containers tab, Parser Version
column) will not be available.

Restarting a Container
Restarting a container will restart all the connectors in the container. You can restart multiple containers
in bulk.

To restart one or more containers:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, navigate to the host on which a container resides.
3. Click the Containers tab.
4. On the Containers tab, select one or more containers to restart.
5. Click Restart.
6. Click Yes to confirm restart. The selected containers are restarted.

Viewing Container Logs
You can retrieve and view the log files for one or more containers. The log files are in .zip format.
Container logs must be uploaded to the Logs repository before they can be viewed. For instructions on
how to upload logs, see "Uploading a File to the Logs Repository" on page 204.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 85 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

To retrieve and view container logs:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, navigate to the host on which the container resides.
3. Click the Containers tab.
4. On the Containers tab, select one or more containers for which to view logs.
5. Click Logs.
6. Click Next to begin the Retrieve Container Logs process. When complete, click Done.
7. Click Administration > Repositories.
8. In the left panel, click Logs.
9. In the management panel, click

to retrieve the log files (in .zip format) you want to view.

Deleting a Container Log
You can delete unneeded container logs as necessary.

To delete a container log file:
1. Click Administration > Repositories.
2. In the left panel, click Logs.
3. In the management panel, on the list of logs, click

next to the log file you want to delete.

4. Click OK to confirm deletion.

Enabling FIPS on a Container
FIPS mode is supported on local, remote, and software connectors running version 4.7.5 or later, but
certain connectors do not support FIPS mode. For information about which connectors do not support
FIPS mode, see the document Installing FIPS-Compliant SmartConnectors, available on Protect 724.
Before enabling FIPS on a container that contains software connectors running as a service, review the
caveats listed in that document.
FIPS is disabled by default on ArcSight Management Center, but can be enabled as described under
"FIPS 140-2" on page 252. After FIPS is enabled on the appliance, you can enable FIPS on a container.
Any FIPS-compliant connector in that container (or one which is added later) will automatically
communicate in FIPS mode.
l

If the connector destination is ArcSight Manager, Connector Management automatically imports the
ArcSight Manager certificate into its trust store and applies it to the container.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 86 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

l

However, if the connector destination is Logger, the Logger certificate must be uploaded manually
and applied to the container.

A FIPS Suite B certificate must be uploaded manually, regardless of the connector destination, as
described in under “Enabling FIPS Suite B on a Container”, below.
You enable or disable FIPS by the same procedure.

To enable or disable FIPS mode on a container:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, navigate to the host on which the container resides.
3. Click the Containers tab.
4. On the Containers tab, select one or more containers for which to enable FIPS.
5. Click FIPS.
6. Follow the instructions in the wizard to update FIPS status.
Check that the appropriate CA certificates are in the trust store so that the connectors in the container
can validate their configured destinations successfully. If necessary, add the appropriate certificates to
the container.
A 32-bit FIPS connector enabled cannot be remotely managed if it is installed on a 64-bit Linux
system.

Enabling FIPS Suite B on a Container
Managed connectors can communicate in FIPS Suite B mode with their destination. A FIPS Suite B
certificate must be imported manually and applied to the container, regardless of the connector
destination.
Before you perform the following procedure, make sure FIPS mode is enabled on ArcSight
Management Center, as described in "FIPS 140-2" on page 252.

To enable FIPS Suite B on a container:
1. Export the certificate for the connector destination (either ArcSight Manager or Logger) to a
temporary directory. For example, on ArcSight Manager, from $ARCSIGHT_HOME/current/bin,
enter the following command: ./arcsight runcertutil -L -n mykey -r -d
/opt/arcsight/manager/config/jetty/nssdb -o
/tmp/managercert.cer
2. Upload the certificate from the temporary directory to the CA Certs Repository, as described in "CA
Certs Repository" on page 204.
3. Enable FIPS on the container as described above.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 87 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

4. Add the certificate on the container, as described in "Managing Certificates on a Container" on the
next page .
5. Click Node Management.
6. In the navigation tree, navigate to the host on which the container resides.
7. Click the Containers tab.
8. On the Containers tab, select one or more containers for which to enable FIPS Suite B.
9. Click FIPS.
10. Follow the instructions in the wizard to update FIPS Suite Bstatus.

Adding a Connector to a Container
Each container may hold up to 4 connectors.

To add a connector to a container:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, navigate to the container to which you wish to add a connector.
3. On the Connectors tab, click Add Connector. The Connector Setup wizard starts.
4. Click Next, and then follow the prompts to set up the new connector.
Note: Always change the default credentials of any new connector to non-default values. For
more information, see "Changing Container Credentials" on page 82.

Running Logfu on a Container
The Logfu utility is a diagnostic tool that parses ArcSight logs to generate an interactive visual
representation of the information contained within the logs. When event flow problems occur, it can be
useful to have a visual representation of what happened over time.

To run Logfu on a container:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, navigate to the host on which the container resides.
3. Click the Containers tab.
4. On the Containers tab, locate a container on which to run Logfu.
5. In the Action drop-down of the container, click Run Logfu.
6. The Logfu progress window is displayed as system data logs are retrieved and analyzed. Data is
then displayed by Group, Field, and Chart.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 88 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

l

l

l

l

In the Group box, choose which type of data you would like to view. The Group box lists all
connectors within the chosen container, plus many other types of data such as memory usage
and transport rates.
Then, choose one of the Group box data points. Depending on which data point you chose, a list
of fields appears in the Field box below.
Choose a field to view. A graphic chart appears in the Chart box, providing rate and time
information. The key at the bottom of the Chart box defines the data points mapped in the chart.
To choose a different data point for analysis, click Reset Data.

7. When complete, close the display window.

Managing Certificates on a Container
Connectors require a Certificate Authority (CA) issued or self-signed SSL certificate to communicate
securely with a destination. The Certificate Management wizard, available from the Containers tab,
helps you add and remove certificates on a container. Using the wizard, you can:
l

Add a certificate to a container.

l

Add certificates in bulk, enabling multiple containers at once.

l

Enable or disable a demo certificate on a container that is in non-FIPS mode only.

l

Add a CA Certs file on a container that is in non-FIPS mode only.

l

Remove a certificate from a container.

From the Containers tab and the Connectors tab, you can view details about the certificates applied to
a container. See "Viewing Certificates on a Container" on page 92.
For information about resolving invalid certificates, see "Resolving Invalid Certificate Errors" on page 93.

Adding CA Certificates to a Container
You can add a single CA certificate to a container that is in FIPS mode or non-FIPS mode.
Note: Whenever you enable or disable FIPS mode on a container, check that the required
certificates are present in the trust store and add them if necessary.
Hover over a container name to see the type of certificate applied to it. Click the icon to display a
list of the certificates available on the container.
Before you perform the following procedure, make sure the certificate you want to add is loaded in the
CA Certs repository.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 89 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

To add a single CA certificate to a container:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. Click the Containers tab.
4. On the Containers tab, select one or more containers to which you wish to add certificates.
5. Click Certificates. The Certificate Management wizard starts.
6. Review the dialog box, and then click Next.
7. Under Choose an Action, select Add Certificate, and then click Next.
8. Follow the instructions in the wizard to add the certificate.
If a container is down or a connector is running an older build, the wizard reports errors in the
progress bar and on the Summary page.

Removing CA Certificates from a Container
You can remove CA certificates from a container when they are no longer needed. When you remove a
CA certificate, the certificate is removed from the container’s trust store; but it is not deleted from the
repository.
Caution: Use caution when deleting certificates. When you delete a certificate on a container but
the connector destination is still using that certificate, the connector can no longer communicate
with the destination.

To remove CA certificates from a container:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. Click the Containers tab.
4. On the Containers tab, select one or more containers to which you wish to remove certificates.
5. Click Certificates. The Certificate Management wizard starts.
6. Review the dialog box, and then click Next.
7. Under Choose an Action, select Remove certificate, and then click Next.
8. Select one or more certificates from the certificate list, and then click Next. The certificates are
removed from the list of certificates and no longer used. When you remove a certificate from a
container in FIPS mode, the container restarts automatically.
9. The Certificate Management wizard displays the certificates that are removed successfully in a
comma-separated list. Certificates that cannot be removed are shown in a comma-separated list
together with a reason why the certificate removal failed.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 90 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Adding a CA Certs File to a Container
You can add a CA Certs file to any container that is in non-FIPS mode.
Caution: When you apply a CA Certs file, the entire trust store on the container is overwritten. All
previously-added certificates are overwritten.
Before you follow the procedure below, make sure that the CA Certs file you want to add is loaded in
the CA Certs repository.

To add a CA Certs file to a non-FIPS mode container:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. Click the Containers tab.
4. On the Containers tab, Select one or more non-FIPS mode containers to which you wish to add a
CA Certs file.
5. Click Certificates. The Certificate Management wizard starts.
6. Review the dialog box, and then click Next.
7. Under Choose an Action, select CA Cert (Legacy).
8. Follow the instructions in the wizard.
After the CA Certs file has been added to a container, the container restarts automatically.

Enabling or Disabling a Demo Certificate on a Container
You can use the demo certificate on a container for testing purposes. By default, the demo certificate on
a container is disabled. You can enable the demo certificate temporarily for testing purposes on a
container that is non-FIPS mode.
Note: Enable a demo certificate on a container in non-FIPS mode for testing purposes only. Using a
demo certificate in a production environment is a serious security issue because the demo certificate
is not unique.

To enable or disable a demo certificate on a non-FIPS mode container:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. Click the Containers tab.
4. On the Containers tab, Select one or more non-FIPS mode containers for which you wish to enable
or disable a CA Certs file.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 91 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

5. Click Certificates. The Certificate Management wizard starts.
6. Review the dialog box, and then click Next.
7. Under Choose an Action, select Demo CA (Legacy), and then click Next.
8. Follow the instructions in the Certificate Management wizard.
After you add the demo certificate on a container, the container restarts automatically.

Adding Multiple Destination Certificates to a Container
You can add multiple destination certificates to a container, whether in FIPS mode or not.
Note: Whenever you enable or disable FIPS mode on a container, check that the required
certificates are present in the trust store and add them if necessary.
Click the icon to display a list of the certificates available on the container.

To apply multiple destination certificates to a container:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, click System.
3. Click the Containers tab.
4. On the Containers tab, containers for which you wish to add multiple destination certificates.
5. Click Certificates. The Certificate Management wizard starts.
6. Review the dialog box, and then click Next.
7. Under Choose an Action, select Import destination certificates to add a certificate.
8. Follow the instructions in the wizard to complete the process.

Viewing Certificates on a Container
You can display a list of the CA certificates applied to a container and view the details for a particular
certificate in the list. To view certificates on a container,
l

On the Containers tab, in the Action drop-down for the container whose certificates you want to
view, select Display Certificates.

On the Connectors tab, click Certificates at the top of the page.
The Certificate List wizard displays the certificates applied to a container. To see details of a certificate,
select the certificate, and then click Next at the bottom of the page.
l

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 92 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Resolving Invalid Certificate Errors
If no valid CA certificates exist for the connectors in the container, resolve the invalid certificate error as
follows:

To resolve the invalid certificate error:
1. Select the container in the navigation tree.
2. Click the Containers tab. The error message is displayed.
3. In the Action drop-down of the container showing the issue, select Download Certificates.
4. Follow the instructions in the wizard to download and import the valid certificates.

Running Diagnostics on a Container
You can run diagnostics on a container.
Note: Diagnostic tools are also provided under Administration > System Admin.

To run diagnostics on a container:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, navigate to the host on which the container resides.
3. Click the Containers tab.
4. On the Containers tab, select one or more containers for which to run diagnostics.
5. In the Action drop-down, click Run Logfu. The Diagnostics wizard starts.
6. Select the action you want to take on the selected container:
l

l

Select Edit a configuration file to edit a file in the user/agent folder on the container with
the extension .properties, .csv, or .conf.
Select Edit a user file to edit any file (except binary files, such as .zip, .jar, or .exe) in the
user/agent folder on the container.

7. From the list of available files, select the file you want to edit. The file displays in the Edit File panel.
Make your edits, and then click Next to save your edits and restart the container.
Note: When you click Next, ArcSight Management Center saves the updated file in the
user/agent folder on the container. The original file is overwritten.
8. Click Done to close the Diagnostics wizard.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 93 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Managing Connectors
A connector (also known as a SmartConnector) is an HPE ArcSight software component that collects
events and logs from various sources on your network. A connector can be configured on ArcSight
Management Center, on a Logger platform with an integrated Connector Appliance, or installed on a
computer on your network, managed remotely. For a complete list of supported connectors, go to the
HPE ArcSight Customer Support site.
Procedures for managing connectors are described below.

Viewing All Connectors
You can see all currently managed connectors.

To view all connectors:
1. Click Node Management.
2. Click System in the navigation tree.
3. In the management panel, click the Connectors tab. All connectors display on the Connectors tab
in the management panel.

Adding a Connector
Prerequisites
Before you add a connector, review the following important information.
l

l

Make sure that the container, host, and location to which you want to add the connector exist in
ArcSight Management Center. If any of these elements do not exist, create them.
Follow the configuration best practices described in "Configuration Suggestions for Connector
Types" on page 117.
If you are configuring the Check Point OPSEC NG Connector, see "Configuring the Check Point
OPSEC NG Connector" on page 118 and refer to the SmartConnector Configuration Guide for Check
Point OPSEC NG.
If you are configuring a database connector that requires the MS SQL Server Driver for JDBC, follow
instructions in "Adding the MS SQL Server JDBC Driver " on page 121.
Caution: This connector type has special requirements concerning JDBC and authentication
setup. Refer to the SmartConnector Configuration Guide for Microsoft SQL Server Multiple

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 94 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Instance Audit DB for this important information before installing the connector.
l

If you are adding a software-based connector, make sure that the username and password for the
connector match the username and password for the container to which you are adding the
connector. If necessary, refer to "Changing Container Credentials" on page 82.
Caution: Each connector's default user name is connector_user and the default password is
change_me. A connector with these default values still in place should be considered nonsecure. HPE ArcSight strongly recommends that for optimal security, you should change each
connector’s credentials to non-default values before deploying the connector to production.

l

File-based connectors use the Common Internet File System (CIFS) or Network File System (NFS).
These stipulations apply when creating a local software connector to run as part of ArcMC.
o

o

l

On a Windows system, a CIFS share needs to be configured before you add a file-based
connector.
For all other connectors, an NFS mount needs to be established before a file-based connector can
be added. In addition, when entering the connector parameters, enter the configuration file name
without an extension in the Configuration File field. The extension
.sdkrfilereader.properties is appended automatically.

For detailed information about individual connector parameters, refer to the specific HPE ArcSight
SmartConnector Configuration Guide for the type of connector chosen. The configuration guide also
describes how to set up the source device for use with the connector

To add a connector:
Tip: If you are adding a connector for the Check Point FW-1/VPN-1 system, see a more detailed
procedure in "Configuring the Check Point OPSEC NG Connector" on page 118.
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the host on which the connector will reside.
3. In the management panel, click the Containers tab.
4. On the Containers tab, locate the container where you will assign the connector.
5. In the Action drop-down, click Add Connector. The Connector Setup wizard starts.
6. Review the dialog box, and then click Next.
7. Select a connector type from the pull-down list of available types, and then click Next.
8. Enter basic parameters for the connector. Parameters vary based on the connector type. (Hover
over a field for more information on a field.) When all fields have been entered, click Next.
Note: When entering parameters that include a file path, enter the path in POSIX format (for
example, /folder/filename).

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 95 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

For file-based connectors on Windows systems, specify the name of the CIFS mount point you
created for the connector. (You need to specify /opt/mnt/CIFS_share_name.)
Some connectors include table parameters. For example, the Microsoft Windows Event Log
includes parameters for each host in the domain and one or more log types (security, application,
system, directory service, DNS, file replication, and so on). You can import table parameters from a
CSV file. You can import a CSV file that was exported from another connector as long as you
export and import the CSV file from the same container. If the CSV file was exported from a
different container, you need to change the secret parameters, such as the password, which appear
in obfuscated format in the CSV file to plain text before you import the CSV file.
Note: For connectors that query Microsoft Active Directory to detect devices (for example,
Microsoft Windows Event Log - Unified), if the “Network Security: LDAP Server Signing
Requirements” policy is set to “Signing Required” on the Domain Controller, ArcSight
Management Center will be unable to connect to the Active Directory or browse for devices.
You see an error when selecting Windows Host Browser as the connector device browser
type.
9. Choose a primary destination for the connector and enter destination-specific parameters on the
following page(s), and then click Next. Destinations can be:
l ArcSight Logger SmartMessage (encrypted)
l

ArcSight Manager (encrypted)

l

CEF Syslog (plaintext, that is, unencrypted)
Note: FIPS Suite B certificates are not retrieved automatically and must be uploaded
manually.
To see certificate details, hover over the certificate.
l

l

Select Import the certificate to the connector from the destination, and then click
Next to import the certificate and continue.
Select Do not import the certificate to the connector from the destination, and
then click Next if you do not want to import the certificate. The destination will not be
added.

10. Enter connector details:
Parameter

Description

Name

A descriptive name for this connector.

Location

The location of the connector (such as the hostname).

Device Location

The location of the device that sends events to the connector.

Comment

Additional comments.

11. When complete, click Done.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 96 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Editing Connector Parameters
HPE ArcSight supports a large number of connector types to gather security events from a variety of
sources, including syslog, log files, relational databases, and proprietary devices. Accordingly,
configuration parameters vary widely depending on the type of connector being configured.
You can edit parameters (simple and table) for a specific connector, or for multiple connectors of the
same type at the same time.

Updating Simple Parameters for a Connector
The following procedure describes how to update simple parameters for a specific connector.

To update parameters for a specific connector:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the connector you wish to update.
3. In the management panel, the Connector summary tab displays.
4. On the Connector tab, next to Connector Parameters, click

.

5. Modify parameters as necessary, and then click Next.
Note: When editing parameters that include a file path, enter the path in POSIX format (for
example, /folder/filename).
6. When complete, click Done. The updated parameters display in the Connector Parameters table
of the Connector summary tab.

Updating Table Parameters for a Connector
Certain connectors, such as the Microsoft Windows Event connector, have table parameters. You can
update the table parameters for a specific connector when necessary.

To update table parameters for a specific connector:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the connector you wish to update. In the management panel, the
Connector summary tab displays.
3. On the Connector summary tab, next to Table Parameters, click

.

4. Modify parameters as necessary and then click Next.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 97 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

l

l

To add more rows of parameter information, click the Add Row link.
You can use an Excel-compatible program to prepare a comma-separated values text file with the
information and click the Import File button to load the entire table at once. The file needs to be
in the same format as the rows shown on the Update Table Parameters page and needs to
include a header row with parameter labels in the order shown on that page. For fields that
require checkbox values, enter True or False as the value. An example is shown below

.
5. When complete, click Done. The updated table parameters display in the Table Parameters section
of the Connector page.
Note: You can import a CSV file that was exported from another connector as long as you
export and import the CSV file from the same container. If the CSV file was exported from a
different container, you need to change the secret parameters, such as the password, which
appear in obfuscated format in the CSV file to plain text before you import the CSV file.

Updating Simple and Table Parameters for Multiple Connectors
If you have multiple connectors of the same type, you can change the simple and table parameters for
all the connectors at the same time.

To edit parameters for multiple connectors of the same type:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, select the host where the connectors reside.:
3. In the management panel, select the connectors whose parameters you want to update.
4. Click Parameters. The Update Connect Parameters wizard starts.
5. Review the dialog box, and then click Next.
6. Follow the instructions in the wizard.
l

l

You can choose to modify the simple parameters for all the selected connectors at once or modify
the simple parameters per connector.
If the connectors have table parameters, the table parameters are displayed so that you can
modify them. If you have many table parameters to modify for multiple connectors, you can
import the parameters from a CSV file. You can also export the table parameters to a CSV file for
use as a backup or to import on another Connector Appliance.
Note: When you update parameters for connectors of different versions, the newer

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 98 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

connectors might have additional parameters. In this case, only those parameters shared by
all connectors are displayed for updating.
7. Click Done when complete.

Managing Destinations
Connectors can forward events to more than one destination, such as ArcSight Manager and ArcSight
Logger. You can assign one or more destinations per connector. You can assign multiple destinations to
a connector and specify a failover (alternate) destination in the event that the primary destination fails.
The following procedures describe how to perform these actions on a specific connector or for multiple
connectors at the same time:
l

Add a primary or failover destination

l

Edit destination parameters and destination runtime parameters

l

Remove destinations

l

Re-register destinations

l

Manage alternate configurations for a destination

l

Send a command to a destination

Adding a Primary Destination to a Connector
When you add a primary destination to a connector, you need to enter details for the destination, such
as the destination hostname and port used.

To add a primary destination to a connector:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to connector to which you wish to add a destination. In the
management panel, the Connector summary tab displays.
3. On the Connector summary tab, next to Destinations, click
starts.

. The Add Destination wizard

4. Follow the steps in the wizard. You can either select an existing destination or add a new
destination. If you are adding a new destination, select the destination type and enter parameters
for the destination. Destination types are described in the SmartConnector User's Guide.
Note: For containers running 5.1.2.5823 and later, ArcSight Management Center retrieves the
certificate for the ArcSight Manager destination automatically and displays the certificate
summary.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 99 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

For containers running 5.1.2 and earlier, upload the certificate on the container and then add
the destination.
FIPS Suite B certificates are not retrieved automatically and must be uploaded manually.
To see certificate details, hover over the certificate.
l

l

Select Import the certificate to the connector from the destination, and then click Next
to import the certificate and continue.
Select Do not import the certificate to the connector from the destination and click
Next if you do not want to import the certificate. The destination will not be added.

5. Click Done when complete.

Adding a Failover Destination to a Connector
Each destination can have a failover destination that is used if the connection with the primary
destination fails.
Tip: UDP connections cannot detect transmission failure. Use Raw TCP for CEF Syslog
destinations.

To add a failover destination to a connector:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to connector to which you wish to add a destination. In the
management panel, the Connector summary tab displays.
3. On the Connector summary tab, in the Destinations table, click
starts.

. The Add Destination wizard

4. Follow the steps in the wizard to select from available destinations and enter the destination
details.
Note: FIPS Suite B certificates are not retrieved automatically and must be uploaded manually.
To see certificate details, hover over the certificate.
l

l

Select Import the certificate to the connector from the destination, and then click Next
to import the certificate and continue.
Select Do not import the certificate to the connector from the destination and click
Next if you do not want to import the certificate. The destination will not be added.

5. Click Done when complete.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 100 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Adding a Primary or Failover Destination to Multiple Connectors
You can add a primary or failover destination to several connectors at the same time.

To add a primary or failover destination to multiple connectors:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the container where the connectors reside.
3. In the management panel, click the Connectors tab.
4. From the list of connectors, select all connectors to which you wish to assign a destination.
5. Click

Destinations. The Manage Destinations wizard launches.

6. Review the dialog, and then click Next.
7. Under Choose an Option, select Add a destination, and then click Next.
8. Choose between a creating a new destination or selecting an existing destination, and then click
Next.
l

l

If you choose to create a new destination, select the destination type and then provide the
destination parameters. Destination types are described in the SmartConnector User's Guide.
If you choose to select an existing destination, select a destination from the list.
Note: ArcSight Management Center retrieves the ArcSight Manager certificate for the
destination automatically and displays the certificate summary.
FIPS Suite B certificates are not retrieved automatically and must be uploaded manually.
To see certificate details, hover over the certificate.
l

l

Select Import the certificate to the connector from destination, and then click Next
to import the certificate and continue.
Select Do not import the certificate to the connector from the destination and click
Next if you do not want to import the certificate. The destination will not be added.

9. Define the destination function by choosing between a primary or failover destination.
l

If you choose Primary destination, click Next to update the configuration.

l

If you choose Failover destination:
a. Select the primary destination that applies to your failover.
b. Check the box in the table header to modify all of the displayed connectors.
c. Click Next to update the configuration.

10. Click Done when complete.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 101 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Removing Destinations
You can remove a destination from a connector at any time. Each connector must have at least one
destination; as a result, you may not remove all destinations from a connector.

To remove a single destination from a connector:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the connector from which you wish to remove a destination. In
the management panel, the Connector summary tab displays.
3. On the Connector summary tab, in the Destinations table, click
to remove.

for the destination you want

4. Click OK to confirm removal.

To remove multiple destinations from one or more connectors:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the container where the connectors reside.
3. In the management panel, click the Connectors tab.
4. From the list of connectors, select all connectors to which you wish to assign a destination.
5. Click

Destinations. The Manage Destinations wizard launches.

6. Review the dialog, and then click Next.
7. Under Choose an Option, select Remove a destination, and then click Next.
8. Follow the instructions in the wizard, and click Done when complete.

Re-Registering Destinations
At certain times, you might need to re-register the destinations for one or more connectors; for
example, after you upgrade ESM, or if a Logger appliance or ESM appliance becomes unresponsive.

To re-register destinations for one or more connectors:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the container where the connectors reside.
3. In the management panel, click the Connectors tab.
4. From the list of connectors, select all connectors to which you wish to assign a destination.
5. Click Destinations. The Manage Destinations wizard launches.
6. Review the dialog, and then click Next.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 102 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

7. Under Choose an Option, select Re-register destinations, and then click Next.
8. Follow the instructions in the wizard and click Done when complete.

Editing Destination Parameters
The following procedures describe how to edit destination parameters for a specific connector and how
to edit destination parameters for multiple connectors.

To edit destination parameters for a connector:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the connector to which you wish to edit destination parameters.
In the management panel, the Connector summary tab displays.
3. In the Destinations table, click
Destination Parameters page.

next to the destination you want to edit to display the Edit

4. Make your changes, and then click Next.
5. Click Done when complete.

To edit destination parameters for multiple connectors:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the container where the connectors reside.
3. In the management panel, click the Connectors tab.
4. From the list of connectors, select all connectors for which you wish to edit destination parameters.
5. Click Destinations. The Manage Destinations wizard opens.
6. Review the dialog, and then click Next.
7. Under Choose an Option, select Edit a destination, and then click Next.
8. Follow the instructions in the wizard and click Done when complete.

Editing Destination Runtime Parameters
The runtime parameters for a destination enable you to specify advanced processing options such as
batching, time correction, and bandwidth control. The parameters you can configure are listed in
"Destination Runtime Parameters " on page 284. The user interface automatically displays the
parameters valid for a destination.
The following procedures describe how to edit the runtime parameters for a specific connector and how
to edit the runtime parameters for multiple connectors at the same time.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 103 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

To edit destination runtime parameters for a connector:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the connector for which you wish to edit destination runtime
parameters. In the management panel, the Connector summary tab displays.
3. On the Connector summary tab, in the Destinations table, click next to the destination whose
runtime parameters you want to edit.
4. Under Add Alternate Configurations, click
to edit.

next to the alternate configuration that you want

If you have not set up alternate configurations, click
next to the Default. For more information
about alternate configurations, see "Managing Alternate Configurations " below.
5. Specify or update values for the listed parameters, and then click Save.

To edit destination runtime parameters for multiple connectors at the same time:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the container where the connectors reside.
3. In the management panel, click the Connectors tab.
4. From the list of connectors, select all connectors for which you wish to edit destination runtime
parameters.
5. Click Runtime Parameters to open the wizard.
6. Follow these steps in the wizard to edit the runtime parameters:
a. Select the destinations whose runtime parameters you want to modify.
b. Select the configurations to be affected (default or alternate configurations).
c. Select the group of parameters you want to modify (for example, batching, cache, network,
processing).
d. Modify the parameters.

Managing Alternate Configurations
An alternate configuration is a set of runtime parameters that is used instead of the default
configuration during a specified portion of every day. For example, you might want to specify different
batching schemes (by severity or size) for different times of a day. You can define more than one
alternate configuration per destination, and apply them to the destination for different time ranges
during the day. For example, you can define a configuration for 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. time range and another
configuration for the 5 p.m. to 8 a.m. time range.
By default, a configuration labeled Default is applied to a destination. Any subsequent configurations
you define are labeled Alternate#1, Alternate#2, and so on. The default configuration is used if the

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 104 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products
time ranges specified for other alternate configurations do not span 24 hours. For example, if you
specify an alternate configuration, Alternate#1 that is effective from 7 a.m. to 8 p.m., the Default
configuration is used from 8 p.m. to 7 a.m.
If you need to apply the same alternate configuration for multiple destinations, you need to define an
alternate configuration (with the same settings) for each of those destinations.

Defining a New Alternate Configuration
The process of defining a new alternate configuration includes first defining the configuration, and
then editing it to specify the time range for which that configuration is effective.

To define an alternate configuration:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the connector for which you wish to edit destination runtime
parameters. In the management panel, the Connector summary tab displays.
3. On the Connector summary tab, in the Destinations table, click

.

4. Under Add Alternate Configurations, click Add.
5. Specify or update values for the listed parameters.
6. Click Save. If this is the first alternate configuration you defined, it is saved as Alternate#1.
Subsequent configurations are saved as Alternate#2, Alternate#3, and so on.
To specify the effective time range for which the configuration you just defined, edit the
configuration you just defined using the following procedure, "Editing an Alternate Configuration"
below.

Editing an Alternate Configuration
In addition to editing an alternate configuration to change parameter values, you can edit it to specify
the time range for which it is effective.

To edit an alternate configuration:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the connector for which you wish to edit destination runtime
parameters. In the management panel, the Connector summary tab displays.
3. On the Connector summary tab, in the Destinations table, click

.

4. From the list of alternate configurations, select the alternate configuration that you want to edit,
and then click

.

5. Specify or update values for the listed parameters, including the time range in the From Hour/To

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 105 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Hour.
6. Scroll down to the end of the page and click Save.

Editing Alternate Configurations in Bulk
If you need to update the same parameters in multiple alternate configurations, follow the procedure
described in "Editing Destination Runtime Parameters" on page 103.

Sending a Command to a Destination
You can send a command to a connector destination.

To send a command to a destination on a connector:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the connector for which you wish to send a command. In the
management panel, the Connector summary tab displays.
3. On the Connector summary tab, in the Destinations table, click

.

4. Select the command you want to run, and then click Next.
5. Enter values for the parameters that the user interface displays, and then click Finish.

Deleting a Connector
To delete one or more connectors:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the container where the connectors reside.
3. In the management panel, click the Connectors tab.
4. From the list of connectors, select all connectors the connectors you want to delete.
5. Click Delete.
6. Click OK to confirm deletion.
7. Reboot the Connector Appliance or Logger system that each connector was associated with.
Note: You can also delete a specific connector from its Connector summary tab. Click
the top of the tab to delete the connector.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

at

Page 106 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Sending a Command to a Connector
You can send a command to a connector.

To send a command to a connector:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the connector to which you wish to send a command. In the
management panel, the Connector summary tab displays.
3. On the Connector summary tab, click Connector Command.
4. From the Command Type drop-down list, select the command you want to send to the connector,
and then click Next.

Running Logfu on a Connector
Run Logfu on a connector to parse ArcSight logs and generate an interactive visual representation of
the information contained within the logs.

To run Logfu on a connector:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the connector to which you wish to run Logfu. In the
management panel, the Connector summary tab displays.
3. On the Connector summary tab, click Run Logfu.
4. The Logfu progress window is displayed as system data logs are retrieved and analyzed. Data is
then displayed by Group, Field, and Chart.
l

l

l

l

In the Group box, choose a data type to view. The Group box lists all connectors within the
chosen container, plus many other data types, such as memory usage and transport rates.
Next, choose one of the Group box data points. Depending on which data point you chose, a list
of fields appears in the Field box below.
Choose a field to view. A graphic chart appears in the Chart box, providing rate and time
information. The key at the bottom of the Chart box defines the data points mapped in the chart.
To choose a different data point for analysis, click Reset Data.

5. When complete, close the Logfu display window.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 107 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Remote File Systems
Your system can mount Network File System (NFS 3.0 only) and CIFS (Windows) shares. As a result, it
can read log files and event data from UNIX, Linux, Windows remote hosts, and any Network Attached
Storage (NAS) solutions based on these operating systems. You need to establish a CIFS mount before
you can add a file-based connector on a Windows system to ArcSight Management Center.

Managing a Remote File System
Make sure the following requirements are met before you mount a share.
File System
Type
Requirements
CIFS
(Windows)

l

A user account that has access to the shared drive exists on the Windows system.

l

The folder to which you are establishing the mount point is configured for sharing.

l

NFS

Note: NTLMv2 and NTLMv2i authentication are supported. NTLMv2i support on Windows 2008 R2
requires installation of Microsoft hotfix KB957441.

l

Grant your ArcSight system read and write permission on the NFS system.

l

The account used for mounting must use the numeric ids 1500 for uid , or 750 for gid .

To add a Remote File System mount:
1. Click Setup > System Admin from the top-level menu bar.
2. Click Remote File Systems in the Storage section in the left panel.
The Remote File Systems form is displayed.
3. Click Add from the top left side of the page and enter values for the following fields in the resulting
form.
Parameter Description
Select File
System
Type

Whether you want to mount an NFS or a CIFS share.

NFS Settings
Name

A meaningful name for the mount point. The name cannot contain spaces. This name is used locally
on your system to refer to the mount point, and needs to be specified when configuring archive
settings for data that will be stored on the share.

Hostname
/ IP
Address

The name or IP address of the host to which you are creating the mount.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 108 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Parameter Description
Remote
Path (for
NFS)

The folder on the remote host that will act as the root of the network file system mount. For
example, /public/system_logs.

Mount
Options

AutoFS options. For example, ro for read-only from the remote host, rw for read-write, or hard to keep
retrying until the remote host responds.

Make sure that only this system can write to the location you specify in this field. If multiple systems
(or other systems) mount this location and write to it, data on this location will be corrupted.

Note: Even if you configure rw permission at your mount point, rw permission is not granted to the
remote host if the host is configured to allow read-only access.
Note: NTLMv2 and NTLMv2i authentication are supported.
Description A meaningful description of the mount point.
CIFS Settings
Name

A meaningful name for the mount point. The name cannot contain spaces. This name is used locally
on your system to refer to the mount point, and needs to be specified when configuring archive
settings for data that will be stored on the share.

Location

Enter the share name in one of the following ways:
l

Share name in this format:
 or :
For example, 198.0.2.160:myshare
This folder needs to be configured for sharing. (Typically, to configure a Windows folder for
sharing, right click on the folder name > Properties > Sharing.)
Caution: when mounting from a Windows Server 2008 in cluster, you must use the Hostname and
not the
IP address for a successful mount.

l

UNC path
For example, //198.0.2.160/myshare

Mount
Options

Autofs options. For example, ro for read-only from the remote host, rw for read-write, or hard to keep
retrying until the remote host responds.
Note: Even if you configure rw permission at your mount point, rw permission is not granted to the
remote host if the host is configured to allow read-only access.
Important: For log file connectors (for example, the Symantec AntiVirus connector), you need to
enable the directio option so that ArcSight Management Center can process new events. Enter
rw,directio in the File System Mount Options field.

Description A meaningful description of the mount point.
Credentials for CIFS
Username

The name of the user account with read-write privileges to the Windows share.
Make sure the username is prefixed with the domain information. For example, tahoe\arcsight.

Password

The password for the user name specified above.

4. Click Add.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 109 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

All mount points are created under /opt/mnt. Note the name of the mount point you create. You
need to specify this name when adding a connector that will use this share to ArcSight
Management Center.

To edit a Remote File System mount:
Note: You cannot edit a mount point if it is in use. The Edit link is displayed only if the mount point
can be edited.
1. Click Setup > System Admin from the top-level menu bar.
2. Click Remote File Systems in the Storage section in the left panel.
3. Select the mount point you want to edit, and click Edit from the top left side of the page.
4. Change the field values.
5. Click Save.

To delete a Remote File System mount:
Note: You cannot delete a mount point that is in use. The Delete link is displayed only if the mount
point can be deleted. Once stopped, expect up to a two minute delay before the mount can be
edited or deleted.
1. Click Setup > System Admin from the top-level menu bar.
2. Click Remote File Systems in the Storage section in the left panel.
3. Select the mount point you want to delete, and click Delete from the top left side of the page.

Changing the Network Interface Address for Events
ArcSight Management Center has multiple network interfaces. By default, the connector determines
which network interface address is used for events displayed in the ArcSight Console or Logger, but
typically uses eth0.
To use a specific network interface address for events, add the parameter
connector.network.interface.name to the Connector’s agent.properties file. For example,
to use the IP address for eth1, specify the following parameter:
connector.network.interface.name=eth1

Developing FlexConnectors
FlexConnectors are custom, user-designed SmartConnectors that can read and parse information from
third-party devices and map that information to ArcSight’s event schema.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 110 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products
ArcSight Management Center provides a FlexConnector Development wizard that enables you to
quickly and easily develop a FlexConnector by creating a parser file, and enables you to test and
package your new FlexConnector before deploying it. The wizard generates regular expressions and
provides event field mapping suggestions automatically so you do not need to be an expert in regular
expression authoring, parser syntax, or ArcSight event schema.
Use the FlexConnector Development wizard to develop FlexConnectors for simple log files. For complex
log files, use the FlexConnector SDK (available from the HPE ArcSight Customer Support site)
The FlexConnector Development wizard supports Regex Files, Folder Follower, and Syslog (Daemon,
File, Pipe) FlexConnectors only.
The FlexConnector Development wizard does not support the extra processors property or multiple
sub-messages. If you need these features, use the FlexConnector SDK to create your FlexConnector.
Caution: A FlexConnector that you develop with the FlexConnector Development wizard might
perform more slowly than an HPE ArcSight SmartConnector.

To develop a FlexConnector:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the container where you wish to develop the connector.
3. In the management panel, click the Connectors tab.
4. On the Connectors tab, in the Action drop-down, click Edit FlexConnector. The FlexConnector
Development wizard is launched.
5. Provide the vendor and product name of the device for which you are creating a FlexConnector,
and then click Next.
6. Select the data source type, and then click Next:
l

l

Select Syslog to create a Syslog FlexConnector to read events from Syslog messages.
Select File to create a FlexConnector to parse variable-format log files using regular expressions
(ArcSight FlexConnector Regex File) or to parse variable-format log files in batch mode (ArcSight
FlexConnector Folder Follower).

7. Upload a sample log file for the data source type you selected in the previous step, and then click
Next.
8. The wizard finds the first unparsed line in the log file, generates a regular expression to match and
extract tokens from that line, and displays the suggested field mappings for each extracted token
in the Mappings table.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 111 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Note: The mappings are displayed in descending order of probability (based on HPE ArcSight
training data). You can change the mappings by selecting from the list.
The percentage of parsed lines in the file is shown in the top right of the panel. You can use
this percentage to estimate where you are in the log file. The percentage of unparsed lines
skipped in the file is also shown in the top right of the panel.
l

l

To change the regular expression in the Regex box and recalculate the mappings, edit the
expression and then click the Recalculate button.You can set the regular expression back to the
suggested value by clicking the Reset button.
Field mappings that do not correspond directly to the extracted tokens in the unparsed line of
the log file are displayed in the Extra Mappings table. You can change the Event Field and provide
a token operation. To add a new Event Field, click Add Row.
You can use extra mappings to:
l

l

l

Remap an extracted token to a different Event Field in addition to the existing mapping. For
example, you can add an Event Field with the value $3 where $3 is the third token in the list of
suggested mappings.
Map a modified token or combination of tokens to an Event Field. For example, you can add an
Event Field with the value __operation($1,$3).
Map an Event Field to a constant string or integer. For example, you can add an Event Field
with the value __stringConstant(constant).
For a list of the token operations used when tokens are mapped to ArcSight event fields, refer
to the FlexConnector Developer’s Guide (available from the ArcSight Customer Support site).

9. Click Next to save the mapping to the parser file and display the next unparsed line in the log file.
After all unparsed lines in the log file have corresponding regular expressions and mappings, the
wizard displays the parser file for review.
10. Review the parser file and make changes, if necessary, directly in the Review Parser File panel.
11. Click Next to save and package the parser file.
12. Choose how you want to deploy the FlexConnector:

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 112 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

l

Select Deploy parser to existing connector in container, and then click Next to use the parser
file with an existing connector. Click Done to close the FlexConnector wizard and re-display the
Container tab.
Note: The Deploy parser to existing connector in container option displays only if the
container already contains a connector of the same type.

l

Select Add new connector to container, and then click Next to add the parser as a new
connector. Follow the steps to add the connector to the container.

You can share FlexConnectors with other users. See "Sharing Connectors in ArcExchange" below.

Editing FlexConnectors
After you have developed a FlexConnector with the FlexConnector wizard and have deployed it in a
container, you can edit the FlexConnector to make changes to the parser file when needed.
The FlexConnector Edit wizard is available on the Connectors tab in the Action drop-down.
Click Edit Connector in the Action drop-down for the FlexConnector to open the wizard, then edit the
parser file.
Caution: Only edit a FlexConnector that is created with the FlexConnector wizard. Editing
manually-created FlexConnectors might produce unpredictable results.

Sharing Connectors in ArcExchange
You can share FlexConnectors and parser overrides with other users.
A FlexConnector is a custom connector that you define to gather security events from log files,
databases, and other software and devices. You can share the following FlexConnector types:
l

Syslog FlexConnectors (to read events from syslog messages)

l

Log File FlexConnectors (to read fixed-format log files)

l

Regular Expression Log File FlexConnectors (to read variable-format log files)

l

l

l

Regular Expression Folder Follower FlexConnectors (to read variable-format log files recursively in a
folder)
Regular Expression Multiple Folder Follower FlexConnectors (to read events in real time or batch
mode from multiple folders)
XML FlexConnectors (to read events recursively from XML-based files in a folder)

A parser override is a file provided by HPE ArcSight used to resolve an issue with the parser for a
specific connector, or to support a newer version of a supported device where the log file format

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 113 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products
changed slightly or new event types were added. You can share parser overrides for all connector types
that use a parser.
To share a FlexConnector or parser override, you need to package and upload it to ArcExchange on the
HPE ArcSight online community (Protect 724) or to your local machine. You can also download a
FlexConnector or parser override that you need from ArcExchange or from your local machine and add
it to a container.
Note: ArcExchange will not be able to reach the HPE ArcSight Protect724 Community if access is
attempted through a proxy server.

Packaging and Uploading Connectors
Before uploading your FlexConnector or parser override to Protect 724 or to your local computer, you
need to package it into a zip file, (called an AUP package) using the upload wizard.
A FlexConnector AUP package contains the connector properties file, categorization file, connector
parameters, and a manifest file with all the metadata on the package required for successful
deployment. Metadata includes information about the AUP package, such as the package type,
connector type, connector description, and so on. You can create only one AUP package per connector
per device type. You can package a FlexConnector in Basic or Advanced mode. In Basic mode:
l

l

l

The wizard packages the FlexConnector properties file automatically. If the wizard finds more than
one properties file, you are prompted to select the file you want to package.
The wizard packages the categorization file automatically only if it can be determined based on the
device vendor and product information found in the properties file.
The wizard does not package connector parameters. You are prompted to configure the connector
when it is downloaded and deployed.

In Advanced mode:
l

l

l

The wizard packages the FlexConnector properties file automatically. If the wizard finds more than
one properties file, you are prompted to select the file you want to package. (This is same as Basic
mode.)
The wizard packages the categorization file automatically if it can be determined based on the device
vendor and product information found in the properties file. If the categorization file cannot be
determined, you are prompted to select the categorization file you want to package from the list of
files found in the container.
The wizard displays connector parameters so you can configure the parameters you want to display
and set the default values you want to provide during connector deployment (download). The
parameters you do not configure for display are pre-configured with the current values and will not
be displayed during connector deployment.

A parser override package contains the parser override properties file and the manifest file only.
Follow the steps below to package and upload a FlexConnector or parser override.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 114 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

l
l

To upload to ArcExchange, you must have a valid username and password for Protect 724.
Make sure that you have configured network settings under Administration > System Admin >
Network and that ArcSight Management Center can communicate with the Protect 724 server.

To package and upload a FlexConnector or parser override:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the connector for which you wish to upload a package. In the
management panel, the Connector summary tab is displayed.
3. On the Connector details page, click

.The upload wizard is launched.

4. Click Next and follow the steps in the wizard to:
a. Select the type of AUP package you want to create for the selected connector.
ArcSight Management Center scans the container and displays the relevant files that can be
packaged.
b. For a FlexConnector, select Basic to create a default package or select Advanced to customize
the package to meet your needs.
c. If the connector contains several properties files, you are prompted to select the properties file
you want to package. Certain connectors, for example, syslog connectors, can have more than
one parser override folder, in this case, you are prompted to select the folder you want to
package.
d. If you selected Advanced mode for a FlexConnector previously, and the categorization file
cannot be determined, you are prompted to select the categorization file you want to package
from a list of files found in the container.
Note: Categorization files are not packaged for parser overrides.
e. If you selected Advanced mode for a FlexConnector previously, select the configuration
parameters you want to display when the connector is deployed and then provide default values
for these parameters. Parameters you do not select are pre-configured with the current values.
If any advanced connector parameters were previously modified from their defaults, the wizard
displays these parameters so that you can select which ones you want to be configured
automatically during deployment.
Note: Configuration parameters are not displayed for parser overrides.
If the connector has table parameters, they are not displayed during packaging. However,
when the connector is downloaded to a container, you are prompted to provide values for
all the table parameters.
f. Provide a description of the AUP package and instructions on how configure the device used by
the connector.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 115 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

g. Provide the vendor, product, and version of the device used by the connector.
If the wizard can determine the vendor, product, and version of the device, the information is
displayed in the fields provided. You can change the information to meet your needs.
h. Upload the created AUP package to ArcExchange or to your local machine. You will require a
username and password for Protect 724.

Downloading Connectors
You can download a FlexConnector or parser override that is available from ArcExchange on Protect
724 or from your local computer. You download a FlexConnector or parser override directly to a
container.
You can download only one FlexConnector per container using the download wizard. However, there is
no limit to the number of parser overrides you can download to a container.
l

l

When downloading a parser override to a container, the download wizard overwrites any
existing parser override with the same name in the container without prompting for
confirmation. To avoid overwriting an existing parser override, send a Get Status command to
the existing parser override to check the parser information before you download a new parser
override. For information on sending a Get Status command, refer to "Sending a Command to a
Connector" on page 107.
Always back up the container to the Backup Files repository before downloading a connector or
parser override so you can revert to the previous configuration if the download produces
unexpected results.

Follow the steps below to download a FlexConnector or parser override to a container.
To download to ArcExchange, you must have a valid username and password for Protect 724. Also,
make sure that you have configured network settings under Administration > System Admin >
Network and that the appliance can communicate with the Protect 724 server.

To download a FlexConnector or parser override:
1. Click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, browse to the host on which the container resides.
3. In the management panel, click the Containers tab.
4. From the list of containers, locate the container into which you want to download the connector. In
the Action drop-down, select Run FlexConnector Wizard.
5. Click Next and follow the steps in the wizard to:
a. Select whether you want to download the connector from ArcExchange on Protect 724 or from
your local computer.
b. Select the AUP package you want to download.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 116 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

On Protect 724, you can search for a parser override or FlexConnector AUP package using a
keyword or a combination of keywords.
Note: You can only download a parser override package to a container that has a connector
of the same type as the package.
You can download only one FlexConnector per container using the download wizard. If the
container already contains a FlexConnector of the same type as the one you want to
download, you can replace the existing FlexConnector with the one you are downloading,
but you cannot create a new one.
c. For a FlexConnector, provide connector configuration parameters, if needed.
Pre-configured and advanced parameters are deployed automatically with the values that were
packaged; you are not prompted to configure these parameters. The configurable parameters
are displayed with suggested defaults, which you can modify if necessary. The table parameters
are displayed with no configured values, you have to provide the values manually, as needed.
d. Add or select a destination for the connector.
If you are downloading the connector to a container that has an existing connector of the same
type, you are not prompted for a destination.
The wizard copies the properties and categorization files to the appropriate locations and also installs
the zip file for the AUP package in the user/agent/deployedaups folder on ArcSight Management
Center to keep track of the deployment history.
After a successful download, the container is restarted automatically.

Configuration Suggestions for Connector Types
The following table provides configuration suggestions for different types of connectors.
Connector
Type

Effects of Limited Usage

Syslog
Due to the nature of UDP (the transport protocol typically used by Syslog), these connectors can potentially lose
connectors events if the configurable event rate is exceeded. This is because the connector delays processing to match the event
rate configured, and while in this state, the UDP cache might fill and the operating system drop UDP messages.
Note: Do not use the Limit CPU Usage option with these connectors because of the possibility of event loss.
SNMP
Similar to Syslog connectors, when the event rate is limited on SNMP connectors, they can potentially lose events.
connectors SNMP is also typically UDP-based and has the same issues as Syslog.
Database
Because connectors follow the database tables, limiting the event rate for database connectors can slow the
connectors operation of other connectors. The result can be an event backlog sufficient to delay the reporting of alerts by as
much as minutes or hours. However, no events will be lost, unless the database tables are truncated. After the event
burst is over, the connector might eventually catch up with the database if the event rate does not exceed the
configured limit.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 117 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Connector
Type

Effects of Limited Usage

File
Similar to database connectors, file-based connectors follow files and limiting their event rates causes an event
connectors backlog. This can eventually force the connector to fall behind by as much as minutes or hours, depending on the
actual event rate. The connectors might catch up if the event rate does not exceed the configured rate.
Asset
All connectors on ArcSight Management Center run as a service (not as an application). Therefore, asset scanner
Scanner
connectors running onConnector Appliance are not supported in Interactive mode.
connectors
To run the asset scanner connector in Interactive mode, install the connector on a standalone system and manage it
as a software-based connector.
Proprietary The behavior of these connectors depends on the particular API, (for example, OPSEC behaves differently than
API
PostOffice and RDEP). But in most cases, there will be no event loss unless the internal buffers and queues of the
connectors API implementation fill up. These connectors work much like database or file connectors.

Included FlexConnectors
HPE ArcSight Management Center Connector Applianceincludes these prototype FlexConnectors:
l

ArcSight FlexConnector File

l

ArcSight FlexConnector ID-based Database

l

ArcSight FlexConnector Multiple Database

l

ArcSight FlexConnector Regular Expression File

l

ArcSight FlexConnector Regular Expression Folder File

l

ArcSight FlexConnector Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

l

ArcSight FlexConnector Time-based Database

l

ArcSight FlexConnector XML File

You can use these prototypes to develop your own FlexConnectors, and these can be shared with other
users. Refer to "Sharing Connectors in ArcExchange" on page 113.
For more information, consult the FlexConnector Developer’s Guide, available from HPE ArcSight
Customer Support.

Configuring the Check Point OPSEC NG Connector
The Check Point FW-1/VPN-1 OPSEC NG connector can operate in clear channel or sslca mode.
Note: The following stipulations apply to configuring the Check Point OPSEC NG Connector:
l
l

This procedure is supported only for HPE ArcSight connector release 4.6.2 or later.
A hostname is called an Application Object Name on Check Point. A password is a
Communication Activation Key on Check Point.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 118 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

To configure a connector to operate in sslca mode:

On the Check Point SmartDashboard:
1. Create an OPSEC Application Object using the Check Point SmartDashboard. You need to provide
these parameters when creating the application object.
Parameter

Description

Name

A meaningful name for the application object you are creating; for example, ArcSightLea-1.
This name is used to pull the OPSEC certificate.

Host

The hostname of the HPE ArcSight Management Center system managing the connector.

Client Entities

Select LEA.

Secure Internal
Communication

If a DN string is not present, initialize the communication by providing an activation key. The
activation key is used when the certificate is pulled. This is the SIC Name.
Click Communication > Initialize.

After the object is created, note down the following information, which you will need to provide
when continuing configuration.
l

l

l

SIC Name: DN string that you obtain after initializing communication as described below.
SIC Entity Name: Double-click the Check Point Gateway name in the SmartDashboard to view its
general properties. The SIC Entity Name is the SIC string configured in the general properties
window.
Check Point IP address or hostname.

2. Pull the Check Point certificate.
To do so, run the Pull OPSEC Certificate command on the container to which you will be
adding the connector. For detailed information about running a command on a container, see
"Sending a Command to a Container" on page 82. You need to provide this information when
running the command:
Parameter

Description

Server hostname or IP
address

The name or IP address of the Check Point server.

Application object name

The OPSEC Application object name you specified in the previous step. This
parameter is case sensitive.

Password

The activation key you entered when creating the OPSEC application object in the
previous step.

If the certificate is pulled successfully, a message similar to this is displayed:

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 119 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

OPSEC SIC name (CN=ArcSightLea-1,0=cpfw1.5ad8cn) was retrieved and stored
in /opt/arcsight/connectors//current/user/agent/checkpoint/. Certificate was created
successfully and written to "/opt/arcsight/connectors//current/user/agent/checkpoint/ArcSightLea-1.opsec.p12".

Note down the OPSEC SIC Name (CN=ArcSightLea-1,0=cpfw1.5ad8cn in the above example) and
the file name (ArcSightLea-1.opsec.p12 in the above example).
Tip: If the certificate is not pulled successfully, check to ensure that the Application object
name you specified is correct (including the case) and the container on which you are running
the command is up and running.
3. Install Policy on the LEA client for the Check Point Gateway using the SmartDashboard.

On Connector Appliance:
1. Add a Check Point connector by following instructions described in "Adding a Connector" on
page 94. You need to provide the following information.
Parameters Values to input
Type

Check Point FW-1/VPN-1 OPSEC NG

Connection
Type

SSLCA

Connector
Table
Parameters

Server IP: The IP address of the Check Point server.
Server Port: The port on the server that listens for SSLCA connections. Use the default value 18184.
OPSEC SIC Name: The name you noted in "Create an OPSEC Application Object using the Check
Point SmartDashboard. You need to provide these parameters when creating the application
object. " on the previous page.
OPSEC SSLCA File: The name you noted after pulling the certificate in "Pull the Check Point
certificate." on the previous page.
OPSEC Entity SIC Name: The name you noted in "Create an OPSEC Application Object using the
Check Point SmartDashboard. You need to provide these parameters when creating the application
object. " on the previous page.

2. An error similar to the following is displayed.
-1:[X] Unable to connect to the Lea Server[10.0.101.185] -1:1 connection
test failed!

Select the Ignore warnings check box, and then click Next.
3. Continue to configure the rest of the connector as described under "Adding a Connector" on
page 94.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 120 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

Adding the MS SQL Server JDBC Driver
When you install and configure database connectors that use Microsoft SQL Server as the database, a
JDBC driver is required. This driver does not ship pre-installed; you need to install it before configuring
database connectors on the appliance.

To install a JDBC Driver:
1. From the Microsoft web site, download the MS SQL Server JDBC Driver to a computer that can
access ArcSight Management Center.
2. Run the setup program to install the driver.
3. Follow the instructions in "Uploading Files to a Repository" on page 211 to add the sqljdbc.jar
file.
Tip: The name of the jar file may be different from that of some JDBC driver versions.
Different versions of the JDBC driver are required for different SQL Server database versions;
be sure to use the correct driver for your database.
The new driver file is added to the repository, as shown in the following example.
After you have installed the JDBC driver, you need to upload the driver file to the containers that
will contain the SQL Server database Connectors. Follow the instructions in "Uploading Files to a
Repository" on page 211.
After the driver file has been uploaded to a container, follow the instructions in "Adding a
Connector" on page 94 to add a connector that requires a JDBC driver.

Adding the MySQL JDBC Driver
When you install and configure database connectors that use MySQL as the database, a JDBC driver is
required. This driver does not ship pre-installed. Install it before configuring database connectors on
the appliance.

To install a JDBC Driver:
1. From the Microsoft web site, download the MySQL JDBC Driver to a computer that can access
ArcSight Management Center.
http://dev.mysql.com/downloads/connector/j/5.0.html
2. Extract the driver.
3. Follow the instructions in "Uploading Files to a Repository" on page 211 to add the mysqlconnector-java-x.x.x-bin.jar file. The new driver file is added to the repository.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 121 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5: Managing HPE ArcSight Products

After you have installed the JDBC driver, you need to upload the driver file to the containers that
will contain the MySQL database Connectors. Follow the instructions in "Uploading Files to a
Repository" on page 211.
After the driver file has been uploaded to a container, follow the instructions in "Adding a
Connector" on page 94 to add a connector that requires a JDBC driver.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 122 of 316

Chapter 6: Managing Configurations
The following topics are discussed here.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Overview
Configuration Management
Managing Subscribers
Pushing a Subscriber Configuration
Checking Subscriber Compliance
Comparing Configurations
Configuration Management Best Practices
Subscriber Configuration Types
Initial Configuration Management
Managing Logger Event Archives
Managing Logger Peers
Managing Event Broker

123
124
130
132
134
135
136
137
157
161
163
166

Overview
A configuration is a group of related appliance or software settings and their associated values, which
applies to one or more node types. A configuration created for a node can be pushed to nodes of the
same type managed by ArcSight Management Center, assuring uniformity across a group of nodes.
Configurations come in these kinds:
l

l

A subscriber configuration is for the routine management of multiple managed HPE ArcSight
products. You can easily assign values to, propagate, and maintain the same settings across multiple
nodes of the same type, including connectors, Connector Appliances, Loggers, or other ArcMCs.
An initial configuration is for the rapid, uniform setup of multiple HPE ArcSight Loggers (only). Use
an initial configuration to expedite the initial deployment of HPE ArcSight Loggers to a production
environment.

Configuration management tasks include:
l

l

l

Configuration Creation: A configuration for a node type can be created (as well as edited or deleted)
in ArcSight Management Center.
Configuration Import: A configuration can be created directly on a managed node, exported, and
then imported into ArcSight Management Center for sharing with nodes of the same type.
Configuration Push: A configuration can be pushed from ArcMC to managed nodes. This copies the
configuration from ArcMC and changes the settings on each destination node.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 123 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

l

l

l

Subscriptions: Managed nodes can be subscribed to a subscriber configuration, so they can receive a
new or updated configuration pushed from ArcSight Management Center.
Compliance Checks: Check whether the settings and their values on a managed node match the ones
for a configuration type specified in ArcSight Management Center. If so, the node is said to be in
compliance with the configuration.
Comparisons: Compare two configurations of the same type quickly, with a field by field breakdown
of each setting, its value, and any differences. You can compare the values of a configuration on a
subscriber node to the values of the baseline or reference configuration on an ArcMC which manages
it. You can also compare two configurations of the same type on a single ArcMC.

For example, a typical workflow for a subscriber configuration might work as follows: you can create a
suitable DNS configuration for an appliance, specifying primary DNS server, secondary DNS server, and
search domains for the appliance. (See "Destination Configuration Types" on page 143.) You can then
push your DNS configuration to subscribing appliances, and so ensure that DNS settings for all
subscribed nodes are configured identically with a single action.
If you later updated the configuration to use a new primary DNS server, you could push the new
configuration to all subscribers, and all of them would be updated for the new DNS server with one
action.
At any time, you could verify any managed node’s compliance with the configuration to determine if its
settings were assigned the desired values.

Configuration Management
To create or manage configurations, on the menu bar, click Configuration Management. To manage a
specific configuration type, select the configuration type from the sub-menu.
For example, to access subscriber configurations for Loggers, click Configuration Management
> Subscriber Configurations > Logger Configurations.

The Configurations Table
The Configurations table lists all currently available subscriber configurations in ArcSight Management
Center. Each listed configuration, whether it was created in ArcSight Management Center or imported
from an existing node, is considered the baseline copy of that configuration, for pushing to managed
nodes. The table includes the following columns.
l

Name: The name of the configuration.

l

Type: The type of configuration.

l

Last Edited By: The most recent user to edit the configuration.

l

Compliance: An aggregation of the status of the individual subscribers to that configuration.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 124 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

o

Compliant indicates that all subscribers are in compliance.

o

Non-Compliant indicates that at least one subscriber is out of compliance.

o

Unknown indicates that the compliance status for one or more subscribers cannot be determined
(for example, because connectivity to one or more subscribers is not available).
Tip: You can check the individual compliance of each subscriber on the Subscribers tab.

Click any column header to sort the Configurations table by that column.
To view the details of any configuration, click its name in the list. The Details and Subscribers tabs will
display additional information.
Tip: To select multiple items from any list, Shift+Click or Ctrl+Click while selecting.

The Details Tab
The Details tab shows the specifics of the configuration, including any configured attributes and their
values.

Configuration Name
Each configuration has a unique name. A configuration may be up to 255 characters in length.

General
General details describe the basics of the configuration, as follows:
l

l

Configuration Type: The type of the configuration. For details of configuration types, see
" Subscriber Configuration Types" on page 137.
Last Edited By: The most recent user to edit the configuration.

Properties
A property is a group of one or more settings for the configuration. For example, for the NTP Server
configuration, the property includes two settings: Enable as NTP Server (a Boolean value indicating
whether to enable the product as an NTP server), and NTP Servers (a list of NTP servers).
The specific parameters included in each property are pre-defined for each configuration type. ArcSight
Management Center prompts for values of each setting when the property is selected. Each parameter
must be assigned a valid value corresponding to its data type. For instance, if the data type is integer,
you must specify an integer value. A red asterisk (*) indicates a required parameter.
List Configurations

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 125 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations
A configuration type that can include more than one property is known as a list configuration. A list
configuration represents a configuration with multiple instances of data values of the same kind. Each
instance is known as a property.
For example, the Connector Map File configuration could include information on multiple map files.
Each Property would represent a different map file (with different values for file path and content).
Note: A pushed list configuration will override any existing configuration of the same type on the
managed node. To append data to an existing configuration, use the bulk management tools (Set
Configuration)
For a description of supported configuration types, the parameters associated with each type, and their
data types, see "The Configurations Table" on page 124.

The Subscribers Tab
The Subscriberslist shows all managed nodes currently eligible to receive the configuration. (The list is
empty if no hosts have been added yet.)
The tab includes these operations buttons:
Add Subscribers

Adds subscribers to the existing configuration.

Push

Pushes the configuration to one or more selected subscribers.

Check Compliance Checks the compliance of all subscribers with the baseline configuration.
Unsubscribe

Removes one or more selected subscribers from the subscriber list.

The list includes the following columns:
l

Path: The path of the subscribing node, consisting of location/hostname/node type.

l

Type: The type of subscribing node.

l

Last Pushed At: The time and date of the most recent push to the subscriber.

l

Last Push Status: The status of the most recent push to the subscriber.
o

Succeeded: the configuration push was successful.

o

Failed: hover over the link to determine the reason for the push failure. An error message is
displayed to help in remediation of the issue. For more information, see "Push Remediation" on
page 134.

o

Unknown: Initial status before the subscriber has received any pushes.

l

Last Compliance Check: The date and time of the most recent compliance check.

l

Compliance: Whether the node is in compliance with the configuration.
o

Compliant indicates the node is in compliance. The values for all settings associated with the
configuration type match the values from the configuration.

o

Non-Compliant indicates the node is out of compliance. One or more values for the settings

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 126 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

associated with the configuration type do not match the values from the configuration. Hover over
No to show the cause of the node’s non-compliance.
o

Unknown indicates either that the node’s compliance could not be determined at the time of the
most recent compliance check, or that the node has not yet undergone a compliance check.

Non-Compliance Reports
You can determine why a compliance status is Non-Compliant.
For a compliance status of Non-Compliant, click the status to display the Configuration Comparison
dialog, which compares all setting values for the configuration on ArcMC and on the managed node.
Click Push Configuration to push the configuration to the managed node in order to make it
Compliant.

Creating a Subscriber Configuration
You can create a subscriber configuration for pushing to any subscribed nodes.
Note: The following subscriber configuration types cannot be created in ArcSight Management
Center, but can only be imported from managed nodes:
l

Logger Storage Group

l

Logger Filter

l

Logger ESM Forwarder, Connector Forwarder, TCP Forwarder, UDP Forwarder

l

Authentication External

For more information on importing a configuration from a managed node, see "Importing a
Subscriber Configuration" on page 129.

To create a configuration:
1. Click Configuration Management > Subscriber Configurations > All Configurations.
Tip: To filter for a specific subscriber configuration type, select the desired configuration type
from the Subscriber Configurations sub-menu.
2. Under Configurations, click New.
3. On the Details tab, select a configuration type from the Configuration Type drop-down list. (Only
the appropriate configuration types are shown in the drop-down list.)
4. In Configuration Name, enter a name for the configuration. (Configuration names must be unique
and may be up to 255 characters in length.)
5. Enter values for any required parameters, which are indicated with a red asterisk (*).

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 127 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

Note: For a description of valid parameters for each configuration type, and the data type
associated with each, see " Subscriber Configuration Types" on page 137.
6. Optionally, add values for any optional parameters.
7. Optionally, to add an additional property for a list configuration: click Add Property, and then
enter values for the prompted parameters. Repeat adding properties as needed to completely
define the configuration.
8. Click Save.

Editing a Subscriber Configuration
You can modify or delete values for a subscriber configuration. (You may not edit a configuration
currently being pushed.)

To edit a configuration:
1. Click Configuration Management > Subscriber Configurations > All Configurations.
Tip: To filter for a specific subscriber configuration type, select the desired configuration type
from the Subscriber Configurations sub-menu.
2. From the Configurations table, click the name of the configuration to be edited.
3. On the Details tab, click Edit.
l Edit the general settings as needed.
l

l

Optionally, to add an additional property for a list property, click Add Property, and then enter
values for the prompted parameters. Repeat adding properties as needed to completely define
the configuration.
Optionally, to delete a property from the configuration, click Delete Property.

4. When complete, click Save. After saving, if the configuration has any subscribers, you are
prompted to push the updated configuration to the subscribers.

Deleting a Subscriber Configuration
A deleted subscriberconfiguration is no longer available for pushes to subscribers. You may not delete a
configuration currently being pushed.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 128 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

To delete a subscriber configuration:
1. Click Configuration Management > Subscriber Configurations > All Configurations.
Tip: To filter for a specific subscriber configuration type, select the desired configuration type
from the Subscriber Configurations sub-menu.
2. From the Configurations table, select one or more configurations to be deleted.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm deletion.

Importing a Subscriber Configuration
A subscriber configuration created on a managed node may be imported into ArcSight Management
Center, for editing and pushing to other nodes of the same type.
For example, you can define a configuration on a managed Connector Appliance, and then import the
configuration into ArcSight Management Center. The imported configuration may then be edited and
pushed to other managed Connector Appliances, just the same as you would with a configuration you
originally created in ArcSight Management Center.
If configuration import to the localhost fails, restart the web service on the localhost.

To import a subscriber configuration from a managed node:
1. Click Configuration Management > Subscriber Configurations > All Configurations.
Tip: To filter for a specific subscriber configuration type, select the desired configuration type
from the Subscriber Configurations sub-menu.
2. Under Configurations, click Import.
3. On the Choose a Node dialog, select the node from which you wish to import the configuration.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 129 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

4. Click Continue.
5. On the Import Configuration dialog:
a. Select a configuration type for the imported configuration from the Type drop-down list. (The
entries in the list depend on the configuration types which apply to the node chosen in Step 3.)
b. In Name, enter a name for the imported configuration.
6. Click Import. The configuration is imported into ArcSight Management Center and is shown in the
Configurations table.
Note: In order to import a backup configuration from a Connector Appliance, Logger, or
ArcMC node, the node must have a scheduled backup to begin with.

Managing Subscribers
A subscriber is a managed node to which a configuration may be pushed. A subscriber to which a
configuration is pushed will receive and process the pushed configuration and apply it to the managed
node, so that the managed node's settings are the same as the settings specified in the configuration.
Each node can subscribe to only one configuration of each configuration type.
For example, a Logger appliance could subscribe to one Logger Storage Group configuration, but the
same appliance could also subscribe to a Logger Filter configuration as well as a Logger Transport
Receiver configuration.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 130 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

Viewing Subscribers
To view subscribers for a configuration:
1. Click Configuration Management > All Configurations.
2. From the list of configurations, locate the configuration for which you wish to view subscribers.
3. Click the name of the configuration.
4. Click the Subscribers tab. The current subscribers are displayed.

Adding a Subscriber
A subscriber (that is, a subscribed node) can receive a pushed configuration.

To subscribe a node to a configuration:
1. Click Configuration Management > Subscriber Configurations > All Configurations.
Tip: To filter for a specific subscriber configuration type, select the desired configuration type
from the Subscriber Configurations sub-menu.
2. From the Configurations table, click the name of the configuration to which you wish to add
subscribers.
3. Click the Subscribers tab.
4. Click Add Subscribers.
5. On the Add Subscribers dialog, select a node to add as a subscriber. The list of potential
subscribers is determined by the selected configuration type. To select multiple nodes for
subscription, Ctrl+Click each node.
Note: A node may only subscribe to one configuration of each type; for example, one DNS
configuration.
If you attempt to add a subscriber which is already subscribed to a configuration of the same
type, the following message is displayed: No available subscribers have been found for the
selected configuration.
6. Click Add Subscribers.
7. Click OK to confirm completion. The subscriber is added to the recipients for the configuration.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 131 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

Unsubscribing a Subscriber
After being unsubscribed, a node can no longer receive a pushed configuration.

To remove a subscriber from a configuration:
1. Click Configuration Management > Subscriber Configurations > All Configurations.
Tip: To filter for a specific subscriber configuration type, select the desired configuration type
from the Subscriber Configurations sub-menu.
2. From the Configurations table, click the name of the configuration from which you wish to remove
subscribers.
3. Click the Subscribers tab.
4. Select one or more subscriber from the list of subscribers.
5. Click Unsubscribe.
6. Click OK to confirm. The selected subscribers are unsubscribed.

Pushing a Subscriber Configuration
A pushed subscriber configuration synchronizes the configuration from ArcSight Management Center
to all or a selection of the configuration’s subscribers. Pushing must be performed manually.
When selecting subscribers, only valid potential subscribers for the configuration are shown. For
example, if pushing a Logger configuration, which only applies to Loggers, only managed Loggers
would be shown as potential subscribers, not Connector Appliances or ArcMCs.
If a configuration push to the localhost fails, restart the web service on the localhost.

To push a subscriber configuration to all subscribers:
1. Select Configuration Management > Subscriber Configurations > All Configurations.
Tip: To filter for a specific subscriber configuration type, select the desired configuration type
from the Subscriber Configurations sub-menu.
2. From the Configurations table, select a configuration to be pushed.
3. Click Push.
4. Click Yes to confirm the push. The configuration is pushed to all subscribers of the selected
configuration. A compliance check is automatically performed on each subscriber.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 132 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

To push a subscriber configuration to selected subscribers:
1. Select Configuration Management > Subscriber Configurations > All Configurations.
Tip: To filter for a specific subscriber configuration type, select the desired configuration type
from the Subscriber Configurations sub-menu.
2. From the Configurations table, select a configuration to be pushed, and click the name of the
configuration.
3. On the Configuration Details and Subscribers page, click the Subscribers tab.
4. On the Subscribers tab, select one or more subscribers to which to push the configuration.
5. Click Push.
6. Click Yes to confirm the push. The configuration is pushed to the selected subscribers. A
compliance check is automatically performed on each recipient.

Push Validation
During a push to subscribers, the configuration is automatically validated by ArcSight Management
Center. Validation ensures that a pushed configuration contains appropriate, meaningful values for all
settings. If any configuration values are found to be invalid, the push will fail, and an error message will
be returned. Hover over the subscriber’s entry on the Subscribers tab, in the Push Status column, to
show the cause of the failed push. In addition, a compliance check is automatically performed after the
push.

Common Causes for Push Failure
A push to a subscriber may fail for any number of reasons. These may include:
l

l

l

l

l

Validation Failure: A push with invalid content will fail. Verify that your configuration includes valid
setting values for the configuration type.
Lack of Connectivity: Network or system issues can cause disrupt connectivity to a subscriber.
Verify connectivity with the subscriber.
Agent Not Running on Host : Verify that the ArcMC Agent process is active on the subscribing
node. (This does not apply to software connectors, which do not require the Agent.)
Privileges on Subscribing Host: In order to push a subscription, the ArcSight Management Center
user (specified by the user credentials) must have privileges to view, edit, or delete configuration
settings on the subscriber nodes.
Expired License: An expired host license will cause a push to the host to fail.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 133 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

Push Remediation
If a push to a subscriber fails, you may be able to remedy the failure. To remedy a failed push, do the
following:
1. Select the configuration from the Configurations table.
2. Click the Subscribers tab and choose the subscriber to which the push failed.
3. The Last Push Status will show Failed. Hover over this link to view the error message associated
with the push failure.
After viewing the error message, you can take the appropriate steps on the managed node to address
the issue. Resolution may require direct or remote access to the node outside of ArcSight Management
Center.
After the issue is resolved, you can retry the failed configuration push.

Checking Subscriber Compliance
A subscribed node is in compliance with a configuration if the settings for the node match those
assigned to the configuration in ArcSight Management Center.
The configuration listed in the managing ArcSight Management Center is considered the baseline copy
of the configuration.
For example, you create an SMTP configuration in ArcSight Management Center named Sample SMTP
Configuration, with these values assigned:
l

Primary SMTP Server: Mailserver1

l

Secondary SMTP Server: Mailserver2

Outgoing Email Address: admin@example.com
A node would be in compliance with this configuration if the values for its primary and secondary SMTP
servers, and outgoing email address, matched the values in Sample SMTP Configuration.
l

If any one of these values were different (for example, if a node had a primary SMTP Server of
CorporateMail1) the node would be out of compliance.
You can manually check the compliance of all subscribers to a configuration.

To manually check subscriber compliance for a configuration:
1. Click Configuration Management > Subscriber Configurations > All Configurations.
Tip: To filter for a specific subscriber configuration type, select the desired configuration type

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 134 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

from the Subscriber Configurations sub-menu.
2. In the Configurations table, select the configuration to be checked for compliance.
3. Click Check Compliance. All subscribers to the selected configuration are checked for compliance.
l

l

On the Configurations table, the Compliance column shows the aggregated compliance of all
subscribers.
On the Subscribers tab for the configuration:
l

The Last Compliance Check column is updated to show the most recent check.
Automatic compliance checks will run every 12 hours. So this will be the date and time of
the latest automatic check.

l

The Compliance column indicates the individual compliance of each node.

Comparing Configurations
You can compare two configurations of the same type to verify whether they contain the same settings.
The following two comparisons are possible:
l

l

Comparing two configurations on a single ArcMC. You can compare two configurations of the
same type on a single ArcMC. For example, you could compare the settings for two different SMTP
configurations.
Comparing the configuration on a subscriber to the same configuration on its managing
ArcMC. You can quickly check to see how the settings for a configuration on a subscribing node
differs from the same configuration on its managing ArcMC.

To compare two configurations of the same type on one ArcMC:
1. Click Configuration Management.
2. Select All Configurations.
3. In the list of configurations, select two configurations.
4. Click Compare.
The Configuration Comparison dialog shows each setting for the configuration and the current value
for each compared item in the Status column.
To print the comparison as a PDF report, click Export to PDF.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 135 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

To compare the configuration on a subscriber to the same configuration on its
managing ArcMC:
1. Click Configuration Management.
2. Select All Configurations.
3. In the configurations list, select the configuration you wish to compare between ArcMC and the
subscriber.
4. Under Configuration Details & Subscribers, click the Subscribers tab.
5. In the Compliance column, click the status link.
The Configuration Comparison dialog shows each setting for the configuration and the current value
for each compared item.
Optionally, if the subscriber is Non-compliant with the configuration on its managing ArcMC, click Push
Configuration to push the configuration to the subscriber (which will make it compliant).
To export the comparison as a PDF report, click Export to PDF.

Configuration Management Best Practices
Configuration management is a powerful tool for managing HPE ArcSight products in bulk. You can
easily implement configurations across multiple appliances with just a few actions.
l

l

Node management versus Configuration Management: Use ArcSight Management Center’s node
management tools for the administration of individual nodes and their day-to-day operations.
However, for consistent and wide-ranging changes to the data or settings of managed nodes, use
configuration management if the appropriate configuration exists. For example, to change DNS
settings across multiple managed nodes, it would be faster and easier to create the configuration in
ArcMC and push it out to managed nodes, than to individually change the settings across multiple
devices.
Implementing data settings across multiple appliances or products in bulk: Use the Bulk
Management (Set Configuration) tools to implement data settings across multiple appliances or
products. For example, you can quickly configure all of your appliances to use the same hardware
settings (such as SMTP server) with a single platform (in this case, SMTP) configuration applied to
managed nodes. (Pushing will overwrite any existing data.)

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 136 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

l

Compliance versus Non-Compliance: If configuration compliance is not relevant to your
configuration management, use the bulk management tools under Node Management to manage
your node settings. A bulk push can also be performed under Configuration Management.

Subscriber Configuration Types
The following section lists the available subscriber configuration types, the parameters associated with
each, their data types, and a brief description of what the parameter represents. When assigning values
to parameters:
l

l

l
l

Each parameter’s value must be of the data type indicated (for example, the String data type
indicates that you must enter a string for the value).
Required parameters are marked with an asterisk (*) and must be assigned a value. A configuration
missing a value for a required parameter cannot be saved or pushed.
Read-only parameters cannot be edited in ArcSight Management Center.
For security reasons, all password parameters are displayed with obfuscation.
Tip: For details of each entry field, in edit mode, hover over the field label and view its descriptive
tooltip.

Connector Configuration Types
Connector configurations set values for settings on containers or software connectors. The available
connector configuration types are listed here.

BlueCoat Connector Configuration
A BlueCoat Connector configuration defines settings for one or more BlueCoat connectors. The
configuration is only pushed to a target if a BlueCoat connector exists.
To push a BlueCoat Connector configuration from ArcMC to a managed node that already has values
defined for all fields listed here, then specify values for all fields in the pushed configuration. Default
values may be used if necessary.
BlueCoat Connector Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data
Type

Description

Row Number*

Integer

Row number of the table parameter to which the configuration is pushed.

Log File Wildcard*

String

Log file wildcard.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 137 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations
BlueCoat Connector Configuration Parameters, continued
Parameter

Data
Type

Description

Log File Type*

String

Log file type. Valid values are:
l

main

l

im

l

ssl

l

streaming

Processing Mode

String

Processing mode. Valid values are Batch and Real time.

Post-Processing
Mode

String

Post-processing mode. Valid values are:

Mode Options

l

String

RenameFileInTheSame
Directory

l

PersistFile

l

DeleteFile

Mode options. Required if Post-Processing Mode is chosen as
RenameFileInTheSame
Directory

Processing
Threshold

Integer

Interval, in hours, after which the log file will be marked as processed.

Processing Limit

Integer

Number of files that can be read in the directory at the same time.

FIPS Configuration
A FIPS configuration enables or disables FIPS mode on a container.
After pushing a FIPS configuration, the destination container will be restarted.
FIPS Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data Type

Description

Enabled*

Boolean

If Yes, FIPS is enabled on the container.

Map File Configuration
A map file configuration defines the path and content of one or more container map files. Each
Path/Content pair represents a single map file. To include multiple files, add multiple Properties to the
configuration.
l

l

When pushed, the configuration deletes all *.properties files in the \map directory on the target,
then adds the list of map files to the target, replacing any existing map files.
If the configuration contains an empty list, all *.properties files are deleted.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 138 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

If importing and uploading a map configuration file, convert the downloaded CSV file into a
.properties file before uploading.
Map File Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data Type

Description

Path*

String

Path to the map file.

Content*

String

Content of the map file.

Parser Override Configuration
A parser override configuration defines the path and content of one or more container parser override
files.
Each Path/Content pair represents a single parser override file. To include multiple files, add multiple
Properties to the configuration.
l

l

When pushed, the configuration deletes all *.properties files in the \fcp directory on the target,
then adds the list of parser override files to the target, replacing any existing parser override files.
If the configuration contains an empty list, all *.properties files are deleted.
Parser Override Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data Type

Description

Path*

String

Path to the parser override file.

Content*

String

Content of the parser file.

Syslog Connector Configuration
A Syslog connector configuration defines values for one or more Syslog connectors. The configuration
is only pushed to the target node if a Syslog connector exists.
Syslog Connector Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data Type

Description

Port*

Integer

Syslog connector port.

Protocol*

Enum

Protocol of the syslog connector (either UDP or Raw TCP).

Windows Unified Connector (WUC) External Parameters Configuration
A WUC External Parameters connector configuration defines the external parameters for one or more
WUC connectors. The configuration is only pushed to the target node if a WUC connector exists.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 139 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

Limitations to WUC External Parameters Configurations
A WUC external parameters configuration has the following limitations:
l

l
l

Domain user password is not supported as a WUC configuration parameter. Instead, domain user
password must be managed individually for each WUC host.
WUC connectors are not FIPS-compliant.
If you wish to push a WUC configuration from ArcMC to a managed node that already has values
defined for all fields listed here, then you must specify values for all fields in the pushed
configuration. Default values may be used if necessary.
WUC External Parameters Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data
Type

Description

Domain Name* String Windows domain name.
Domain User*

String Windows domain user name.

Active
Directory Host

String Hostname for the Active Directory server, if one is used.

Active
Directory Use

String Username for the AD server.

Active
Directory User
Password

String Password for AD server.

Active
Directory Base
DN

String Base DN of the Active Directory.

Active
Directory
Protocol

String Protocol for Active Directory.

Active
Directory Port

String Port for Active Directory.

Global Catalog
Server

String Hostname for the Global Catalog server, if one is used.

Global Catalog
User Name

String Username for the GC server.

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

If specified, values for User, User Password, Base DN, Protocol, and Port must be
specified in subsequent entries.
Required if a value is provided for Active Directory Host.
Required if a value is provided for Active Directory Host.

Required if a value is provided for Active Directory Host.

Required if a value is provided for Active Directory Host.

Required if a value is provided for Active Directory Host.
If specified, values for User Name, User Password, and Base DN must be specified in
subsequent entries.
Required if a value is provided for Global Catalog server.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 140 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

WUC External Parameters Configuration Parameters, continued
Parameter

Data
Type

Description

Global Catalog
User Password

String Password for the GC server.

Global Catalog
Base DN

String Base DN of the GC server.

WEF
Collection*

String Indicates if Windows Event Format collection is enabled. Valid values are:

o

o

Required if a value is provided for Global Catalog server.
Required if a value is provided for Global Catalog server.

o

Disabled

o

Enabled (use Active Directory for sources)

o

Enabled (do not use Active Directory for sources)

Note: WEF collection is only supported for Connector versions 6.0.6 or later. Otherwise,
compliance checks for checks for WUC External Parameters configurations will always fail.

Windows Unified Connector (WUC) Internal Parameters Configuration
A WUC Internal Parameters connector configuration defines the internal parameters for one or more
WUC connectors. The configuration is only pushed to the target if a WUC connector exists.

Limitations to WUC Internal Parameters Configurations
A WUC internal parameters configuration has the following limitations:
l

l
l

Domain user password is not supported as a WUC configuration parameter. Instead, domain user
password must be managed individually for each WUC host.
WUC connectors are not FIPS-compliant.
If you wish to push a WUC configuration from ArcMC to a managed node that already has values
defined for all fields listed here, then you must specify values for all fields in the pushed
configuration. Default values may be used if necessary
WUC Internal Parameters Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data
Type

Enable GUID Translation*

Boolean If true, Globally Unique Identifier translation is enabled.

Enable SID Translation*

Boolean If true, Security Identifier translation is enabled.

Enable SID Translation
Always*

Boolean If true, SID translation is used even for events Windows does not translate.

FCP Version

Integer

File Control Protocol version number.

Global Catalog Port

Integer

Port used by Global Catalog server.

Description

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 141 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

WUC Internal Parameters Configuration Parameters, continued
Data
Type

Description

Global Catalog Security
Protocol

Enum

Security protocol used by Global Catalog server.

Host Browsing Threads
Sleep Time

Integer

Time in milliseconds between host browsing queries.

Inactivity Sleep Time

Integer

Time in milliseconds to sleep if no events are retrieved from the configured
hosts

Log Rotation Check
Interval

Integer

Time in milliseconds to wait before checking for log rotation.

Reconnect Interval

Integer

Time in milliseconds after which the connection to a previously down host is
to be retried.

Rotation Retry Count

Integer

Number of times to check that log has been rotated.

Rotation Retry Interval

Integer

Interval in milliseconds for rotation retry.

Sleep Time

Integer

Time, in milliseconds, to sleep before collecting more events from hosts (-1
means disable sleep time).

Thread Count

Integer

Number of threads to use for the connector.

Parameter

ArcMC/Connector Appliance Configuration Types
ArcMC/Connector Appliance configurations set values for settings on Software ArcSight Management
Centers, ArcSight Management Center Appliances, and hardware or software Connector Appliances.
The currently available ArcMC/Connector Appliance configuration type is listed here.

ArcMC/Connector Appliance Configuration Backup Configuration
An ArcMC/Connector Appliance Configuration Backup configuration sets values for scheduled
configuration backups of ArcSight Management Center or Connector Appliance. Backup content
includes all backup data.
After a push, the web process is automatically restarted on the subscriber.
For this configuration type, no automatic compliance checks will be performed. You must check
compliance manually.
Note: You can neither create nor import settings related to a one-time configuration backup.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 142 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

ArcMC/Connector Appliance Configuration Backup Parameters
Parameters Data Type

Description

Backup
Server IP
Address*

String

IP address of the remote system where the backup will be saved.

Port*

Integer

Port of the remote system. Default value is 22.

Base
Remote
Directory*

String

Destination directory on the remote system. Must be manually created on remote system
prior to push. After a push, the destination host name is appended to this, to give it a
unique value across all nodes.

User*

String

User name on destination.

Password*

String

Password on the destination. (Obfuscated.)

Days of the
Week*

List of
commaseparated
strings

Comma-delimited list of days of the week on which the backup will be performed. Valid
values are Su, M, T, W, Th, F, Sa.

Hours of
Day*

List of
commaseparated
integers

Comma-delimited list of hours of the day at which the backup will be performed. Valid
values are integers from 0 to 23, where 0 is 12:00 midnight. For example, a value of 14
would correspond to 2 PM.

Destination Configuration Types
A destination configuration sets values for ESM destination settings on connectors. The available
destination configuration types are listed here.

Destination Configuration Parameters
A Destination Configuration Parameters configuration defines values and behavior for destination
configuration parameters.
Note: Destination Configuration Parameters configurations can only be imported from managed
connectors, not created in ArcSight Management Center. See "Importing a Subscriber
Configuration" on page 129 for more information.
For a description of the parameters for this configuration type, see "Destination Runtime Parameters "
on page 284.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 143 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

Networks and Zones
A Networks and Zones configuration defines values and behavior for ArcSight ESM networks and
zones. For more information on ESM networks and zones, consult the ArcSight Console
documentation.

Networks and Zones Configuration Parameters
Data
Type

Description

Configuration
Name*

String

Name of the configuration.

Networks
CSV Content*

CSV

Comma-separated Value (CSV) file. Click Upload to upload a valid CSV file, or click
Download to download an existing file.

Parameter

Creating a CSV File
The CSV must include the literal header line:
#Type,Name,Parent Group URI,Customer URI
Then, each line describes a Network. Each line must comprise values for the following
fields, and end with a hard return.
,,,
Zones
CSV Content*

CSV

Comma-separated Value (CSV) file. Click Upload to upload a valid CSV file, or click
Download to download an existing file.
Creating a CSV File
The CSV must include the literal header line:
Name,Start Address,End Address,Parent Group URI,Network URI
Then, each line describes a Zone. Each line must comprise values for the following fields,
and end with a hard return.
,,,,

Logger Configuration Types
Logger configurations set values for settings on hardware and software Loggers. The available Logger
configuration types are listed here.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 144 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

Logger Configuration Backup Configuration
A Logger configuration backup configuration sets values for scheduled configuration backups of
hardware and software Logger to a remote system.
Note: You can neither create nor import settings related to a one-time configuration backup.
Logger Configuration Backup Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data Type

Description

SCP Port*

String

Port of the remote system. Default value is 22.

Backup
String
Server
IP Address*

IP address of the remote system where the backup will be saved.

Username*

String

User name on destination.

Password*

String

Password on destination. (Obfuscated.)

Base
Remote
Directory*

String

Destination directory on the remote system. After a push, the destination host name is
appended to this, to give it a unique value across all nodes.

Days of the List of comma- Comma-delimited list of days of the week on which the backup will be performed. Valid
Week*
separated
values are Su, M, T, W, Th, F, Sa.
strings
Hours of
Day*

List of comma- Comma-delimited list of hours of the day at which the backup will be performed. Valid
separated
values are integers from 0 to 23, where 0 is 12:00. For example, a value of 14 would
integers
correspond to 2 PM.

Backup
Content*

String

Type of content to be included in the backup. Valid values are:
l

All: includes all backup data.

l

Report_Content_Only: includes only report data.

Logger Connector Forwarder Configuration
A Logger Connector Forwarder configuration sets values for one or more connector forwarders on a
Logger (version 6.1 or later). Each forwarder in the configuration is represented by a different Property.
Note: Logger Connector Forwarder configurations can only be imported from managed Loggers,
not created in ArcSight Management Center. See "Importing a Subscriber Configuration" on
page 129 for more information.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 145 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations
Logger Connector Forwarder Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data
Type

Description

Forwarder Name*

String

Display name of the forwarder

Filter Type*

Enum

Filter type that was selected while creating a forwarder on logger. Valid types are
Unified or Regex.

Query

String

Used to filter events that the forwarder will forward.

Unified
Query Filters

String

Select from the default and user-defined Unified filters on the source Logger. Only
visible if Filter Type is Unified.

Regular
Expression Filters

String

Select from the default and user-defined Regex filters on the source Logger. Only
visible if Filter Type is Regex.

Start Time

DateTime Optional start of time range for selection.

End Time

DateTime Optional end of time range for selection.

IP/Host*

String

IP address or host name of the destination that will receive forwarded events.

Port*

Integer

Port number on the destination that will receive forwarded events. Ensure this port is
open on the destination.

Enable*

Boolean

If Yes, the forwarder is enabled.

Connection Retry
Timeout*

Integer

Time, in seconds, to wait before retrying a connection.

Source Type*

Integer

Source Type. Valid values:
l

Apache HTTP Server Access

l

Apache HTTP Server Error

l

IBM DB2 Audit

l

Juniper Steel-Belted Radius

l

Microsoft DHCP Log

l

Other

Logger ESM Forwarder Configuration
A Logger ESM Forwarder configuration sets values for one or more ESM destinations on a Logger
(version 6.1 or later). Each destination in the configuration is represented by a different Property.
Note: Logger ESM Forwarder configurations can only be imported from managed Loggers, not
created in ArcSight Management Center. See "Importing a Subscriber Configuration" on page 129
for more information.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 146 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations
Logger ESM Forwarder Parameters
Data
Type

Parameter

Description

Parameter

Data
Type

Description

Forwarder Name*

String

Display name of the forwarder

Filter Type*

Enum

Filter type that was selected while creating a forwarder on logger. Valid types are
Unified or Regex.

Query

String

Used to filter events that the forwarder will forward.

Unified
Query Filters

String

Select from the default and user-defined Unified filters on the source Logger. Only
visible if Filter Type is Unified.

Regular
Expression Filters

String

Select from the default and user-defined Regex filters on the source Logger. Only
visible if Filter Type is Regex.

Start Time

DateTime Start of time range for selection.

End Time

DateTime End of time range for selection.

IP/Host*

String

IP address or host name of the destination that will receiveforwarded events.

Port*

Integer

Port number on the destination that will receive forwarded events. Ensure this port is
open on the destination.

Enable

Boolean

If Yes, the forwarder is enabled.

Logger Filter Configuration
A Logger Filter configuration sets values for one or more saved searches on a Logger.
Each filter in the configuration is represented by a different Property.
Note: Logger Filter configurations can only be imported from managed Loggers, not created in
ArcSight Management Center. See "Importing a Subscriber Configuration" on page 129 for more
information.
Logger Filter Configuration Parameters
Data
Parameter Type

Description

Filter
Name*

String Name of the filter.
(Readonly)

Filter
Category

String

Category of filter. Valid values are Shared, System and SearchGroup.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 147 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations
Logger Filter Configuration Parameters, continued
Data
Parameter Type

Description

Filter
Type*

String

Type of filter. Valid values are RegexQuery or UnifiedQuery.

Query*

String

Query string.

Permission String
Group

Permission group which with the Logger filter is associated. When the configuration
is pushed:
l

l

If the permission group is not present on the target Logger, the permission group
will be created during the push.
If the permission group of the same name is already present on the target, but
has different rights, the rights of the permission group on the target Logger will
not be overwritten, and the association between the filter and the permission
group will be removed.

Logger SmartMessage Receiver Configuration
A Logger SmartMessage Receiver sets values for one or more for SmartMessage Receivers.
A SmartMessage Receiver configuration pushed to a target overwrites any existing SmartMessage
receivers on the target; other types of receivers such as UDP and TCP are not affected.
Logger SmartMessage Receiver Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data Type

Description

Receiver Name*

String

Name of the receiver.

Enabled*

Boolean

If Yes, SmartMessage reception is enabled.

Encoding*

String

Encoding type. Valid values are:
l

UTF-8

l

US-ASCII

Logger Storage Group Configuration
A Logger Storage Group configuration sets values for one or more Logger storage groups.
Note: Logger Storage Group configurations can only be imported from managed Loggers, not
created in ArcSight Management Center. See "Importing a Subscriber Configuration" on page 129
for more information.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 148 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations
Logger Storage Group Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data Type

Description

Storage Group
Name*

String
(Read-only)

Name of the storage group.
l

l

The pushed configuration must contain the same number of storage groups as
configured on the Logger.
The names of the storage groups in the pushed configuration must match the
names of storage groups on the Logger.

Maximum Age
(Days)*

Integer

Maximum age of events in storage, in days.

Maximum Size
(GB)*

Integer

Maximum size of the storage group, in gigabytes.
l

The cumulative size of all storage groups must not be greater than the storage
volume size on the Logger.

Logger TCP Forwarder Configuration
A Logger Connector Forwarder configuration sets values for one or more TCP forwarders on a Logger
(version 6.1 or later). Each forwarder in the configuration is represented by a different Property.
Note: Logger TCP Forwarder configurations can only be imported from managed Loggers, not
created in ArcSight Management Center. See "Importing a Subscriber Configuration" on page 129
for more information.
Logger TCP Forwarder Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data
Type

Description

Forwarder Name*

String

Display name of the forwarder

Filter Type*

Enum

Filter type that was selected while creating a forwarder on logger. Valid types are
Unified or Regex.

Query

String

Used to filter events that the forwarder will forward.

Unified Query Filters

String

Select from the default and user-defined Unified filters on the source Logger. Only
visible if Filter Type is Unified.

Regular
Expression Filters

String

Select from the default and user-defined Regex filters on the source Logger. Only
visible if Filter Type is Regex.

Start Time

DateTime Optional start of time range for selection.

End Time

DateTime Optional end of time range for selection.

IP/Host*

String

IP address or host name of the destination that will receive forwarded events.

Port*

Integer

Port number on the destination that will receive forwarded events. Ensure this port is
open on the destination.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 149 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations
Logger TCP Forwarder Configuration Parameters, continued
Parameter

Data
Type

Description

Enable*

Boolean

If Yes, the forwarder is enabled.

Preserve System
Timestamp*

Boolean

If Yes, the timestamp showing original event receipt time is preserved.

Preserve Original
Syslog Sender*

Boolean

If Yes, event is sent as is, without without inserting Logger's IP address in the
hostname (or equivalent) field of the syslog event.

Connection Retry
Timeout*

Integer

The time, in seconds, to wait before retrying a connection.

Logger Transport Receiver Configuration
A Logger Transport Receiver configuration sets values for one or more UDP, TCP, CEF UDP, or CEF
TCP receivers.
Note: In Logger documentation, a Transport Receiver is referred to as simply a Receiver.
A pushed Transport Receiver type configuration will overwrite any existing UDP, TCP, CEF UDP, or
CEF TCP receiver. Any other type of receivers, such as SmartMessage receivers, are not affected.
Logger Transport Receiver Configuration Parameters
Data
Type

Description

Receiver
Name*

String

Name of the receiver.

Receiver
Type*

String

Receiver type. Valid values are:

Parameter

Receiver
Name*

String

l

UDP

l

TCP

l

CEF UDP

l

CEF TCP

Name of the receiver.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 150 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations
Logger Transport Receiver Configuration Parameters, continued
Parameter

Data
Type

Port*

Integer

Port number. Must be a non-zero positive number. Ensure this port is open on the
destination.

Enabled*

Boolean

If Yes, transport reception is enabled.

Encoding*

String

Encoding type. Valid values are:

Description

l

UTF-8

l

Shift_JIS

l

EUC-JP

l

EUC-KR

l

US-ASCII

l

GB2312

l

UTF-16BE

l

Big5

l

GB18030

l

ISO-8859-1

l

Windows-1252

For CEF UDP and CEF TCP receivers, only UTF-8 and US-ASCII apply.
Caution: Selection of the wrong encoding for a CEF receiver will cause a push failure.

Logger UDP Forwarder Configuration
A Logger Connector Forwarder configuration sets values for one or UDP forwarders on a Logger. Each
forwarder in the configuration is represented by a different Property.
Note: Logger UDP Forwarder configurations can only be imported from managed Loggers, not
created in ArcSight Management Center. See "Importing a Subscriber Configuration" on page 129
for more information.

Logger UDP Forwarder Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data
Type

Description

Forwarder Name*

String

Display name of the forwarder

Filter Type*

Enum

Filter type that was selected while creating a forwarder on logger. Valid types are
Unified or Regex.

Query

String

Used to filter events that the forwarder will forward.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 151 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations
Logger UDP Forwarder Configuration Parameters, continued
Parameter

Data
Type

Unified Query Filters

String

Select from the default and user-defined Unified filters on the source Logger. Only
visible if Filter Type is Unified.

Regular
Expression Filters

String

Select from the default and user-defined Regex filters on the source Logger. Only
visible if Filter Type is Regex.

Start Time

DateTime Optional start of time range for selection.

End Time

DateTime Optional end of time range for selection.

IP/Host*

String

IP address or host name of the destination that will receive forwarded events.

Port*

Integer

Port number on the destination that will receive forwarded events. Ensure this port is
open on the destination.

Enable*

Boolean

If Yes, the forwarder is enabled.

Preserve System
Timestamp*

Boolean

If Yes, the timestamp showing original event receipt time is preserved.

Preserve Original
Syslog Sender*

Boolean

If Yes, event is sent as is, without without inserting Logger's IP address in the
hostname (or equivalent) field of the syslog event.

Description

System Admin Configuration Types
System Admin configurations set values for system administrative settings. The available System Admin
configuration types are listed here.

Authentication External
An Authentication External configuration defines values and behavior for a hardware or software
system requiring authentication to an external server, such as LDAP or RADIUS.
After changing the Authentication Method on a host, you must delete the host from ArcSight
Management Center, and then re-add it using Node Management.
Note: Authentication External configurations can only be imported from managed Loggers, not
created in ArcSight Management Center. See "Importing a Subscriber Configuration" on page 129
for more information.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 152 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations
Authentication External Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data
Type

Description

Authentication Method*

String

System authentication method.

Allow Local Password Fallback for
Default Admin Only*

Boolean If Yes, the authentication server will fall back to local passwords for
authentication for administrators.

Allow Local Password Fallback for All
Users*

Boolean If Yes, the authentication server will fall back to local passwords for
authentication for all users.

LDAP Server Hostname[port]*

String

LDAP server hostname and port.

LDAP Backup Server Hostname [port] String

LDAP backup server hostname and port.

LDAP Server Request Timeout
(seconds)

Integer

LDAP server request timeout, in seconds.

RADIUS Server Hostname[port]

String

RADIUS server hostname and port.

RADIUS Backup Server Hostname
[port]

String

RADIUS backup server hostname and port

RADIUS Shared Authentication Secret String

RADIUS authentication shared secret.

RADIUS Server NAS IP Address

String

RADIUS server Network Access Server IP address .

RADIUS Request Timeout (seconds)

Integer

RADIUS server request timeout, in seconds.

RADIUS Retry Request

Integer

Number of times to retry RADIUS server requests.

RADIUS Protocol

String

Type of RADIUS protocol.

Authentication Local Password
An Authentication Local Password configuration defines a hardware or software system’s local
password options and behavior.
Authentication Local Password Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data Type

Description

Enable Account Lockout*

Boolean

If Yes, account lockouts are enabled after an incorrect
password entry.

Lock Out Account after N Failed
Attempts*

Integer

Number of failed attempts before lockout.

Remember Failed Attempts For
(seconds)*

Integer

Time, in seconds, between failed attempts that will trigger a
lockout.

Lockout Account for (minutes)*

Integer

Time, in minutes, that the account will be locked out.

Enable Password Expiration*

Boolean

If Yes, password expiration is enabled

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 153 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations
Authentication Local Password Configuration Parameters, continued
Parameter

Data Type

Description

Password Expires in (days)*

Integer

Interval, in days, after which a password expires.

Notify User (Days Before
Expiration)*

Integer

Days before password expiration that the user is notified.

Users Exempted from Password List of commaExpiration Policy
separated strings

Comma-separated list of users whose passwords will never
expire.

Enforce Password Strength*

Boolean

If Yes, password strength is enforced.

Minimum Length (characters)*

Integer

Minimum number of password characters.

Maximum Length (characters)*

Integer

Maximum number of password characters.

Numeric [0-9]*

Integer

Minimum number of numeric password characters.

Upper Case [A-Z]*

Integer

Minimum number of uppercase password characters.

Lower Case [a-z]*

Integer

Minimum number of lowercase password characters

Special [1$^*...]*

Integer

Minimum number of special password characters.

Password Must Be At Least*

Integer

Minimum number of characters a new password must differ
from the user’s previous password.

Include “Forgot Password” link
on Login Screen*

Boolean

If Yes, a link is provided where the user can recover a
password.

Authentication Session
An Authentication Session configuration defines values for a hardware or software system’s
authentication sessions.
Authentication Session Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data
Type

Description

Max Simultaneous Logins Per User*

Integer

Maximum number of simultaneous logins per user.

Logout Inactive Session After
(seconds)*

Integer

Inactivity session timeout, in seconds.

Disable Inactive Account After (days)*

Integer

Number of days of inactivity after which an account will be
disabled.

DNS Configuration
A DNS Configuration defines values for a hardware appliance’s Domain Name Service.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 154 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations
DNS Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data Type

Description

Primary DNS*

String

Primary DNS server.

Secondary DNS

String

Secondary DNS server.

DNS Search Domains

List of comma-separated strings

Comma-separated list of DNS search domains.

FIPS Configuration
A FIPS configuration enables or disables FIPS mode on a managed node.
After pushing a FIPS configuration, the destination node will be restarted.
FIPS Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data Type

Description

Enabled*

Boolean

If Yes, FIPS is enabled on the node.

Network Configuration
A Network Configuration defines values for a hardware appliance’s default gateway setting.
Note: Values for these network settings cannot be changed through ArcSight Management
Center: hostname, IP addresses for the network interfaces, static routes, /etc/hosts file, and time
settings.

Network Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data Type

Description

Default Gateway*

String

Default network gateway.

NTP Configuration
An NTP Configuration defines values for a hardware appliance’s Network Time Protocol.
NTP Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data Type

Description

Enable as NTP
Server*

Boolean

If Yes, the system is enabled as an NTP server.

NTP Servers*

List of comma-separated
strings

Comma-separated list of NTP servers. Required even if Enable as NTP
Server is false.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 155 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

SMTP Configuration
An SMTP Configuration defines values for a hardware or software system’s Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol.
SMTP Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data Type

Description

Primary SMTP Server*

String

Primary SMTP server.

Secondary SMTP Server

String

Secondary SMTP server.

Outgoing Email Address*

String

Outgoing email address.

SNMP Poll Configuration
An SNMP Poll Configuration defines values for a hardware appliance’s Simple Network Management
Protocol monitoring. ArcMC supports V2c and V3 of SNMP.
SNMP Poll Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data Type

Description

Status

Boolean

If Yes, SNMP polling is enabled.

Port*

Integer

SNMP port.

SNMP Version*

String

Version of SNMP supported.Valid values are v2c and v3.

Community String

String

SNMP community string. Required for V2c only.

Username

String

Authentication username.Required for V3 only.

Authentication Protocol*

String

Authentication protocol. Valid values are MD5 and SHA.Required for V3 only.

Authentication Passphrase String

Authentication passphrase.Required for V3 only.

Privacy Protocol

String

Privacy protocol. Valid values are DES and AES128. Required for V3 only.

Privacy Passphrase

String

Privacy passphrase. Required for V3 only.

System Name

String

Name of the SNMP system.

Point of Contact

String

Point of contact.

Location

String

System location.

SNMP Trap Configuration
An SNMP Trap Configuration defines values for a hardware appliance’s Simple Network Management
Protocol notifications. ArcMC supports V2c and V3 of SNMP.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 156 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

In previous versions of ArcMC, an SNMP Trap configuration was known as an
SNMP Configuration.
SNMP Trap Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Data Type

Description

Status

Boolean

If Yes, SNMP polling is enabled.

NMS IP Address

String

IP address of network management server.

Port*

Integer

SNMP port.

SNMP Version*

String

Version of SNMP supported.Valid values are v2c and v3.

Community String

String

SNMP community string. Required for V2c only.

Username

String

Authentication username.Required for V3 only.

Authentication Protocol*

String

Authentication protocol. Valid values are MD5 and SHA. Required for V3 only.

Authentication Passphrase String

Authentication passphrase. Required for V3 only.

Privacy Protocol

String

Privacy protocol. Valid values are DES and AES128. Required for V3 only.

Privacy Passphrase

String

Privacy passphrase. Required for V3 only.

Initial Configuration Management
An initial configuration is intended for the rapid, uniform setup of multiple HPE ArcSight Loggers of
the same model number and software version. Use an initial configuration to expedite the initial
deployment of Loggers to a production environment. Initial configuration management is supported
on Logger version 6.1 or later.
An initial configuration is not created in ArcMC. Instead, a suitable initial configuration is created on a
managed Logger and imported into ArcMC. The configuration may then be pushed to other managed
Loggers of the same model and software version number.
The following attributes are shown for each initial configuration:
Attribute

Description

Imported Init-Config
Name

Name of the imported initial configuration.

Product Type

Type of Logger to which the configuration may be pushed: either Logger (appliance) or
SWLogger (software)

Source Host

IP address of the host from which the configuration was imported.

Imported On

Date of import.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 157 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

Attribute

Description

Imported By

User who imported the configuration.

SW Version

Software version of the configuration.

Source Model

For appliances, the model number of the source host Logger. (For software Logger, this is shown
as Software.)

You can perform the following initial configuration management tasks:
l

Import an Initial Configuration

l

Push an Initial Configuration

l

View the Initial Configuration Event History

l

Delete an Initial Configuration

Importing an Initial Configuration
An initial configuration created on a managed Logger (of version 6.1 or later) may be imported into
ArcSight Management Center, for editing and pushing to other Loggers.
ArcMC can store up to 30 initial configurations.

To import an initial configuration from a Logger of version 6.1 or later:
1. Click Configuration Management > Other Configurations > Logger Configurations.
2. Under Configurations, click Import.
3. On the Import Initial Configuration dialog, in Name, enter a name for the configuration you wish
to import.
4. Under Source Host URI, select the node from which you wish to import the configuration.
5. Click Import. The configuration is imported into ArcSight Management Center and is shown in the
Configurations table.
6. Optionally, if you wish to push the imported configuration to managed nodes, when prompted to
push, click Yes.
An initial configuration is not created in ArcMC. Instead, create the initial configuration on a
managed Logger, and then import it into ArcMC for pushing to other managed Loggers.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 158 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

Pushing an Initial Configuration
You can push an initial configuration to selected managed Loggers of version 6.1 or later. The
destination Loggers must be of the same software version (and, for hardware appliances, model
number) as the Logger on which the initial configuration was created.
The push process overwrites the settings on the destination Loggers.
Pushing an initial configuration must be performed manually.
Before performing a push, ensure that the destination Logger's storage volume is set up, and that it
exceeds that of any source Logger.

To push an initial configuration to one or more managed Loggers of version 6.1 or later:
1. Click Configuration Management > Other Configurations > Logger Configurations.
2. From the Configurations table, select a configuration to be pushed.
3. Click Push.
4. On the Make Selections for Push dialog, under Available Nodes, the nodes eligible for receiving
a push are displayed by location. Browse to the recipient node and click Add. The selected node is
shown under Selected Nodes. (To select multiple nodes to receive a push, Ctrl+click each selected
node.)
5. Click Push.
6. Click Yes to confirm the push and change settings on the destinations. The configuration is
pushed to the selected destination nodes.
In order to correctly view push status, click Refresh, even if the status is shown as In Progress.

Push Results on a Destination Logger
The results of a push of an initial configuration on a given setting of a destination Logger are
dependent on the setting, as shown in the following table.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 159 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

Setting on Destination
l

Archive storage
settings

l

Audit logs

l

ESM destinations

l

Event archives

l

Finished tasks

l

Forwarders

l

Peer Loggers

l

Alerts

l

User-created receivers
(RFSFileReceiver,
FileTransfer,
FolderFollowerReceive
r)

Result After Push
Blank: These settings will be blank on the destination, even if they are included in the
pushed initial configuration. Also, all configurations on the destination Logger related to
these settings will also be blanked.

Disabled: These settings are disabled on the destination Logger, but are editable through
the destination Logger's UI.

l

Hosts file

l

Groups

l

Users

This may include user credentials that the Logger uses to authenticate to ArcMC, which
could break the management link between ArcMC and the destination Logger (which
requires these credentials). If an overwrite of these credentials occurs, to enable
management, delete the host from ArcMC, and then re-add the Logger as a host (with the
new credentials).

l

All other settings

Copied From Source:Values are copied from the initial configuration and overwritten on the
target.

Copied From Source: These values are copied from the initial configuration and
overwritten on the target.

Deleting an Initial Configuration
A deleted initial configuration is no longer available for pushes. You may not delete a configuration
currently being pushed.

To delete an initial configuration:
1. Click Configuration Management > Other Configurations > Logger Configurations.
2. From the Logger Configurations table, select one or more configurations to be deleted.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm deletion.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 160 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

Event History
The Event History list records all imports, pushes, and delete transactions related to initial
configuration pushes. Each event in the history displays the following information:
Column

Description

Init-Config Name

Initial configuration's name.

Author

User who performed the action.

Event Type

Type of event recorded for the initial configuration. Event types include Push, Import, and
Delete.

Event Occurrence

Local date and time of the event.

Source Host

URI of the host on which the initial configuration was created.

Destination URI for
Push

If the event is of type Push, this is the URI of the destination node to which the initial configuration
was pushed.

Event Status

Status of the event. Status types include:
l

In-progress: the transaction is still in progress.

l

Successful: the transaction succeeded.

l

Failed: the transaction failed. Click the failed status to view an indication of the failure reason.

To search for a specific event by any of these criteria, click the drop-down in the corresponding column
header. Then, in Filters, select or enter the specific criterion for which you wish to show events. Only
events matching the filter will be displayed in the Event History list.
For example, to see all pushes, in the Event Type column, click the header drop-down. Then, in Filters,
select Push.

Managing Logger Event Archives
Logger Event Archives enable you to save the events for any day in the past (not including the current
day). In ArcMC, you can view Logger Event Archives on managed Loggers, and perform management
tasks including loading, unloading, and indexing archives.
Logger Event Archive management is only available for managed Loggers of version 6.2 or later.
For complete information on managing Logger Event Archives, see the Logger Administrator's Guide.
The following parameters are shown on the Logger Event Archives list:

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 161 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

Parameter Description
Peers

For Loggers, the number of peers of the Logger. To see the Logger's peers in detail, click the number
shown.

Event
Status

The status of a current archiving job, where status is one of the following values:

Index
Status

l

Loading: The archive is being loaded on the managed Logger.

l

Loaded: The archive is currently loaded on the managed Logger.

l

Unloading: The archiving job is currently executing.

l

Archived: The archiving job is complete.

l

Failed: The archiving job was not successful.

The status of a current indexing job, where status is one of the following values.
l
l

Cancel

None: No indexing status is available.
Pending: The indexing job is about to begin. A pending job can be canceled by clicking in the Cancel
column of the table.

l

Indexing: The indexing job is in process.

l

Indexed: The indexing job is complete.

l

Failed: The indexing job was unsuccessful.

Click the X to cancel a pending indexing job before it begins.

To view Logger event archives:
1. Under Configuration Management, select Other Configurations > Logger Event Archive.
2. On the Event Archive List tab, select the criteria you will use to search for Logger Event Archives
on managed Loggers.
3. Select a Start and End Date, then select one or more Loggers to search.
4. Click Search. All Logger Event Archives matching the search criteria are listed in hierarchical format:
by managed Logger, then by Storage Group, and finally by Event Archive.
To toggle the view open or closed, click Expand or Collapse.

Managing Event Archives
You can perform two management tasks on managed Loggers related to event archives: loading (or
unloading) archives, and indexing them.

To load an event archive:
1. On the Event Archive List, select an archive to load.
2. Click Load Archive. The selected operation will be performed. The status of the job will be shown
in the Event Status column.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 162 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

To index an Event Archive:
1. On the Event Archive List, select an archive to index.
2. Click Index Archive. The selected archive will be indexed. The status of the indexing job will be
shown in the Index Status column.

Viewing Load/Unload History
You can also view your Logger event archive load, unload, and indexing history. This displays the
actions taken in ArcMC to view Logger Event Archives.

To view Logger event archive load/unload history:
1. Under Configuration Management, select Initial Configurations > Logger Event Archive.
2. Click the Archive Load/Unload History tab. The activity history is displayed.

Managing Logger Peers
Managed Loggers can be peered with any number of other Loggers. You can manage the peer
relationship between Loggers in ArcMC. HPE ArcSight recommends that, if possible, all peer Loggers be
managed by ArcMC.
You can view peers; add or remove peers to a Logger; and import, edit, push, and delete peer groups. A
peer group is a named set of Loggers you can use to organize and administer sets of Loggers more
easily.
For more information about Logger peering, please refer to the HPE ArcSight Logger
Administrator's Guide.

Viewing Peers or Peer Groups
You can view the peers of a Logger managed by ArcMC, as long as the Logger is version 6.1 or later.

To view peered Loggers in ArcMC:
1. Select Configuration Management > Manage Logger Peers. The Manage Peer Loggers table is
displayed with all managed Loggers of version 6.1 or later.
2. To view the Loggers peered to a specific Logger in the list , in the Peer Loggers column, click the
link indicating the number of peers. The filterable Peer Loggers dialog lists all the Logger's peers.
3. To view peer groups in ArcMC, click View Peer Groups.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 163 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

Adding or Removing Peers
You can add peers to, or remove peers from, a Logger managed by ArcMC, as long as the managed
Logger is version 6.1 or later.
If you remove a Logger not managed by ArcMC as a peer, you will not be able to add it back to the
group unless you import the peer group including the Logger into ArcMC, or you add the removed
Logger to ArcMC management.

To add peers to, or remove peers from, a Logger:
1. Select the Logger whose peers you wish to edit from the Manage Logger Peers table.
2. Click Edit Peers.
3. All currently peered Loggers are shown.
a. To add one or more peers, click Add Peers. Then, in the Add Peers dialog, select the Loggers
to be added as peers. Optionally, to create a new peer group in ArcMC, in Peer Group Name,
enter a name for the peer group. Then, click Add.
b. To remove one or more Loggers as peers, select the Loggers to remove, and click Remove
Peers. Click Yes to confirm removal as peers.
For this release, Logger peering is supported using user name and password, not authorization
code.

Importing a Peer Group
You can import Logger peer groups into ArcMC. Importing a peer group is only supported on Loggers
of version 6.1 or later.

To import a peer group from a Logger (of version 6.1 or later):
1. Select Configuration Management > Manage Logger Peers.
2. Click View Peer Groups.
3. Click Import Peers.
4. On the Select Peer dialog, select a managed Logger. (The selected Logger will also be part of the
imported peer group.) Then, click Next.
5. On the Select Peer (of the Target) dialog, select one or more peers to import into ArcMC.
6. In Peer Group Name, enter a name for the selected peer group.
7. Click Import. The selected peer group is imported into ArcMC.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 164 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

Edit a Peer Group
You can edit a peer group, including the name, peered Logger hostname, and group members.

To edit a peer group:
1. SelectConfiguration Management > Manage Logger Peers.
2. Click View Peer Groups.
3. Click the name of the peer group you wish to edit.
4. On the Edit Peer Group dialog, edit the peer group as needed. You can edit the peer group name,
and add or remove peers from the group.
5. Click Save. Alternatively, click Save As... to save the peer group under a new name.

Pushing a Peer Group
You can push a peer group to one or multiple managed Loggers of version 6.1 or later. The Loggers in
the group will become peered with the managed Loggers to which you pushed the group.

To push a peer group:
1. Click Configuration Management > Manage Logger Peers.
2. Click View Peer Groups.
3. From the table, select a peer group to push.
4. Click Push.
5. On the Destination Loggers dialog, select one or more destination Loggers to which to push the
peer group.
6. Click Push. The peer group is pushed to the destination Loggers.

Deleting a Peer Group
You can delete a peer group from ArcMC.

To delete a peer group:
1. Click Configuration Management > Manage Logger Peers.
2. Click View Peer Group.
3. From the list of peer groups, select a group to delete.
4. Click OK to confirm deletion.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 165 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

Managing Event Broker
You can use ArcMC to perform management and monitoring of Event Broker. These functions include
adding topics, managing routes, and status monitoring.

About Topics
A topic is a metadata tag that you can apply to events in order to categorize them. Event Broker ships
with several pre-set topics, and you can define any number of additional topics as needed.
A topic includes these components:
l
l

l

Name: The name of the topic.
Partition: A segment of a topic. There can be one or more partitions for each topic. The number of
partitions limits the maximum number of consumers in a consumer group.
Replication Factor: The number of copies of each partition in a topic. Each replica is created across
one Event Broker node. For example, a topic with a replication factor of 3 would have 3 copies of each
of its partitions, across 3 Event Broker nodes.

You can currently only use ArcMC to add topics, not edit or delete them.
For more information on managing topic partitions and replication, see the Event Broker
Administrator's Guide.

Adding a Topic
To add a topic:
1. Click Configuration Management > > Other Configurations > Manage Event Broker.
2. On the Event Broker Configurations page, click Add Topic.
3. On the Add New Topic dialog, inTopic Name, enter a name for the new topic.
4. In # of Partitions, enter the number of partitions the topic will have.
5. In Replication Factor, enter the number of copies that will be made for each partition.
6. Click Save.
Best Practice: When creating a topic, use a value for replication factor of at least 2. In addition, the
number of partitions should be equal to the number of consumers which will be subscribed to the
topic (now and in future). If Vertica will be a consumer, the number of partitions should be a
multiple of the number of Vertica nodes.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 166 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

About Routes
A route is a method of retrieving events in a topic that meet certain criteria and then copying them into
a new topic. Use routes to filter events into your topics for your own requirements, such as selecting a
group of events for more detailed examination.
A route comprises these components:
l
l

l
l

Name: Name of the route.
Routing Rule: A logical filter that defines criteria by which events will be categorized into topics. The
criteria are defined in terms of CEF fields.
Source Topic: The topic being filtered for events which match the routing rule.
Destination Topic: The topic to which a copy of an event matching the routing rule should be
copied. (A copy of the event will remain in the source topic.)

Description: A short description of the route.
You can add, edit, or delete routes in ArcMC. Routes only apply to CEF topics. Routes created to or
from a binary topic (such as eb-esm) will not function.
l

Creating a Route
Before creating a route, ensure that your source and destination topics already exist. If not, create them
before creating a route that uses them.

To create a route:
1. Click Configuration Management > Other Configurations > Manage Event Broker.
2. On the Event Broker Configurations page, click Add.
3. In Route Name, enter a name for the route.
4. From the Source Topic drop-down list, select the topic from which events will be filtered.
5. From the Destination Topic drop-down list, select the destination to which events will be copied.
6. In Description, enter a short description of the route.
7. Under Add Routing Rule, use the Rule Editor to define the criteria for the routing rule.
l

l

Define a criterion by using the drop-downs to select a Field, Operator, and Value as a filter. Fields
are taken from the Event Broker SuperSchema, which are described in detail in "SuperSchema" on
page 307.
Click + to add a new conjunction (& AND, || OR), or the right arrow to add a dependent conjunction.
Then define any new required criteria as needed.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 167 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

l

l

l

You can create nested conjunctions by clicking the right arrow at the same level as the current
conjunction.

To change a conjunction, right-click the conjunction and select your choice from the drop-down
menu.
To delete a conjunction, right-click the conjunction and pick Delete. Note that deleting a conjunction
will delete all the criteria associated with the deleted conjunction.

The rule is shown in the rule field as you construct it. When the rule is complete, click Save.

Editing a Route
To edit a route:
1. Click Configuration Management > > Other Configurations > Manage Event Broker.
2. On the Event Broker Configurations page, select the route to edit, and then click Edit.
3. Edit the route as needed, and then click Save.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 168 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 6: Managing Configurations

Deleting a Route
To delete a route:
1. Click Configuration Management > > Other Configurations > Manage Event Broker.
2. On the Event Broker Configurations page, select one or more routes to delete, and then
click Delete.
3. Click Yes to confirm deletion.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 169 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 7: Managing Users on Managed Products

Chapter 7: Managing Users on Managed
Products
The following topics are discussed here.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Overview
Users and User Lists
Permission Groups
Roles
Node Lists
Associations
Compliance Report

170
171
173
175
176
177
179

Overview
Role-based access control (RBAC) user management enables you to manage product user access with
custom roles across specified nodes.
Previous versions of ArcMC included user management across nodes as part of Configuration
Management (where user information was defined in a Users configuration). In ArcMC 2.1, user
management across nodes is now a separate, greatly improved RBAC (role-based access control)
functionality.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 170 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 7: Managing Users on Managed Products

User Management Workflow

User management in ArcSight Management Center follows this workflow:
1. Create users in ArcSight Management Center, or import them from managed nodes.
2. Optionally, group users into user lists for ease of organization and management.
3. Create (or import) permission groups to enable administrative privileges.
4. Create roles by assigning permission groups to grant functional access to products.
5. Optionally, create node lists to ease the organization of sets of nodes.
6. Create associations to associate users (or user lists), nodes (or node lists), and roles.
7. Push associations to nodes to enable access for users included in the association, with privileges
appropriate for the role and access only to the desired nodes.
8. Check compliance of users on managed nodes with the managing ArcMC.

Users and User Lists
A user is defined by a set of values for an individual's credentials and other identifiers, such as first and
last name, email, and phone number. On nodes managed by ArcMC, users of those nodes and their
permissions can be managed entirely by ArcMC.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 171 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 7: Managing Users on Managed Products
Users can be grouped into named user lists, which can also be assigned access rights in the same way as
individual users.
You can also import users from managed nodes.
Users are defined by these parameters:
Parameter

Description

User Name*

Name used for login credentials.

First Name*

User's first name.

Last Name*

User's last name.

Distinguished User's distinguished directory name, if any.
Name
Email*

User email address. Users pushed to nodes as part of an association will receive email confirmation of
their new access to nodes at this address, along with a randomly generated password. (Please verify
that this is the correct email address. Once pushed, the password will not be resent to a corrected
email address.)
Note: To ensure email alerts are sent, enable SMTP services and then restart the web services.

Title

User's job title.

Department

Department of employment.

Phone

Phone number for the user.

Notes

Relevant notes on the user.

To create a user:
1. Click User Management > Users and User Lists.
2. Click New User.
3. Enter values for the user details.
4. Click Save.
To import users from a managed node:
1. Click User Management > Users and User Lists.
2. Click Import User.
3. On the node list, select the node from which you will import users.
4. On the Import Users page, use the arrow keys to move selected users from the Available Users
list to the Selected Users list.
5. Click Import. The selected users are imported into ArcMC.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 172 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 7: Managing Users on Managed Products

To create a user list:
1. Click User Management > Users and User Lists.
2. Click New User List.
3. In User List Name, enter a name for the user list.
4. The Selected Users column shows all users currently selected for the users list. Use the directional
arrows to add to, or remove from the Available Users list to the Selected Users list.
5. Click Save.

To edit a user or user list:
1. Click User Management > Users and User Lists.
2. On the Users and User Lists page, click the name of the user or user group you wish to edit.
3. Edit the user or user list as needed, and then click Save. Click Save As to save an edited user list
under a new name.

To delete users or user lists:
Use caution when deleting users. Deleting a user on ArcMC will delete the user from all nodes where the
user was pushed as part of an association.
In order to delete a user, any nodes on which the user is present must be able to communicate with
ArcMC.
You can only delete a user list if it is not part of any association. To delete a user list that is part of
an association, delete the association first.
1. Click User Management > Users and User Lists.
2. On the Users and User Lists page, select the users or user lists you wish to delete.
3. On the toolbar, click Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm deletion.
For information on how to assign users to roles, see "Roles" on page 175.

Permission Groups
A permission group is a set of access privileges. Access privileges are organized functionally, enabling
you to assign different functions or different product access across users.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 173 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 7: Managing Users on Managed Products
Permission groups are the building blocks of roles. In themselves, permission groups do not enable
access for any users. Permission groups can be bundled into roles, and when users are assigned to
those roles, they will gain the privileges which the individual permission groups grant them.
Permission groups can be created, imported from managed nodes, edited, and deleted in ArcMC.
You can create permission groups of the following types in ArcMC.
Group Type

Grants access to...

System Admin

System admin and platform settings.

Logger Rights

Logger general functionality. Does not include Logger Reports and Logger Search permissions.

Logger Reports

Logger report functionality.

Logger Search

Logger search functionality.

Conapp Rights

Connector Appliance general functionality.

ArcMC Rights

ArcSight Management Center general functionality.
Note that ArcMC rights View options and Edit, save and remove options can only be granted to
groups with either View management or Edit, save, and remove management rights.

You can create different permission groups to reflect different management access levels. For example,
you could create two System Admin permissions groups, one with access to reboot and update
privileges, and the other with access to global settings. However, a role can only be assigned one
permission group per group type.

To create a permission group:
1. Select User Management > Permission Groups.
2. On the Permission Groups page, click New.
3. In Group Name, enter a name for the new group.
4. Select a type from the Group Type drop-down list.
5. In Description, enter a brief description of the permission group.
6. In the Rights list, select the rights to which the permission group controls. (Click Select All to select
all rights in the list.)
7. Click Save.

To import one or permission groups from a managed node:
1. Select User Management > Permission Groups.
2. On the Permission Groups page, click Import.
3. From the list of managed nodes, select the node from which to import a group, and then click Next.
4. The Available Permission Group(s) column shows available permission groups on the managed
node. Select one or more groups, and then use the Add button to move them to the Selected

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 174 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 7: Managing Users on Managed Products

Permission Group(s) column.( Note that permission groups already present in ArcMC will be
shown as disab led and unavailable for selection.)
5. Click Import. The groups are imported into ArcMC.

To edit a permission group:
1. Select User Management > Permission Groups.
2. From the list of groups, click the name of the group you wish to edit.
3. Enter values or select rights as needed.
4. Click Save. (Click Save As to save the group under a new name.)

To delete a permission group:
You can only delete a permission group that is not currently assigned to any roles, nor is part of any
Filter configuration.
To delete a permission group that is part of a role, delete the role first.
To delete a permission group that is part of a Filter configuration, remove it from the configuration.
1. Select User Management > Permission Groups.
2. From the list of groups, select the group you wish to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm deletion.

Roles

A role is a bundled set of permission groups. By assigning a role to an association, you grant all
privileges enabled by the role's component permission groups to all of the users or user lists in the
association.
You can create and delete roles in ArcMC.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 175 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 7: Managing Users on Managed Products

To create a role:
Prior to creating a role, create any permission groups it will include.
1. Select User Management > Roles.
2. Click New.
3. In Role Name, enter a name for the role.
4. In the Available Permission Group(s) column, select one or more permission groups. Use the
Add button to move selected permission groups from the Available Groups column to the
Selected Permission Group(s) column.
5. Click Save.

To delete one or more roles:
Before deleting a role, edit any associations of which it is a part to remove the role from each
association.
1. Select User Management > Roles.
2. From the list of roles, select one or more roles to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm deletion.
For information on assigning associations to roles, see "Associations" on the next page.

Node Lists

A node list is a named set of managed nodes. Using node lists allows you to organize nodes for the
purpose of managing users of those nodes in a group.
All nodes in a node list included in an association will receive pushes of the association from ArcMC.
An association is pushed only to nodes (or node lists) which it includes. To push an association to a
particular node, make sure the node is included in the association, either directly or as part of a
node list.
You can create, edit, and delete node lists.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 176 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 7: Managing Users on Managed Products

To create a node list:
1. Click User Management > Node Lists.
2. Click New.
3. In the Available Nodes column, select multiple nodes or node lists to include. Use the Add button
to move the selections to the Selected Nodes column.
4. Click Save.

To edit a node list:
1. Click User Management > Node Lists.
2. Select a node list to be edited.
3. Edit the node list as needed.
4. Click Save. (Click Save As to save the node list under a new name.)

To delete one or more node lists:
You can only delete a node list if it is not assigned to any associations. To delete a node list that is
part of an association, first remove it from the association or delete the association.
1. Click User Management > Node Lists.
2. From the list of node lists, select one or more node lists to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm deletion.

Associations
An association is a bundled group of users (or user lists), along with any number of non-overlapping
roles, and any number of nodes (or node lists). Associations are managed in ArcMC and then pushed to
managed nodes, in order to grant permissions to users of those nodes.
You can create associations, push them to included nodes, and delete associations.

To create an association:
Prior to creating an association, create all users (or user lists), node lists, and roles to be included in
the association.
1. Click User Management > Associations.
2. Click New.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 177 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 7: Managing Users on Managed Products

3. In Association Name, enter a name for the new association.
4. In the Available Users and User Lists column, select multiple users or user lists to include. Use
the Add button to move the selections to the Selected Users and User Lists column.
5. Click Next.
6. On the Assign Roles page, in the Available Roles column, select one or more roles to include. Use
the Add button to move the selections to the Selected Roles column.
7. Roles in an association may not overlap in terms of product type.
8. Click Next.
9. In the Available Nodes and Node Lists column, select multiple nodes or node lists to include. Use
the Add button to move the selections to the Selected Nodes and Node Lists column.
10. Click Check Conflicts. A conflict is returned if the permissions assigned in the association conflict
with any other association that also assigned the same permission groups types. For example, if an
existing association assigns read/write access to User A, and your newly-created new association
assigns read-only rights to User A, then a conflict would be returned.
l

If a conflict was found in the association, edit the association to correct the conflict shown.

l

If no conflict was found, click Yes to push the new association to all nodes included in the association.

To push an association to its included nodes:
1. Click User Management > Associations.
2. Click the name of the association you wish to push.
3. Click Push. The association is pushed to its included nodes.
An association is pushed only to nodes (or node lists) that it includes. To push an association to a
particular node, make sure the node is included in the association, either directly or through a node
list.

To edit an association:
1. Click User Management > Associations.
2. Click the name of the association you wish to edit.
3. Edit the components of the association as needed.
4. Click Save.

To delete one or more associations:
1. Select User Management > Associations.
2. From the list of associations, select one or more associations to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm deletion.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 178 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 7: Managing Users on Managed Products

Compliance Report
The Compliance Report verifies and displays the compliance status of users on a managing ArcMC with
the same users on managed nodes, to which associations including those nodes have been pushed.
Compliance status includes permissions, names, and other user data.

To run the Compliance Report:
1. Click User Management > Compliance Report. The report displays compliance information.
The User Info in Managing ArcMC column displays users (or user groups) currently listed on each
managing ArcMC in associations which have been pushed to nodes.
l

l

l
l

l

Click the arrow to expand the column and view the permission groups for each user or user group in
detail.
Click the user name or user group name to view the current permission groups assigned to each user
or user group.
User N/A indicates that a user is present on the managed node but not on the managing ArcMC
Permission Group N/A indicates that user or user group currently has permissions on the Managed
Node that are not assigned to the destination.
Users not in associations which have been pushed to nodes are not shown.

The User Info on Managed Node column displays the users, user groups, or permission groups
currently listed on the managed node being compared.
The Compliance column indicates the compliance of the user on the managed node to the user on the
managing ArcMC. A status of Compliant indicates that all user values match; Non-Compliant means one
or more values do not match or are missing.
Click the compliance status for a detailed view of each user value.
Matches

Indicates that the value on the managed node matches the value on the managing ArcMC.

Does Not Match

Indicates a discrepancy between the value on the managed node and the managing ArcMC.

Missing Value(s)

The value or values are missing and cannot be compared.

Use the column headers to sort the tabular results across columns.
To export the compliance report results to PDF, click Export to PDF.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 179 of 316

Chapter 8: Dashboard
The following topics are discussed here.

•
•
•
•

Overview
ArcSight Management Center Dashboard
Monitoring Rules
Topology View

180
180
184
194

Overview
Using ArcSight Management Center, you can monitor the health status of all managed nodes. You can
also configure warnings and alerts for issues of importance to you.
Note: In order for products to be monitored, they must be added as nodes to ArcSight
Management Center. For more information on managing nodes, see "Managing Nodes" on page 40.
Monitoring is displayed on the Dashboard > Monitoring Summary page. ArcSight Management
Center automatically monitors all managed nodes.
You can also configure notifications (email, SNMP, and through audit forwarding) about the status of
managed nodes.

ArcSight Management Center Dashboard
ArcSight Management Center monitoring, on the Dashboard > Monitoring Summary page, displays
the current health status of all managed nodes, both software and hardware.
l

l

Monitored metrics for software nodes (such as Software Connector Appliance) include such software
parameters as CPU usage, event flow, and disk usage statistics.
Monitored metrics for hardware appliances (such as Logger Appliance) include both software as well
as hardware-related attributes, such as remaining disk space and hardware status.

The Monitoring Summary
The Monitoring Summary includes a variety of panels that display monitoring information on the health
and status of your managed products.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 180 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 8: Dashboard
To view the monitoring summary, click Dashboard > Monitoring Summary.

Total Number of Nodes
Each tile in the Total Number of Nodes panel displays the count of managed nodes in your ADP
environment of the specified type. These types are defined as follows.
Tile

Count

Devices

Devices which are forwarding events.

ArcMC/CHA Includes managed ArcMCs and Connector Hosting Appliances, in both hardware and software form
factors.
Connectors

Managed connectors.

Loggers

Managed Loggers (hardware and software form factors).

Nodes

Nodes on the managed Event Broker. (Note that if Event Broker is upgraded, the Monitoring Summary will
not reflect the correct Event Broker information until you import the new Event Broker certificate into
ArcMC. See "Downloading and Importing Host Certificates" on page 68 for more information.)

To see the details of a node type, click the tile corresponding to the node type. For example, to view the
details of all connectors, click Connectors.

Devices by Device Product
The Devices by Device Product display shows a color-coded sunburst of the various device types in
use across your network. The table shows the total number of active and inactive devices by device
product.
The inner ring of the sunburst shows the total devices.
The outer ring of the sunburst shows the total number of product types.
For clarity, if the number of product types exceeds 1000, the outer ring is not shown.
To see the details of a device type, click the corresponding tile in the wheel, or its entry in the table. The
detail view has the following settings:
l

l

l

Device Product Time-out Interval: If the device does not receive an update during this time period,
it will be flagged as inactive and shown in red.
Device Age-out Interval: If all devices of the device’s product type are Inactive following this
interval, the product type and all associated devices will be removed from the Topology and
Summary views.
Disable Device Tracking: If selected, after the Device Product Time-Out Interval has elapsed, device
tracking for the product type will be stopped and the devices associated with the product type will be
flagged as inactive.

To change these settings, edit as needed, and then click Save.
HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 181 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 8: Dashboard

License Usage Chart
If your ArcMC is enabled as a License Server, the Daily Usage bar chart displays the overall ADP license
consumption on a daily basis. The daily license usage is calculated from the managed ADP connectors
(version of 7.3.0 or later) and managed ADP loggers based on the following:
l

l

If an ADP Connector is managed by ArcMC, then ArcMC will include its event ingestion from all nonADP or non-managed source devices in the ADP daily license usage calculation. If a source is also a
managed ADP component, the event flow from this source to the managed ADP Connector will not
be tracked.
If an ADP Logger is managed by ArcMC, then ArcMC will include its event ingestion from all nonADP or non-managed source devices in the ADP daily license usage calculation. If a source is also a
managed ADP component, the event flow from this source to the managed ADP Logger will not be
tracked.

ArcMC collects the daily ingestion information from each ADP Connector and each ADP Logger daily.
ADP Connectors and Loggers give an accumulated ingestion total when not reachable to ArcMC at the
time of ingestion collection (daily at 1:00:00 ArcMC local time by default). This scenario could be caused
by any of the following:
l

The ADP Connector or Logger was down.

l

The ADP Connector or Logger’s server certificate has changed.

l

The ADP Connector or Logger was not managed by the ArcMC.

Daily ADP ingestion collection only applies to License Server ArcMCs and ArcMCs that are managed by
the License Server.
The ingestion report on an individual ADP Logger includes its previous day’s ingestion during the time
window of [00:00:00 – 23:59:59] GMT. On the other hand, for ADP license usage calculation, ArcMC
collects the previous ADP Logger’s ingestion during the time window of [01:00:00 – 24:59:59] ArcMC
local time. Since the time window used for individual Logger ingestion tracking and ADP ingestion
calculation are different. Hence, it is not recommended to compare these two reports because they will
report different numbers.

Drilling Down
You can view the details of problematic nodes, and then take action to rectify any issues.

To view all details of a problematic node, select it in the upper table. The lower table
shows issues associated with that node. Each issue is shown with these identifiers:
l

Metric Type: Metric assigned to the issue.

l

Metric Name: Name of the metric.

l

First Occurrence: Local time of the issue's first occurrence.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 182 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 8: Dashboard

l

Last Occurrence: Local time of the issue's last occurrence.

l

Severity: Issue severity.

l

Description: Brief description of the issue.

To view details of nodes by severity:
1. On the menu bar, click Dashboard > Monitoring Summary.
2. Click the ring meter corresponding to any of the monitored product types, in the portion of the
meter corresponding to the severity you wish to view. (For example, to view all nodes currently with
Warning status, click the Warning, or yellow, part of the ring.) The corresponding Severity Issue
Summary is displayed.
3. On the Severity Issue Summary page:
The upper table shows a list of all problematic nodes, with the following identifiers:
l

Name: Node name.

l

Path: Path to the node.

l

Type: Type of node.

l

l

Lead/Breach: Short summary of the most severe issue reported by the node. The node may be
experiencing less severe issues as well.
To view further health details of a problematic node, including history and status, click Details.
The data tables show the parameters of the selected node.

Data Charts
Each data chart represents values of the parameter over time. Use the drop-down list to change the
interval shown from the last 4 hours, the last day, or the last week. Data charts can include any of
the metrics shown under the Valid Values for Metric Types table.
Click the data legend to toggle display of the corresponding line from the chart. Hiding some lines
may be helpful to clarify a chart with many lines.

ADP Licensed Usage for the Last 30 Days
Your ADP license entitles you to a specified number of managed products and amount of managed
traffic. The ADP Licensed Usage for the Last 30 Days panel shows your ADP data usage for the
previous month.
The graph shows all traffic in your ADP environment. The default color is green, which indicates that
data usage is within your licensed limit.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 183 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 8: Dashboard

l

Amber indicates periods when your data usage approached your licensed traffic limit.

l

Red indicates periods when your data usage exceeded your licensed traffic limit.

The Active Loggers indicates the number of ADP Loggers the data from which contributes to the
license monitoring report. For more details, you can export the license report to PDF format, which
includes data on the last 365 days.

To enable the display of ADP licensed usage:
1. Enable ArcMC as an ADP license server. In the ArcMC toolbar, click ADP License Server, then click
Yes.
2. Upload a valid capacity license to the ArcMC on the License and Upgrade page.

To export the license report to PDF format:
1. Click Export License Report.
2. The PDF is downloaded to your local system.

Monitoring Rules
Monitoring rules are defined to generate monitoring warnings for each managed product type. ArcMC
includes many preset monitoring rules for your use. You can use these rules as written, or customize
them for your own use. In addition, you can create your own custom monitoring rules.
A monitoring rule comprises a set of logical, performance, health, or other criteria. All criteria in the rule
are evaluated together to determine the rule’s total effect, which generates an alert from ArcMC.
For example, a rule could check for the number of input events per second (criterion #1) that reach a
certain type of device (criterion #2). Should this number exceed (criterion #3) a specified level (criterion
#4), then a warning (alert) should be returned.
Alerts can be delivered by email or by SNMP, or can be recorded in audit logs.
If email notifications are configured, even with no monitoring rules defined, automatic email alerts
are sent indicating when a managed node has gone down or is not reachable. Email alerts are also
sent when a down or unreachable node comes back up or becomes reachable again.
For more information on managing and creating rules, see "Managing Rules" on the next page.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 184 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 8: Dashboard

Preset Rules
ArcSight Management Center includes preset rules to assist in monitoring. You can use these preset
rules as written or customize them as needed for your own use. You can also create custom rules of
your own.
By default, ArcMC preset rules are disabled. You must enable a preset rule in order for it to apply and
trigger alerts.
For customers with previous versions of ArcMC and who already have a list of existing rules, preset
rules included in ArcMC are appended to your existing rules.

To review preset rules:
1. Click Dashboard > Rules. The Monitoring Rules summary is shown.
2. To view a rule's settings in detail, in the Name column, click the rule name.
3. To enable a disabled preset rule, under Status, select Enable, and then click Save.

Managing Rules
To create a custom rule:
1. Click Dashboard > Rules.
2. In the toolbar, click New.
3. Select values for the rule parameters.
4. Click Save.

To edit an existing rule:
1. Click Dashboard > Rules.
2. Under Monitoring Rules, locate the rule you wish to edit.
3. In the Name column, click the rule name.
4. Select new values for the rule parameters, as needed.
5. Click Save. Alternatively, click Save As to save the edited rule with a new name.

To enable (or disable) a rule:
1. Click Dashboard > Rules.
2. In the management panel, under Monitoring Rules, select the rule to enable or disable.
HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 185 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 8: Dashboard

3. In the Name column, click the rule name.
4. Under Status, toggle the status to Enable (or Disable).
5. Click Save.

To delete a rule:
1. Click Dashboard > Rules.
2. Under Monitoring Rules, select the rule you wish to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK to confirm deletion.

To export all rules to a text file:
1. Click Dashboard > Rules.
2. In the toolbar, click Export. Your rules are exported to a local text file called monitor_breach_
rules.properties. and downloaded locally.

Monitoring Rules Parameters
Monitoring rules are defined by rule parameters. The following table describes monitoring rules
parameters and their valid values.
Monitoring Rules Parameters
Parameter

Description

Name

Name of the rule. (Max. length 50 characters)

Metric Type

Criterion being measured. For valid values of Metric Type, see the Valid Values for Metric
Type table, below. Each metric type has a Value Type constraining the kind of value which
may be assigned to it.

Product Type(s)

Managed product type (or types) to which the rule applies. These are automatically selected
based on the Metric Type.
For example, if you selected a metric type that applied only to hardware, such as Voltage, only
products with hardware form factors would be available for selection.
You can also deselect types to which to apply the rule, as applicable.

Specific Node Selector

Click View/Choose, and then select one or more specific nodes to which the rule applies. If
none are chosen, then the rule applies to all nodes of the selected Product Types.

Severity

Breach severity. Valid values are Healthy, Warning, Critical and Fatal. Thresholds for each of
these values are defined by the administrator.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 186 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 8: Dashboard
Monitoring Rules Parameters, continued
Parameter

Description

Aggregation

Aggregation function applied to Metric Type data points. Valid values:

Measurement

Value

l

ANY: any value

l

AVG: average value (numeric values only)

l

MIN: minimum value (numeric values only)

l

MAX: maximum value (numeric values only)

A comparison between two criteria. Valid values:
l

GREATER: One field is greater than the other

l

LESS: One field is less than the other

l

EQUAL: One field is equal to the other

l

NOT_EQUAL: Two fields are unequal

Threshold value for comparison. Valid values are dependent on Metric Type.
l

Percentage: Number from 1-100 (with no %-sign).

l

Numeric: Numeric string.

l

Boolean: true/false (case-insensitive)

l

Literal Status: Status of the appliance component, and can be one of the following values: Ok,
Degraded, Rebuilding, Failed, Unavailable.

Notify Me

Select one or more notification mechanisms for alerts about the rule (Email, SNMP, or Audit
Forwarding).

Status

If Enabled, the rule will apply and produce alerts, as specified in Notify Me. (ArcMC rule
presets are Disabled by default.)

Time Range

Evaluation interval, in hours and minutes. The total of hours and minutes should not exceed
168 hours (7 days).

Description

Brief description of the rule. (Max. length 300 characters.)

Note: Compound rules (AND/OR) are not supported.

Valid Values for Metric Type
Value

Description

Value
Type

For Connector Appliances or Loggers only
CPU Usage

CPU usage, as a percentage.

Percentage

JVM Memory

Memory of Java Virtual Machine.

Numeric

Disk Read

Number of reads of the disk.

Numeric

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 187 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 8: Dashboard
Valid Values for Metric Type, continued
Value

Description

Value
Type

Disk Write

Number of writes to the disk.

Numeric

Network Received

Network traffic received, in MB/sec.

Numeric

Network Sent

Network traffic sent, in MB/sec.

Numeric

All EPS In

Total Events Per Second in.

Numeric

All EPS Out

Total Events Per Second out.

Numeric

EPS In

Events Per Second (EPS) in.

Numeric

EPS Out

Events Per Second (EPS) out.

Numeric

Events Processed

Number of events processed.

Numeric

Events Processed
(SLC)

Events processed (Since Last Checked).

Numeric

Events Per Second

Events per second.

Numeric

FIPS Enabled

1= FIPS enabled, 0=FIPS disabled.

Boolean

Command
Responses
Processed

Number of command responses processed.

Numeric

Queue Drop Count

Queue drop count.

Numeric

Queue Rate (SLC)

Queue rate (Since Last Checked).

Numeric

Active Thread
Count

Active thread count.

Numeric

For Connectors only

For hardware form factor products only
Fan

Hardware fan status.

Literal
Status

Disk Space

Hardware disk space status.

Literal
Status

Voltage

Hardware voltage status.

Literal
Status

Current

Hardware current status.

Literal
Status

Temperature

Hardware temperature status.

Literal
Status

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 188 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 8: Dashboard
Valid Values for Metric Type, continued
Value
Type

Value

Description

Power Supply

Hardware power supply status.

Literal
Status

RAID Controller

RAID controller status.

Literal
Status

RAID Battery

RAID battery status.

Literal
Status

Hard Drive

Hard drive status.

Literal
Status

Storage Group
Usage

Current storage group usage, in bytes.

Numeric

Storage Group
Capacity

Current storage group capacity, in bytes.

Numeric

For Loggers Only

For Event Brokers Only
Event Broker All
Bytes In

All bytes received by the Event Broker cluster.

Numeric

Event Broker All
Bytes Out

All bytes transmitted by the Event Broker cluster. Note that due to the replication of
each topic, Bytes Out will always exceed Bytes In.

Numeric

Event Broker Disk
Usage

Disk usage of Event Broker's individual nodes.

Numeric

Event
Broker Memory
Usage

Memory usage of Event Broker's individual nodes.

Numeric

Event Broker
SP EPS

Count of events per second received by Event Broker's Stream Processor.

Numeric

Event Broker Error Count of events per second wating to be processed received by Event Broker's
Stream Processor which produced an error.

Numeric

Event Broker Lag

Count of events per second waiting to be received by Event Broker's
Stream Processor.

Numeric

Event Broker
CPU Usage

CPU usage of the Event Broker's individual nodes.

Numeric

Event Broker
EPS In

Events per Second received by the Event Broker cluster.

Numeric

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 189 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 8: Dashboard

Rule Verification
It is possible to create syntactically valid rules that return confusing or meaningless alerts. For example,
you could create a syntactically valid rule to trigger an alert if CPU usage is below 101%, but this rule
would not return useful alerts (since it would alert you constantly).
Always verify your rules to ensure that they return meaningful values, to help you best detect problems
and issues.
Note: Custom Polling Intervals: ArcSight Management Center uses three polling intervals (4
hours, 1 day, and 1 week) associated with metric data archive types across ArcSight products. These
intervals can be adjusted for proper usage, if required.
It is strongly recommended that you adjust these intervals only if you fully understand the impact
of the changes.
Polling intervals can be specified in the file logger.properties using a text editor.
l

4-hour data (minimum allowed interval 1 minute):
monitoring.data.poll.4hour.cron=10 0/3 * * * ?

This property indicates a poll at 3 minute intervals.
l

1-day data (minimum allowed interval 5 minutes):
monitoring.data.poll.1day.cron=15 0/10 * * * ?

This property indicates a poll at 10 minute intervals.
l

1-week data (minimum allowed interval 1 hour):
monitoring.data.poll.1week.cron=20 2 * * * ?

This property indicates a poll at 2 hour intervals.
After making the changes and saving the edited file, a server restart is required for the changes to
take effect.

Custom Rules Examples
Shown here are examples of custom monitoring rules.

Example 1: Warning Breach
This example specifies the following Warning condition:
“Generate a Warning breach if the average CPU usage of any ArcMC in the past 30 minutes is greater
than 70%.”
Name: ArcMC Warning

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 190 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 8: Dashboard
Metric Type: CPU Usage
Product Type:ArcMCs
Severity: Warning
Aggregation: AVG
Measurement: GREATER
Value: 70
Timespan: 30 minutes

Example 2: Critical Breach
Example 2 specifies the following Critical condition:
“Generate a Critical breach if the Power Supply fails on any Logger Appliance in the past hour.”
Name: Logger Warning
Metric Type: Power Supply
Product Type: Loggers
Severity: Critical
Aggregation: ANY
Measurement: EQUAL
Value: Failed
Timespan: 60 minutes

Configuring Email Notifications
Email notifications will inform recipients about monitored nodes being down or out of communications.
Note: Email alerts do not include issues with software connectors. However, containers may be the
subject of email alerts.
Before configuring email notifications, ensure that values are specified for your SMTP settings under
System Admin > System > SMTP. For more information on SMTP settings, see "SMTP" on page 225.
Once configured, email notifications must be configured for each of the notification rules you wish to
trigger an alert.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 191 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 8: Dashboard

To configure email notifications:
1. In a text editor, open the file .../userdata/arcmc/logger.properties. (If the file does not
exist, you can create it in a text editor. When creating the file, ensure that it is owned by the nonroot user.)
2. Add a new line with the new property named monitoring.notification.emails and a value
equal to a comma-separated list of email addresses of all administrators you intend to receive
notifications. For example, this value would send email alerts to address1@example.com and
address2@example.com:
monitoring.notification.emails=address1@example.com,
address2@example.com

3. Save the modified logger.properties file.
4. Restart the ArcMC web process.
5. In the rules editor, open the notification rule you wish to trigger an email alert, and under
Notify Me, select Email.

Example Email Notification
An example of the email sent to recipients is shown here.
 refers to the URI of a problematic node.

NodeN is the hostname of a problematic node.
This information is found on the Hosts tab under Node Management.
Subject: 
The following nodes are either down or not reachable from ArcSight Management
Center:
//Default//
//Default//

Configuring SNMP Notifications
SNMP notifications will send SNMP traps about monitored nodes being down or out of
communications.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 192 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 8: Dashboard

To configure SNMP notifications on ArcMC appliance:
1. Under Administration > System Admin > System > SNMP, enable SNMP. Then, enter values for
port, SNMP version, and other required settings for your SNMP environment.
2. In the rules editor, open the notification rule you wish to trigger an SNMP alert, and under
Notify Me, select SNMP. Repeat for each rule you wish to trigger an SNMP alert.

Enabling SNMP on Software ArcMC
Software ArcMC does not include UI controls for SNMP configuration. Instead, take these steps to
configure Software ArcMC for SNMP notifications and monitoring.
To enable SNMP notifications on a software host:
1. Make sure following RPM packages are installed on the system: net-snmp, net-snmp-utils,
net-snmp-libs, lm_sensors-libs.
2. Enable the SNMP service by entering: chkconfig snmpd on
3. Start the SNMP service by entering: service snmpd start
4. In a text editor, create a file /opt/arcsight/userdata/platform/snmp.properties
with the following parameters. Items in brackets <>indicate you should substitute values appropriate for
your own environment.
snmp.enabled=true
snmp.version=V3
snmp.port=161
snmp.v3.authprotocol=SHA
snmp.v3.authpassphrase=
snmp.v3.privacyprotocol=AES128
snmp.v3.privacypassphrase=
snmp.user=
snmp.community=public
snmp.system.location=
snmp.system.name=ArcMC Node 247
snmp.system.contact=
snmp.trap.enabled=true
snmp.trap.version=V3

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 193 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 8: Dashboard

snmp.trap.port=162
snmp.trap.nms=

snmp.trap.user=
snmp.trap.community=public
snmp.trap.v3.authprotocol=SHA
snmp.trap.v3.authpassphrase=
snmp.trap.v3.privacyprotocol=AES128
snmp.trap.v3.privacypassphrase=

---------------------------------------5. Run the script arcsight_snmpconf script as a root user, as follows:
/current/arcsight/aps/bin/arcsight_snmpconf  /userdata/platform/snmp.properties trap
6. Run the script a second time, as follows:
/current/arcsight/aps/bin/arcsight_snmpconf  /userdata/platform/snmp.properties poll
This script will setup /etc/snmp/snmpd.conf file and restart the SNMP service.
7. Restart SNMP services: service snmpd restart
8. In the rules editor, open the notification rule you wish to trigger an SNMP alert, and under
Notify Me, select SNMP. Repeat for each rule you wish to trigger an SNMP alert.

Topology View
The Topology View displays your network components and their relationships in graphic format. The
view shows the relationships between network devices (event producers), connectors, and their
destinations in each of your ArcMC locations.
To display the Topology View, click Dashboard > Topology View.
The left column highlights the current topology view. The available views are based on the locations
defined in ArcMC.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 194 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 8: Dashboard
The health status of each item in the topology view is indicated by its color. Item status may be Healthy
(green), Fatal (red), Critical (amber), Warning (yellow), or Unknown (gray).
Each of monitor icons represents a Device Product type, and the bubbles on the left of each monitor
icon indicate the number of devices for each Device Product type.
A green bubble shows the active devices, that is devices which are receiving events. A red bubble, if
present indicates the number of inactive events.
Click either a green or red bubble to view a details page showing the active or inactive hosts for the
Product type.
The Devices area shows any devices which are forwarding events in your network.
l

To view the EPS (events per second) traffic to and from a device, mouse over the device.

The Connectors area shows connectors in the current topology view.
l

l

l

l

To view the EPS (events per second) traffic to and from a connector, and get an overview of the
connector status, mouse over the connector. Also shown are name, Device Type, Status, Path, Rule
Violation (if any) and ArcMC Managed.
To drill down and view the health of the connector in detail, including health history, click the
connector.
In some cases, such as immediately following adding a connector node, an unmanaged connector
may be displayed. This will be replaced with the connector data within a few collection cycles as data
from the new connector is collected.
Connectors displayed with the
selected for viewing.

symbol are included in a different location from the one currently

The Destinations area shows connector destinations.
l

To drill down and view the health of an ArcMC-managed destination in detail, click the destination.

The Topology View refreshes automatically once per minute. (You can toggle automatic data refresh
with the Auto Refresh control.) To refresh the view manually, click Refresh in the toolbar.
You can also toggle the display of legends for the graphic with the Legends control.
If any are present, unmanaged connectors (or other nodes) in your network are noted as such in
the Topology View. ArcMC will have no visibility into unmanaged connectors, nor any visibility of
traffic from those connectors. Various scenarios for such views, and the results of each scenario, are
detailed here. To get the most complete and accurate picture of your network, you are strongly
encouraged to use ArcMC to manage all connectors which are part of your logical t opology.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 195 of 316

Chapter 9: Managing Backups and Restores
The following topics are discussed here:

• Overview
• Backup
• Restore

196
196
197

Overview
The Backup and Restore menu items enable you to back up and restore your ArcSight Management
Center configuration. A complete backup includes all data on managed nodes, configurations, system
administration, and connector data (in agentdata folders), as well as all repository files. You can also
choose to include a selection of this data in a given backup file, to make your backup file smaller and
more manageable.

Backup
You can back up the current ArcSight Management Center configuration as often as needed, either to a
remote system on the network, or to your local system.

To back up the ArcSight Management Center configuration:
1. Click Administration > Application > Backup.
2. Under Enter Backup Parameters, supply values for the parameters listed in the following table:
Parameter Description
Protocol

Select SCP to use Secure Copy to save the backup file on a remote system on your network. You need
to specify the IP address or hostname, your user name and password, and the destination directory
in the appropriate fields.
Select Save to Local to save the backup file on your local system. When you select this option, the
Port, IP/Host, User, Password, and Remote Directory fields are disabled (grayed out) as they are
not needed.

Port

SCP only. The default port is 22.

SCP only. The IP address of the destination to receive the backup file.
Backup
Server
IP Address

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 196 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 9: Managing Backups and Restores

Parameter Description
User

SCP only. A user name on the destination.

Password

SCP only. The password for the user name you specify.

Remote
Directory

SCP only. The subdirectory on the specified destination to receive the configuration backup file.

Schedule/
One time
only

One Time Only
SCP only. Allows for a “one time only” backup.
Schedule
Provides the option to specify backup times in days, hours, or minutes.
Note the following rules for this option:

Backup

l

Valid days of the week are M, Tu, W, Th, Fr, Sa, Su.

l

Letters are not case-sensitive.

l

Minutes must exceed 15 minute intervals.

l

Minute intervals start at the top of the hour, not at the time the request was made.

l

Hour intervals start at midnight, not at the time the request was made.

l

Select All to create a backup file that contains all data on managed nodes, configurations, system
administration, connectors, and repositories.
Tip: Choosing All can potentially create a .tar.gz file so large that the restoration of data is
unsuccessful. To prevent this, you may want to exclude connector data and repository data
from your backup file.

l

l

l

Select Exclude Repository Data to create a backup file that does not include files in the
repositories.
Select Exclude Connector Data to create a backup file that does not include connector data.
(ArcMC Appliance only.)
Select Exclude Connector and Repository Data to create a backup file that does not include
repository files and connector data. (ArcMC Appliance only.)

3. Click Save to back up the configuration, and then select a location to save the file.

Restore
You can restore your ArcSight Management Center configuration from a previous backup. These
stipulations apply to restoring:
l

The version of ArcSight Management Center used to restore the backup must be the same version
used to create it.

l

A backup performed on a root installation cannot be used to restore a non-root installation.

l

For Software ArcSight Management Center, the install path of a restored Software ArcMC must be

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 197 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 9: Managing Backups and Restores

the same as the path of the backup, and the same root or non-root user must perform the installation
as did the backup.

To restore the configuration:
1. Click Administration > Application > Restore.
2. Under Upload Backup for Restore, click Choose File.
3. Select your backup file.
4. Click Upload to restore the configuration from the specified backup file.
Caution: The version of ArcSight Management Center used to restore the backup must be the
same version used to create it.
5. On software ArcMC, restart the ArcSight Management Center web process. On ArcMCappliance,
reboot the appliance.
6. Optionally, re-import the SSL certificate for each container. Click the
icon to run the
Certificate Download wizard and import the valid certificates. In addition, if a certificate mismatch
is shown for any remote node, re-import the server certificate for the node.
After restoring the configuration:
l

l
l

The cache size on the restore may be different from the cache size in the backup file. For example,
after restoring the configuration, connectors might receive more events or consume more cache.
The container versions on the restore (if any) might be different from those in the backup file.
The Cache column on the Connectors tab may take a few minutes to refresh the updated cache size
for the connectors.
Note: System Restore: For information on restoring an appliance to its factory settings, see
"Restoring Factory Settings" on page 303.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 198 of 316

Chapter 10: Snapshots
The following topics are discussed here.

• Overview
• Creating a Snapshot

199
199

Overview
ArcSight Management Center records audit and debug information, including details of any issues that
can occur during normal operations. These system logs form a snapshot of your ArcSight Management
Center activity. System logs are helpful in troubleshooting issues.
HPE ArcSight Customer Support may ask you to retrieve and submit system logs as part of an incident
investigation.

Creating a Snapshot
Creating a snapshot of ArcSight Management Center creates a set of zipped log files, which you can
download locally.

To create a snapshot:
1. Click Administration > Application > Snapshot.
2. The Retrieve Snapshot Status page displays. Depending on the size of the log files, the snapshot
may take a few moments to generate.
3. When ready, click Download to download the ZIP file locally.
Submit the snapshot file as instructed by HPE ArcSight Customer Support.
Note: An ArcSight Management Center snapshot does not include information on the activity of

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 199 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 10: Snapshots

the ArcSight Management Center Agent on remotely-managed hosts.
To obtain logs for ArcSight Management Center Agent activity on a managed host, access the
remote host. Under Setup > Appliance Snapshot, click the Download button.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 200 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 11: Logger Consumption Report

Chapter 11: Logger Consumption Report
The Logger Consumption Report includes information on your Logger data consumption. You can
choose which managed Logger 6.1 (or later) nodes to include in the report.

To generate a Logger Consumption report:
1. Click Administration > Application > Consumption Report.
2. Use the Add and Remove arrows to add or remove nodes from the Available Nodes column to
the Selected Nodes column.
3. Click Run Report. The report is generated for the selected nodes.
4. Click + to expand the data on any node to view licensing specifics.
5. To export the license report to PDF, click Export to PDF.
6. Specify a time range for the report.
7. Click OK to exit the report.

Report Data
The report displays the licensed value and actual value for data consumption by managed Loggers.
Value

Description

Shows the data consumption to which your license entitles you. For individual ADP Loggers, the license
Licensed
Consumption limit will be shown as Not Applicable, since ArcMC tracks the overall ADP data limit, not those of
individual Loggers.
Note: If an ADP Logger is managed by a version of ArcMC earlier than 2.5, then the license limit will
be incorrectly shown in the report as Unlimited.
Shows the current value of data consumption. Click the value to display the Consumption Chart, which
Actual
Consumption shows data consumption in detail.

Status

Click any status hyperlink to view individual Logger data for the last 30 days. Status values are shown
as follows:
OK if the actual value is less than or equal to the license value.
In Violation indicates that the actual value exceeds the license value, which constitutes a violation of
the terms of your license. Your license permits you a number of violations for each 30-day period,
which is shown on the Violations Last 30 Days line.
Click any hyperlink to view individual Logger data for the last 30 days.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 201 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 11: Logger Consumption Report

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 202 of 316

Chapter 12: Managing Repositories
The following topics are discussed here.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Overview
Logs Repository
CA Certs Repository
Upgrade Files Repository
Content AUP Repository
Emergency Restore
User-Defined Repositories
Pre-Defined Repositories

203
204
204
206
207
208
209
213

Overview
Certain management operations require a specific upgrade or content update (.enc) file, or a
certificate. Other operations, such as viewing logs, require you to load the logs to a Log repository.
ArcSight Management Center can also maintain centralized repositories for files needed for host
configuration and management.
By default, a number of pre-defined repositories are provided. However, you can create more
repositories to suit your needs. Any repositories you create are referred to as user-defined repositories.
The following controls are used for repository functions:
l
l

l

Retrieve Container Files copies a file from one or more managed hosts to the repository.
Upload to Repository sends a file from your local computer (the computer running the browser) or
a network host accessible from your local computer to the repository.
Retrieve downloads a file from the repository.

Upload copies a file from the repository to one or more managed nodes.
You can perform these operations using repositories:
l

l

Manage logs in the Logs repository

l

Manage CA certificates in the CA Certs repository

l

Upgrade a connector using an upgrade file available in the Upgrade repository

l

Apply a Content ArcSight Update Pack (AUP) on one or more connector

l

Maintain centralized repositories of files for connector configuration and management

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 203 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 12: Managing Repositories

Logs Repository
To view logs, you need to first Load the logs of the container that contains the connector to the Logs
repository, and then Retrieve the logs to view them.
Note: If a container contains more than one connector, logs for all connectors are retrieved.
For information on loading, retrieving, and deleting container logs, see "Viewing Container Logs" on
page 85.

Uploading a File to the Logs Repository
Uploading a file into the Log repository is useful for sharing annotated log or other files with other
users. An uploaded file needs to be in .zip format.

To upload a ZIP file:
1. Click Administration > Repositories.
2. Click Logs from the left panel.
3. Click Upload from the management panel.
4. Enter the local file path or click Browse to select the ZIP file.
5. Click Submit to add the specified file to the repository or Cancel to quit.
Due to a browser limitation in Internet Explorer 11, the progress of the file upload will not be shown.

CA Certs Repository
Connectors require a Certificate Authority (CA) issued or self-signed SSL certificate to communicate
securely with a destination. The CA Certs repository (shown below) enables you to store CA Certs files
(that contain one or multiple certificates) and single CA certificates. When certificates are stored in the
CA Certs repository, you can add the certificates to a container so that the connectors in the container
can validate their configured destinations.
You can add a single certificate to a container that is in FIPS or non-FIPS mode. You can only add a CA
Certs file to a container that is in non-FIPS mode.
To associate a CA certificate to a connector, you need to:
l

Upload the CA certificate or CA Certs file to the CA Certs repository, as described below.

l

Add a CA certificate from the CA Certs repository to the container that contains the connector, as

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 204 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 12: Managing Repositories

described in "Managing Certificates on a Container" on page 89.

Uploading CA Certificates to the Repository
You can upload a CA Certs file or a single certificate to the CA Certs repository.
Tip: Before you upload a single CA certificate, change the name of the certificate on the local
computer to a name that you can recognize easily. This helps you distinguish the certificate when it
is displayed in the Certificate Management wizard.

To upload certificates to the repository:
1. Click Administration > Repositories.
2. Click CA Certs in the left panel.
3. Click Upload in the management panel.
4. Enter the local path for the CA Certs file or the certificate, or click Browse to select it.
5. Click Submit to add the specified CA Certs file or the certificate to the repository, or Cancel to quit.
The CA Certs Repositories tab shows all the CA Certs files and single certificates that have been
uploaded. The Type column shows CERTIFICATE for a single certificate and CACERT for a CA Certs
file.

Removing CA Certificates from the Repository
When you delete a CA Certs file or a single certificate from the repository, it is deleted from ArcSight
Management Center.
Note: When you delete a CA Certs file or a single certificate from the CA Certs repository,
containers are not affected; the connectors continue to use the certificates, which are located in a
trust store after being added to a container. For information about adding a CA certificate to a
container, see "Managing Certificates on a Container" on page 89.

To remove a certificate from the repository:
1. Click Administration > Repositories.
2. Click CA Certs in the left panel.
3. Identify the certificate or the CA Certs file you want to remove and click its associated Remove
button (

).

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 205 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 12: Managing Repositories

Upgrade Files Repository
The Upgrade files repository enables you to maintain a number of connector upgrade files. You can
apply any of these upgrade files to containers when you need to upgrade to a specific version. As a
result, all connectors in a container are upgraded to the version you apply to the container.
Note: Logger ENC files are required for the remote upgrade of a Logger Appliance. For more
information, see "Upgrading a Logger " on page 78.

About the AUP Upgrade Process
Note: The process discussed in this section only applies to upgrading connectors and to upgrading
a remotely-managed Connector Appliance. If you are upgrading the local ArcSight Management
Center (localhost), use an ENC file instead.
To upgrade a connector or to upgrade a remotely-managed Connector Appliance, you need to:
l
l

Upload the appropriate .aup upgrade file to the Upgrade Files repository, as described below.
Apply the .aup upgrade file from the Upgrade Files repository to the container (see "Upgrading All
Connectors in a Container" on page 83).

Uploading an AUP Upgrade File to the Repository
To upload AUP upgrade files to the repository:
1. Download the upgrade files for the connector or the remote Connector Appliance from the
ArcSight Customer Support site at http://softwaresupport.hpe.com/ to the computer that you use
to connect to the browser-based interface.
2. From the computer to which you downloaded the upgrade file, log in to the browser-based
interface.
3. Click SetupConfiguration > Administration > Repositories.
4. Click Upgrade AUP from the left panel.
5. Click Upload from the management panel.
6. Click Browse and select the file you downloaded earlier.
7. Click Submit to add the specified file to the repository or click Cancel to quit.
8. You can now use the AUP upgrade file to upgrade a container to a specific version. For
instructions, see "Upgrading All Connectors in a Container" on page 83.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 206 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 12: Managing Repositories

Removing a Connector Upgrade from the Repository
You can remove a connector upgrade file from the repository when you no longer need it. When you
remove a connector upgrade file from the repository, it is deleted from ArcSight Management Center.

To remove a Connector upgrade from the repository:
1. Click SetupConfiguration > Administration > Repositories.
2. Click Upgrade AUP from the left panel.
3. Locate the upgrade file that you want to delete and click the associated

icon.

Content AUP Repository
ArcSight continuously develops new connector event categorization mappings, often called content.
This content is packaged in ArcSight Update Packs (AUP) files. All existing content is included with
major product releases, but it is possible to stay completely current by receiving up-to-date, regular
content updates through ArcSight announcements and the Customer Support site. The AUP files are
located under Content Subscription Downloads.
The ArcSight Content AUP feature enables you to apply an AUP file to applicable connector
destinations that you are managing. Only the event categorization information can be applied to the
connectors using this feature.
You can maintain a number of Content AUP files in the Content AUP repository. When an AUP file with
a version number higher than the ones already in the repository is loaded, it is automatically pushed out
to the connector destinations being managed. However, these connectors or connector destinations are
skipped:
l
l

Connectors that are unavailable at the time of the AUP file push
Connectors whose current version does not fall in the range of versions that the Content AUP
supports

l

The ESM destination on a connector

l

All destinations of a connector that have an ESM destination with the AUP Master flag set to Yes

Also, when a new connector is added, the highest number Content AUP is pushed automatically to its
destinations.

Applying a New Content AUP
You can add a new content AUP file to the repository and push it automatically to all applicable
managed nodes.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 207 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 12: Managing Repositories

To apply a new Content AUP:
1. Download the new Content AUP version from the support site at http://softwaresupport.hpe.com/
to the computer that you use to connect to the browser-based interface.
2. From the computer to which you downloaded the AUP file, log in to the browser-based interface.
3. Click Administration > Repositories.
4. Click Content AUP from the left panel.
5. Click Upload from the management panel.
6. Click Browse and select the file you downloaded earlier.
7. Click Submit to add the specified file to the repository and push it automatically to all applicable
connectors, or Cancel to quit.
You can verify the current Content AUP version on a connector by performing either of these steps:
l

l

Run the GetStatus command on the node destination and check that the value for aup
[acp].version is the same as the AUP version you applied. For information about running a
command on a connector destination, see "Sending a Command to a Connector" on page 107.
hover over a host name to see the AUP version applied to all destinations of that connector.

Applying an Older Content AUP
If you need to apply an older Content AUP from the Content AUP repository, delete all versions newer
than the one you want to apply in the repository. The latest version (of the remaining AUP files) is
pushed automatically to all applicable connectors.

To delete a Content AUP from the Content AUP repository:
1. Click Administration > Repositories.
2. Click Content AUP from the left panel.
3. Locate the AUP file that you want to delete and click the associated
files.

icon. Repeat for multiple

Emergency Restore
The Emergency Restore can be used to restore a severely damaged local container on an appliance. This
feature is supported only for containers on the localhost, for the hardware appliance version of
ArcSight Management Center

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 208 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 12: Managing Repositories
ArcSight recommends that you use this process only when a container is severely damaged and is no
longer available. The Emergency Restore process deletes all information about that container and
renders it empty. The connector is restored to the AUP version that you select.

To perform an emergency restore:
1. Click System Admin > Repositories.
2. In the navigation panel, click Emergency Restore.
3. Follow the instructions in the wizard.
4. Re-import the SSL certificate for the container.

User-Defined Repositories
A user-defined repository is a user-named collection of settings that control upload and download of
particular files from connectors to the repository. Each repository uses a specified path, relative to
$ARCSIGHT_HOME/user/agent, for files to be uploaded or downloaded. ArcSight connectors use a
standard directory structure, so map files, for example, are always found in $ARCSIGHT_
HOME/user/agent, (that is, the root directory, $ARCSIGHT_HOME, of the installation path) in a folder
called map/.
After they are created, user-defined repositories are listed on the left-side menu, under the New
Repository heading, and appear with the user-specified display name.
User-defined repositories should be grouped by file type and purpose, such as log files, certificate files,
or map files. Each user-defined repository has a name, a display name, and an item display name, which
are described under the repository Settings tab.
Files viewed in a user-defined repository can be bulk processed with specified hosts and can be
exchanged with the user’s browser host.

Creating a User-Defined Repository
You can create a new repository at any time.
The repository requires correct directory paths. Your file will be applied to the wrong directory if the
entered path contains errors, such as extra spaces or incorrect spellings. You can verify your directory
paths by accessing the Directory.txt file, which lists the directory structure for every entered path. View
the Directory.txt file by accessing your container logs and finding the Directory.txt file.

To create a new user-defined repository:
1. Click Administration > Repositories.
2. Click New Repository under the Repositories section in the left panel.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 209 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 12: Managing Repositories

3. For the new repository, enter the parameters listed in the following table.
Parameter

Description

Name

A unique name for the repository, typically based on the type of files it contains.

Display Name

The name that will be displayed on the left-side menu and for tabs: Process names, View
names, Settings for names. Typically plural.

Item Display
Name

The name used to describe a single item.

Recursive

Check to include sub-folders.

Sort Priority

-1 by default

Restart
Connector
Process

Check to restart the connector process after file operations.

Filename
Prefix

An identifying word that is included in the names of retrieved files. For example, map files are
identified by Map in the file name: localhost_Container_-1.Map-2009-04-06_12-2225-607.zip

Relative path
(Download)

The path for download, relative to $ARCSIGHT_HOME , for example, user/agent/map or
user/agent/flexagent . Leave this field blank to specify files in $ARCSIGHT_HOME .
Note: The relative path is used for download only.

Include Regular A description of filenames to include. Use .* to specify all files. The following example selects
Expression
properties files that consist of map . followed by one or more digits, followed by .properties :
map\.[0-9]+\.properties$

Exclude
Regular
Expression

A description of filenames to exclude. The following example excludes all files with a certain
prefix or in the agentdata folder.

Delete Before
Upload

Check to delete earlier copies before upload.

Delete Groups

Whether to delete folders recursively in $ARCSIGHT_HOME/user/agent/map directory .

Relative path
(Upload)

The path for upload, relative to $ARCSIGHT_HOME/current/user/agent/flexagent/
< connectorname>

(agentdata/|cwsapi_fileset_).*$

CAUTION: If you check Delete Before Upload and do not specify a Relative path (Upload), all
files and folders in current/user/agent will be deleted.

Delete Relative Whether the directory specified in Relative Path (Upload) and its contents should be removed
Path
when a file is uploaded from the repository.
Delete Include
Regular
Expression

Typically the same as the Include Regular Expression.

Delete Exclude
Regular
Expression

Typically the same as the Exclude Regular Expression.

4. Click Save at the bottom of the page.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 210 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 12: Managing Repositories

The new repository displays under the New Repository heading in the left-side window panel.

Retrieving Container Files
The Retrieve Container Files button copies a file from one or more containers to a repository. The
specific files that are retrieved depend on the settings of the repository.

To retrieve a container file:
1. Click Administration > Repositories.
2. In the left panel, under Repositories, click the name of the repository to which you want to copy
connector files.
3. Click Retrieve Container Files in the management panel.
4. Follow the instructions in the Retrieve Container Files wizard.

Uploading Files to a Repository
To upload files to a repository:
1. Click Administration > Repositories.
2. In the lower left panel (under Repositories), click the name of the repository to which you want to
upload files.
3. Click Upload To Repository from the management panel.
4. Follow the instructions in the Repository File Creation wizard. Select Individual files to create a
ZIP file with appropriate path information.
Caution: Be sure not to change the default sub-folder name lib in the Enter the sub folder
where the files will be uploaded page of the Repository File Creation wizard.

Deleting a User-Defined Repository
To delete a user-defined repository:
1. Click Administration > Repositories.
2. From the left panel, click the name of the repository you want to delete.
3. Click Remove Repository from the management panel.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 211 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 12: Managing Repositories

Updating Repository Settings.
To update the settings of a user-defined repository:
1. Click Administration > Repositories.
2. In the left panel, click the name of the repository whose settings you want to update.
3. Click the Settings for Repository_Name tab from the management panel.
4. Update the settings.
5. Click Save at the bottom of the page.

Managing Files in a Repository
Retrieving a File from the Repository
To retrieve a file from the repository:
1. Click Administration > Repositories.
2. From the left panel, click the name of the repository in which the file exists.
3. Click

from the management panel for the file that you want to retrieve.

4. Follow the file download instructions to copy the file to your local computer.

Uploading a File from the Repository
To upload a file from the repository:
1. Click Administration > Repositories.
2. In the left panel, click the name of the repository in which the file exists.
3. In the management panel, click Upload to Repository for the file that you want to upload.
4. Follow the Upload Container Files wizard instructions to upload the file to the containers of your
choice.
5. Verify that the file was uploaded correctly:
l

l

If you have SSH access to the connectors, connect to them and check the file structure.
Obtain the connector logs and check the contents of the Directory.txt file for each
connector.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 212 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 12: Managing Repositories

Removing a File from the Repository
To remove a file from the repository:
1. Click Administration > Repositories.
2. In the left panel, click the name of the repository in which the file exists.
3. In the management panel, click

for the file that you want to delete.

Pre-Defined Repositories
You can define repositories for any connector-related files. The following repositories are pre-defined:
l

Backup Files: connector cloning (see " Backup Files" on page 217).

l

Map Files: enrich event data

l

Parser Overrides: customize the parser (see "Adding Parser Overrides" on page 218)

l

FlexConnector Files: user-designed connector deployment

l

Connector Properties: agent.properties; subset of cloning

JDBC Drivers: database connectors
To view the settings for a pre-defined repository, click the name of the repository and then click the
Settings tab in the management panel. Settings for a pre-defined repository are read-only.
l

Settings for Backup Files
Backup File Default Settings
Name

Default Setting

Name

backup

Display Name

Backup Files

Item Display Name

Backup File

Recursive

Selected (Yes)

Sort Priority

0

Restart Connector Process

Selected (Yes)

Filename Prefix

ConnectorBackup

Download Relative Path
Download Include regular expression

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 213 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 12: Managing Repositories
Backup File Default Settings, continued
Name

Default Setting

Download Exclude regular expression

(agentdata/|cwsapi_fileset_).*$

Delete before upload

Selected (Yes)

Delete groups

Selected (Yes)

Upload Relative Path
Delete Relative Path
Delete Include regular expression
Delete Exclude regular expression

(agentdata/|cwsapi_fileset_).*$

Settings for Map Files
This table lists the default settings for map files.
Map File Settings
Name

Default Setting

Name

map

Display Name

Map Files

Item Display Name

Map File

Recursive

Deselected (No)

Sort Priority

5

Restart Connector Process

Deselected (No)

Filename Prefix

Map

Download Relative Path

map

Download Include regular expression

map\.[0-9]+\.properties$

Download Exclude regular expression
Delete before upload

Selected (Yes)

Delete groups

Deselected (No)

Upload Relative Path
Delete Relative Path

map

Delete Include regular expression

map\.[0-9]+\.properties$

Delete Exclude regular expression

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 214 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 12: Managing Repositories

Settings for Parser Overrides
This table lists the default settings for parser overrides.
Parser Override Settings
Name

Default Setting

Name

parseroverrides

Display Name

Parser Overrides

Item Display Name

Parser Override

Recursive

Selected (Yes)

Sort Priority

10

Restart Connector Process

Selected (Yes)

Filename Prefix

Parsers

Download Relative Path

fcp

Download Include regular expression

.*

Download Exclude regular expression
Delete before upload

Selected (Yes)

Delete groups

Selected (Yes)

Upload Relative Path
Delete Relative Path

fcp

Delete Include regular expression

.*

Delete Exclude regular expression

Settings for FlexConnector Files
This table lists the default settings for FlexConnector files.
FlexConnector Settings
Name

Default Setting

Name

flexconnectors

Display Name

FlexConnector Files

Item Display Name

FlexConnector File

Recursive

Selected (Yes)

Sort Priority

15

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 215 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 12: Managing Repositories
FlexConnector Settings, continued
Name

Default Setting

Restart Connector Process

Selected (Yes)

Filename Prefix

FlexConnector

Download Relative Path

flexagent

Download Include regular expression

.*

Download Exclude regular expression
Delete before upload

Selected (Yes)

Delete groups

Selected (Yes)

Upload Relative Path
Delete Relative Path

flexagent

Delete Include regular expression

.*

Delete Exclude regular expression

Settings for Connector Properties
Connector Default Property Settings
Name

Default Setting

Name

connectorproperties

Display Name

Connector Properties

Item Display Name

Connector Property File

Recursive

Deselected (No)

Sort Priority

20

Restart Connector Process

Selected (Yes)

Filename Prefix

ConnectorProperties

Download Relative Path
Download Include regular expression

agent\.*

Download Exclude regular expression
Delete before upload

Deselected (No)

Delete groups

Deselected (No)

Upload Relative Path

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 216 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 12: Managing Repositories
Connector Default Property Settings, continued
Name

Default Setting

Delete Relative Path
agent\.*

Delete Include regular expression
Delete Exclude regular expression

Settings for JDBC Drivers
This table lists the default settings for JDBC Drivers.
JDBC Driver Settings
Name

Default Setting

Name

jdbcdrivers

Display Name

JDBC Drivers

Item Display Name

Connector JDBC Driver File

Recursive

Deselected (No)

Sort Priority

25

Restart Connector Process

Selected (Yes)

Filename Prefix
Download Relative Path

lib

Download Include regular expression
Download Exclude regular expression
Delete before upload

Deselected (No)

Delete groups

Deselected (No)

Upload Relative Path
Delete Relative Path

lib

Delete Include regular expression
Delete Exclude regular expression

Backup Files
Using the Backup Files repository, you can quickly copy a container to other containers. As a result, all
connectors in the source container are copied to the destination container. This process is called cloning
a container configuration. You can clone a container to several containers at once. The contents of the
source container replace the existing contents of the destination container.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 217 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 12: Managing Repositories

Caution: Containers on ArcSight Management Center are pre-installed with the latest connector
release. Do not clone older, software-based connectors (such as build 4.0.8.4964) to containers
with newer connector builds (such as 4.0.8.4976 or later).
Cloning a connector using the Backup repository only works if the connector version numbers are
the same.

To clone a container using the Backup Files repository:
1. Click Node Management > View All Nodes.
2. Click the Containers tab to list the containers and determine the source and destination for
cloning.
3. Click Administration > Repositories.
4. Click Backup Files under the Repositories section in the management panel.
5. If the backup file that you need to use for cloning exists in the repository, go to the next step.
Otherwise, follow the instructions in "Retrieving a File from the Repository" on page 212 to retrieve
the container’s backup file to the Backup repository.
The retrieved file is named in  ConnectorBackup  format.
6. Follow the instructions in "Uploading a File from the Repository" on page 212 to upload the backup
file to one or more containers.
The destination containers are unavailable while the backup file is applied and the connectors are
restarted.
Note: The backup file does not include the container certificates. You have to re-apply the
certificates to the container after you upload the backup file.
After applying the certificates, check the status of the destination container to make sure it is
available.

Adding Parser Overrides
A parser override is a file provided by ArcSight used to resolve an issue with the parser for a specific
connector, or to support a newer version of a supported device where the log file format changed
slightly or new event types were added.
To use parser overrides, you need to:
l
l

Upload a parser override file to the Parser Overrides repository.
Download the parser override file to the container that contains the connector that will use the
parser override.

Follow the steps below.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 218 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 12: Managing Repositories

To upload a parser override file:
1. Click Administration > Repositories.
2. Click Parser Overrides under the Repositories section in the management panel.
3. On the Parser Overrides tab, click the Upload To Repository button.
4. Follow the wizard to upload the file. When prompted by the wizard, make sure you:
l

l

Select the Individual Files option from the Select the type of file that you want to upload
field.
Add a slash (/) after fcp before adding the folder name in the Enter the sub folder where the
files will be uploaded field. For example, fcp/multisqlserver_audit_db.
When upload is complete, the parser override file is listed in the table on the Parser Overrides tab.

To download the parser override file to a container:
1. Click Administration > Repositories.
2. Click Parser Overrides under the Repositories section in the management panel.
3. In the table on the Parser Overrides tab, locate the parser override file you want to download and
click the up arrow next to the file.
4. Follow the wizard to select the container to which you want to add the parser overrides.
When the wizard completes, the parser overrides are deployed in the selected container.
Note: You can download a parser override file from ArcExchange. For more information, refer
to "Sharing Connectors in ArcExchange" on page 113.
To verify that the parser override has been applied successfully, issue a Get Status command to the
connector. See "Sending a Command to a Connector" on page 107. In the report that appears, check for
the line starting with the text ContentInputStreamOverrides.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 219 of 316

Chapter 13: System Administration
This chapter describes the System Administration tools that enable you to create and manage users and
user groups, and to configure SMTP and other system settings.network, storage, and security settings
for your system.
This chapter includes information on the following areas of system administration:

•
•
•
•
•

System
Logs
Storage
Security
Users/Groups on ArcMC

220
239
241
246
253

System
From the System tab, you can configure system specific settings such as network settings (if applicable)
and SMTP.

System Reboot
To reboot or shutdown your system:
1. Click Administration > Setup > System Admin from the top-level menu bar.
2. Click System Reboot in the System section.
3. Select from the following options:
Button

Description

Reboot

Your system reboots in about 60 seconds.
The reboot process normally takes 5-10 minutes, during which time the system is
unavailable.

Reboot in 5
Minutes

Your system reboots after a 5-minute delay.

Shutdown

Automatically shuts down (powers off) the system.

The reboot process normally takes 5-10 minutes, during which time the system is
unavailable.

4.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 220 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

Note: Each of the above actions can be cancelled. “Reboot” and “Shutdown” allow for
cancellation within 60 seconds. “Reboot in 5 Minutes” can be cancelled within 300 seconds.
5. Click Reboot, Reboot in 5 Minutes, or Shutdown to execute the chosen action.

Network
System DNS
The System DNS tab allows you to edit the DNS settings and to add DNS search domains.

To change DNS settings:
1. Click Administration > Setup > System Admin from the top-level menu bar.
2. Click Network in the System section.
3. In the System DNS tab, enter new values for the IP address of the primary and secondary DNS
servers, or edit the list of search domains.
To add a new domain, click the icon. To remove a domain, click the icon. To change the
search order of domains, select a domain name, and click the up or down arrow until the domain is
in the desired position.
4. Click Save.
5. Click Restart Network Service to put the changes into effect.

Hosts
The Hosts tab allows direct editing of your system’s /etc/hosts file. You can enter data in the
System Hosts text box or import it from a local file.

To change the Hosts information:
1. Click Setup > System Admin from the top-level menu bar.
2. Click Network in the System section, and then click the Hosts tab.
3. In the System Hosts text box, enter hosts information (one host per line) in this format:
   

To import information from a file, click Import from Local File, and locate the text file on the
computer from which you are accessing your system.
4. Click Save.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 221 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

NICs
The NICs tab enables you to set the IP addresses for the network interface cards (NICs) on your system.
Additionally, you can configure the hostname and default gateway for your system.

To set or change the NICs settings:
1. Click Setup > System Admin from the top-level menu bar.
2. Click Network in the System section.
3. In the NICs tab, enter the following settings. To edit the IP address , subnet mask, or speed/duplex
of an NIC, select the NIC and click Edit above the NIC Name list.
Setting

Description

Default
Gateway

The IP address of the default gateway.

Hostname

The network host name for this system. Make sure that your DNS can resolve the host name you
specify to your system’s IP address . Performance is significantly affected if DNS cannot resolve
the host name.
This name must be identical to the domain specified in the Certificate Signing Request,
described in "Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)" on page 248.
Note: If you previously used a self-signed or CA-signed certificate on this system and are now
changing its host name, you must regenerate a new self-signed certificate or CSR. Once obtained,
the new certificate should be uploaded to ensure that the connectors which communicate with
your system are able to validate the host name. For more information about generating a CSR, see
"Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)" on page 248.

Automatically
route
outbound
packets
(interface
homing)

When this option is enabled (checked box), the response packets are sent back on the same
system interface on which the request packets had arrived. Enabling this option can improve
performance as the routing decisions do not need to be made (using the default gateway
information and static routes) to send packets out from your system. If you have static routes
configured, they are ignored when this feature is enabled.
When this feature is disabled (unchecked box), the static routes (if configured) are used to
determine the interface through which the response packets should leave your system.
If you configure only one network interface, this setting does not provide any additional benefit.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 222 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

Setting

Description

IP Address

The IP address for each network interface card (NICs) in your system.
Add NIC Alias
You can create an alias for any listed NIC. To do so:
a. Highlight the NIC for which you want to create an alias.
b. Click Add.
c. Create an alternative IP address for the alias.
d. Click Save.
You can identify the alias from its original by an appended colon alongside a digit indicating the
number of aliases you have created on a particular NIC.
Notes:

Subnet Mask

l

You cannot alter the speed of an IP alias.

l

You can create as many aliases as you choose.

The subnet mask associated with the IP address you entered for an NIC.

Speed/Duplex Choose a speed and duplex mode, or let your system determine the network speed automatically:
Auto (recommended)
10 Mbps - Half Duplex
10 Mbps - Full Duplex
100 Mbps - Half Duplex
100 Mbps - Full Duplex
1 Gbps - Full Duplex

4. Click Save.
5. Click Restart Network Service to put the changes into effect.

Static Routes
You can specify static routes for the NICs on your system.

To add, edit, or delete a static route:
1. Click Setup > System Admin from the top-level menu bar.
2. Click Network in the System section.
3. In the Static Routes tab:
l

To add a new static route, click Add.

l

To edit or delete an existing route, select the route first, then click Edit or Delete.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 223 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

When adding or editing a static route, you need to configure these settings.
Setting

Description

Type

Whether the static route is to a Network or a Host

Destination

The IP address for the static route destination

Subnet Mask

The subnet mask if you specify a network as the destination

Gateway

The IP address of the gateway for the route

4. Click Save.

Time/NTP
The Time/NTP tab enables you to configure system time, date, local timezone, and NTP servers. HPE
Security strongly recommends using an NTP server instead of manually configuring the time and date
on your system.

To set or change the system time, date, or time zone manually:
Caution: If you manually set the date and time settings and are also using an NTP service, the date
and time entered manually cannot be more than 16 minutes ahead of or behind the time that the
NTP server is providing. If the manually entered time is more than 16 minutes different from the
NTP server time, then the NTP service will fail to start.
1. Click Setup > System Admin from the top-level menu bar.
2. Click Network in the System section.
3. In the Time/NTP tab, configure these settings.
Setting

Description

Current
Time Zone

The time zones appropriate to your system’s location. To change this setting, click Change Time
Zone...
Local times zones follow the Daylight Savings Time (DST) rules for that area. Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT) + and - time zones are DST agnostic.
For example, the America/Los Angeles time zone varies by an hour compared with GMT when DST
goes into and out of effect.

Current
Time

l

Pacific Standard Time (PST) = GMT-8

l

Pacific Daylight Time (PDT) = GMT-7

The current date and time at the system’s location. To change this setting, click Change
Date/Time... and then enter the current date and time.

4. The Time Zone change requires that you reboot the appliance. However, the Current Time change
takes effect immediately.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 224 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

To configure your system as an NTP server or for using an NTP server for your
system:
1. Click Setup > System Admin from the top-level menu bar.
2. Click Network in the System section.
3. Click the Time/NTP tab.
4. Under NTP Servers, configure these settings.
To add a new NTP server, click the icon. To remove a server, click the icon. To change the
order in which the NTP servers should be used, select a server and click the up or down arrow until
the NTP server is in the desired position.
Setting

Description

Enable as an
NTP server

Check this setting if this system should be used as an NTP server.

NTP Servers

Enter the host name of an NTP server. For example, time.nist.gov.
HPE Security recommends using at least two NTP servers to ensure precise time on your system.
To enter multiple NTP servers, type one server name per line.
Notes:
l

l

l

An ArcSight system can serve as an NTP server for any other ArcSight system.
If System A serves as an NTP server for System B, System B needs to list System A in its NTP
Servers list.
Use the Test Servers button to verify the status of the servers entered into the NTP Servers
box.

5. Click Save.
Tip: You may need to scroll down to view the Save button and Restart NTP Service.
6. Click Restart NTP Service to put the changes into effect.

SMTP
Your system uses the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) setting to send email notifications such as
alerts and password reset emails.

To add or change SMTP settings:
1. Click Administration > Setup > System Admin.
2. Click SMTP in the System section and enter these settings.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 225 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

Setting

Description

Primary SMTP
Server

The IP address or hostname of the SMTP server that will process outgoing email.

Backup SMTP
Server

The IP address or hostname of the SMTP server that will process outgoing email in case the
primary SMTP server is unavailable.

Outgoing Email
Address

The email address that will appear in the From: field of outbound email.

3. Click Save.

License & Update
This page displays license information, the version of the components, and the elapsed time since
ArcSight Management Center was last rebootedrestarted. From here, you can update ArcSight
Management Center and apply a license.

Updating the Appliance
To update your ArcSight Management Center:
1. Download the update file from the HPE Support site at http://softwaresupport.hpe.com to the
computer from which you can connect to ArcSight Management Center.
2. Click Administration > Setup > System Admin from the top-level menu bar.
3. Click License & Update in the System section.
4. Click Browse to locate the file.
5. Click Upload Update.
An “Update In Progress” page displays the update progress.
6. Once the update has completed, the Update Results page displays the update result
(success/failure) and whether the update requires a reboot. If the update requires a reboot, the
ArcSight Management Center reboots automatically.

Updating the License File
To update a license file:
1. Download the license update file from the HPE Support site at http://softwaresupport.hpe.com to
the computer from which you can connect to the ArcSight Management Center with your browser.
2. From the computer to which you downloaded the license update file, log in to the ArcSight
Management Center user interface using an account with administrator (upgrade) privileges.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 226 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

3. Click Administration > System Admin.
4. Click License & Update in the System section.
5. Browse to the license file you downloaded earlier, and click Upload Update.
An “Update In Progress” page displays the update progress.
After the update has completed, the Update Results page displays the update result (success/failure). If
you are only installing or updating a license, a rebootrestart is not required.
Note: After updating the license file, refresh the browser to see the current list of features enabled.

Process Status
The Process Status page lists all processes related to your system and enables you to view the details
of those processes and start, stop, or restart them.

To view the Process Status page:
1. Click Administration > Setup > System Admin.
2. In System section, click Process Status.
3. To view the details of a process, click the

icon to the left of the process name.

4. To start, stop, or restart a process, select the process and click Start, Stop, or Restart at the top of
the Processes list.

System Settings
If you did not select ArcSight Management Center to start as service during the installation process, you
can do so using the System Settings page.

To configure ArcSight Management Center to start as a service:
1. Click Administration > Setup> System Admin.
2. Click System Settings in the left panel.
3. From under Service Settings, choose the appropriate option:
l Start as a Service
l

Do not start as a Service

4. Click Save.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 227 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

SNMP
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) can be used to monitor the health of your
appliance.ArcMC supports versions 2c and 3 of SNMP.

SNMP Configuration
You can configure SNMP polling and notifications. If SNMP polling is configured, a manager station can
query the SNMP agent residing on the ArcMC. The information retrieved provides detailed information
at the hardware and operating system level.

To configure SNMP polling:
1. In the main menu bar, click Administration > Setup> System Admin
2. In the navigation tree, under System, click SNMP.
3. On the SNMP Poll Configuration tab, ensure Enabled is selected.
l

l

For Port, the default is 161 but can be any available port. Ensure the specified port is open on
your firewall.
For SNMP version, select V2c or V3,
l If V2c is selected, specify a community string of between 6 and 128 alphanumeric, underscore,
and dash characters.
l

If V3 is selected, specify the username (alphanumeric lower-case string of 4-16 characters,
which must begin with an alphabetic characters and may include underscores),
authentication protocol, authentication passphrase (4 to 256 characters), privacy protocol,
and privacy passphrase (4 to 256 characters).

4. Click Save.
If an SNMP destination is configured, ArcMC can send notifications for a limited set of events (see
"Viewing SNMP System Information" on the next page
SNMP notifications differ from those sent by connectors, which are for a generic ArcSight event. The
notifications listed here are specific to a single event, making them easier for understanding by a
network management system like HPE NMMi.

To configure the destination for SNMP notifications:
1. In the main menu bar, click Administration > System Admin
2. In the navigation tree, under System, click SNMP.
3. On the SNMP Destination tab, ensure Enabled is selected. Then, enter values for the other
parameters that match your existing NMS SNMP settings.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 228 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

l

l

For Port, enter 162. (Note: Specifying a non-default port may cause a brief delay. Give the
process time to complete.)
For SNMP version, select V2c or V3,and then enter values for the prompted settings.

4. Click Save

Viewing SNMP System Information
SNMP notifications are viewable in any MIB browser. The following SNMP notifications are supported:
l

l

Application
o Login attempt failed
o

Password change attempt failed

o

User account locked

o

Reboot command launched

o

Manual backup failed

o

Enable FIPS mode successful

o

Disable FIPS mode successful

o

Enable FIPS mode failed

o

Disable FIPS mode failed

Platform
o CPU Usage
o

Memory Usage

o

Disk Almost Full

o

Fan Failure

o

Power Supply Failure

o

Temperature Out of Range

o

Ethernet Link Down

To view system notifications in an MIB browser:
On your appliance:
You can download the ArcSight MIB file and other standard Net-SNMP MIB files using the following
URLs:
l

https:///platform-service/ARCSIGHT-EVENT-MIB.txt

l

https:///platform-service/DISMAN-EVENT-MIB.txt

l

https:///platform-service/HOST-RESOURCES-MIB.txt

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 229 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

l

https:///platform-service/IF-MIB.txt

l

https:///platform-service/UCD-SNMP-MIB.txt

On any standard MIB browser:
1. Load the MIB.
2. Specify the address and port number of the SNMP agent—your appliance, in this case.
3. Configure the community string that is set on your appliance.
4. Initiate the snmp WALK operation of the OID from the browser.
5. Once the SNMP data is returned, interpret it based on the information described earlier in this
section.

MIB Contents
Notifications are written to the following modules of the MIB file:
Module

Notification Types

HOST-RESOURCES-MIB Standard hardware parameters.
IF-MIB

Objects for network interfaces.

IP-MIB

IP and ICMP implementations.

DISMAN-EVENT-MIB

Event triggers and actions for standard network management.

SSH Access to the Appliance
You can enable SSH access to the appliance. By default, SSH access to your appliance is disabled. For
best security, it is strongly recommended that you enable SSH access only when necessary, such as for
troubleshooting purposes.
Caution: By default, you are not prompted for a challenge/response when logging in using SSH.
(This represents a change from the configuration of Connector Appliance.)
As a result, it is imperative that you change the default password for the “root” account on the
ArcSight Management Center Appliance to a new, strong password as soon as possible. To obtain
the default root password, contact HPE ArcSight Customer Support.
Enablement options include:

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 230 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

l

Disabled: No SSH access is enabled. This is the default value.

l

Enabled: SSH access is always enabled.

l

Enabled, only for 8 hours: SSH access is disabled automatically eight hours after it was enabled.

l

Enabled, only during startup/reboot: SSH access is enabled during the time the appliance reboots
and is starting up. It is disabled once all processes on the appliance are up and running. This option
provides a minimal period of SSH access for situations such as when the appliance does not start
successfully after a reboot.
Note: Even if SSH is disabled on your appliance, you can access its console if you have it set up
for remote access using the HPE Security ProLiant Integrated Lights-Out (iLO) Advanced
remote management card.

Enabling or Disabling SSH Access
To enable or disable SSH access to your appliance:
1. Click Administration > Setup >System Admin from the top-level menu bar.
2. Click SSH in the System section.
3. Select an SSH enablement option.
4. Confirm the option. The change takes place immediately.

Connecting to Your Appliance Using SSH
Once you have enabled SSH access, follow these steps to connect to it using SSH:
1. Connect to the appliance as “root” using an SSH client.
2. When prompted to enter a password, enter a password and press Enter.

Diagnostic Tools
ArcSight Management Center provides several diagnostic tools that help you set up, manage, and
troubleshoot your appliance. You can run these diagnostics on the local appliance only. To run a
diagnostic tool on a remote container, refer to "Running Diagnostics on a Container" on page 93.

To access the diagnostic tools:
1. Click Administration > Setup > System Admin from the top-level menu bar.
2. Click Diagnostic Tools in the System section in the left panel to open the Diagnostic Tools page.
3. From the Tool drop-down box, select the tool you want to use.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 231 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

4. Enter the required parameters for the tool you selected and click Run (click Edit for the Edit text file
tool).
Each tool and the parameters and buttons available is described below.

Display I/O Statistics
Use the Display I/O Statistics tool to monitor input/output statistics for devices, partitions, and network
file systems on the appliance. This tool is equivalent to the Linux command iostat.
This tool uses the parameters described below:
Parameter

Description

Match
Expression

Type an expression to display only lines in the file that match that expression. Linux regular
expressions are supported.
Note: The expression is case sensitive.

Exclude
Expression

Type an expression to exclude lines that match that expression from the display. Linux regular
expressions are supported.
Note: The expression is case sensitive.

Display file
Use Display file to display the contents of a file. This tool is equivalent to the Linux command cat.
This tool uses the parameters described below:
Parameter/Button Description
Category

Select the type of file you want to display.

File

Displays a list of files for the type selected in the Category field (described above). Select the file
you want to display from the list.
Note: Appliance models Cx400 do not have any boot log files; selecting Boot Log from the File
list displays an empty pop-up window.

Match Expression

Type an expression to display only lines in the file that match that expression. Linux regular
expressions are supported.
Note: The expression is case sensitive.

Exclude Expression

Type an expression to exclude lines that match that expression from the display. Linux regular
expressions are supported.
Note: The expression is case sensitive.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 232 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

Parameter/Button Description
Display

You can limit the number of lines you want to display.
l

l

Select Beginning of file to limit the display to the number of lines specified in the Number of
Lines field (described below) starting from the top of the file.
Select End of file to limit the display to the number of lines specified in the Number of Lines
field (described below) starting from the bottom of the file.

Note: If you select Beginning of file or End of file, you also need to specify a value in the
Number of Lines field, described below.
To display all the lines in the file, leave both the Display and the Number of Lines field empty.
Number of Lines

Specify the number of lines you want to display from the beginning or end of the file.
If you enter an expression to match or exclude, the display contains or omits the first (if you select
Beginning of file) or last (if you select End of file) number of occurrences of that expression. For
example, if you enter TCP in the Exclude Expression field, then select Beginning of file from the
Display drop-down, and enter 10 in the Number of Lines field, the display contains the first 10
occurrences of the expression TCP found starting from the beginning of the file.
Note: To display all the lines in the file, leave this field and the Display field (described above)
empty.

Run

Click this button to display the contents of the selected file. The file contents display in a pop-up
window.

Display network connections
Use Display network connections to review your network connections and transport protocol statistics.
The status information can indicate areas where a protocol is having a problem.
This tool is equivalent to the Linux command netstat -pn [-t] [-u] [-w] [a] [-l] [-c].
This tool uses the parameters described below:

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 233 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

Parameter/Button Description
Protocol

Leave this field empty to display statistics for all transport protocols or select from these options:
l

l

l

Connection

TCP only displays TCP protocol statistics. This option is equivalent to the netstat Linux
command option -t .
UDP only displays UDP protocol statistics. This option is equivalent to the netstat Linux
command option -u .

Leave this field empty to display information for all non-listening connections or select from
these options:
l

l

Mode

RAW only displays raw IP protocol statistics. This option is equivalent to the netstat Linux
command option -w .

All connections displays information for all current connections. This option is equivalent to
the netstat Linux command option -a .
Listening connections displays information for listening connections only. This option is
equivalent to the netstat Linux command option -l .

Select Run Continuously to poll the network status continuously every five minutes. This option
is equivalent to the netstat Linux command option -c .
When Run Continuously is not selected, the network status is polled once.

Match Expression

Enter an expression to display only lines that match that expression in the output. Linux regular
expressions are supported.

Exclude Expression

Enter an expression to exclude lines that match that expression from the output. Linux regular
expressions are supported.

Run

Click this button to display the network connection information. The information displays in a
pop-up window.

Display network interface details
Use Display network interface details to display the status of a currently active interface on the
appliance. This tool is equivalent to the Linux command ifconfig.
This tool uses the parameters described below:
Parameter/Button Description
Interface

Select the network interface on the appliance whose status you want to display.
Note: If you leave this field empty, the status of all active network interfaces display.

Run

Click this button to display the status of the selected network interface. The status displays in a
pop-up window.

Display network traffic
Use Display network traffic to monitor packets that are transmitted and received on the network. This
tool is equivalent to the Linux command tcpdump.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 234 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration
This tool uses the parameters described below:
Parameter/Button Description
Host

Specify the IP address or hostname of the host you want to monitor.

Match Expression

Enter an expression to show only network traffic that matches that expression in the display; For
example, if you specify the expression echo , only network traffic from the specified host that
includes the expression echo is displayed.
Linux regular expressions are supported.

Exclude Expression

Enter an expression to exclude network traffic that matches that expression from the display; For
example, if you specify the expression echo , all traffic except traffic that contains echo will be
displayed.
Linux regular expressions are supported.

Run

Click this button to display network traffic between the appliance and the specified host. The
information displays in a pop-up window.

Display process summary
Use Display process summary to show a list of the currently running processes and see how long they
have been running. This tool is equivalent to the Linux command
top -b -n 1.
This tool uses the parameters described below:
Parameter/Button Description
Match Expression

Enter an expression to display only processes that match that expression. Linux regular
expressions are supported.

Exclude Expression

Enter an expression to exclude processes that match that expression from the display. Linux
regular expressions are supported.

Run

Click this button to display the list of currently running processes. The list displays in a pop-up
window.

Display routing table
Use Display routing table to see the routes through which traffic flows from the appliance. This tool is
equivalent to the Linux command ip route.
This tool uses the parameters described below:

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 235 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

Parameter/Button Description
Destination Host

l
l

Run

Leave this field empty to see the entire IP routing table.
Specify the IP address or hostname of a host to see IP routing information from the appliance
to that host.

Click this button to obtain the routing table. The routing table displays in a pop-up window.

Edit text file
Use Edit text file to edit files on the appliance. This tool uses the parameters described below:
Parameter/Button Description
Category

Select the type of file you want to edit.

File

Displays a list of files for the type selected in the Category field (described above). Select the file
you want to edit.

Edit

Click this button to display the file for editing. After editing the file, click Save or Revert.

Save

Click this button to save the edits you make to the file.

Revert

Click this button to cancel the edits you make to the file. After clicking Revert, click Save to save
the reverted text.

List directory
Use List directory to display the contents of a directory on the appliance. This tool is equivalent to the
Linux command ls -alh.
This tool uses the parameters described below:
Parameter/Button Description
Directory

Specify the directory whose contents you want to display. For example:
/opt/arcsight/appliance

Run

Click this button to display the directory list. The list displays in a pop-up window.

List open files
Use List open files to display a list of files in use. This tool uses the parameters described below:

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 236 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

Parameter/Button Description
Match Expression

Enter an expression to display only the top processes that match that expression. Linux regular
expressions are supported.

Exclude Expression

Enter an expression to exclude processes that match that expression from the display. Linux
regular expressions are supported.

Run

Click this button to display the list of the top processes. The list displays in a pop-up window.

List processes
Use List processes to display the top CPU processes that are currently running together with memory
and resource information. This tool is equivalent to the Linux command
ps -ef.
This tool uses the parameters described below:
Parameter/Button Description
Match Expression

Enter an expression to display only the top processes that match that expression. Linux regular
expressions are supported.

Exclude Expression

Enter an expression to exclude processes that match that expression from the display. Linux
regular expressions are supported.

Run

Click this button to display the list of the top processes. The list displays in a pop-up window.

Ping host
Use Ping host to test if a particular host is reachable across an IP network and to measure the roundtrip time for packets sent from the appliance to the host. This tool is equivalent to the Linux command
ping.
This tool uses the parameters described below:
Parameter/Button

Description

Host

Specify the IP address or hostname of the host you want to ping.

Run

Click this button to ping the specified host. The ping results display in a pop-up window.

Resolve hostname or IP Address
Use Resolve hostname to look up a hostname in the Domain Name Server and convert it to an IP
address . This tool is equivalent to the Linux command host.
This tool uses the parameters described below:

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 237 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

Parameter/Button Description
Hostname

Specify the hostname you want to resolve to an IP address .

Run

Click this button to look up the hostname in the Domain Name Server. The result displays in a
pop-up window.

Scan network ports
Use Scan network ports to scan a specific host on the network for open ports. This tool is equivalent to
the Linux command nmap [-p].
This tool uses the parameters described below:
Parameter/Button Description
Host

Specify the IP address or hostname of the host whose ports you want to scan.

Port Range

Optional. Specify a range of ports you want to scan. Separate port numbers in a range by a dash
(-) and individual port numbers by a comma. For example, 80-90, 8080.
If you do not provide a port range, all ports on the specified host are scanned.
This option is equivalent to the netstat Linux command option -p .

Run

Click this button to start scanning ports on the specified host. The result displays in a pop-up
window.

Send signal to container
Use Send signal to container to send a terminate command to a container. This tool is equivalent to the
Linux command kill -severity (where severity is either -15 or -9).
This tool uses the parameters described below:
Parameter/Button Description
Severity

Select the severity of the terminate command you want to send to the container. You can select
KILL (Linux kill command option -9 ) or TERM (Linux kill command option -15 ).

Container

Select the container to which you want to send the signal.

Run

Click this button to send the signal. The result displays in a pop-up window.

Tail file
Use Tail file to display the last ten lines of a system, application, or log file. This tool is equivalent to the
Linux command tail -f.
This tool uses the parameters described below:

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 238 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

Parameter/Button Description
Category

Select the type of file you want to edit.

File

Displays a list of files for the category selected in the Category field (described above). Select
the file from which you want to display the last ten lines.

Match Expression

Enter an expression to display only lines that match that expression. Linux regular expressions
are supported.

Exclude Expression

Enter an expression to exclude lines from the display that match that expression. Linux regular
expressions are supported.

Run

Click this button to display the last ten lines of the file you selected. The lines display in a pop-up
window.

Trace network route
Use Trace network route to display the specific network route between the appliance and a specified
host. This tool is equivalent to the Linux command traceroute.
This tool uses the parameters described below:
Parameter/Button

Description

Host

Specify the IP address or hostname of the host whose route you want to trace.

Run

Click this button to display the network route. The information displays in a pop-up window.

Logs
Your system can generate audit logs at the application and platform levels. Use the Logs sub-menu to
search audit logs and to configure audit forwarding so that the system can send audit events to a
destination, such as ESM.

Audit Logs
Your system’s audit logs are available for viewing. Audit logs, as Common Event Format (CEF) audit
events, can be sent to ArcSight ESM directly for analysis and correlation. For information about
forwarding audit events, see "Configuring Audit Forwarding to a Specific Destination" on page 241.
Audit logs are retained permanently by ArcMC.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 239 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

To view audit logs:
1. Click Administration > System Admin.
2. Click Audit Logs in the Logs section.
3. Select the date and time range for which you want to obtain the log.
4. (Optional) To refine the audit log search, specify a string in the Description field and a user name
in the User field. When a string is specified, only logs whose Description field contains the string
are displayed. Similarly, when a user is specified, only logs whose User field contains the username
are displayed.
5. Click Search.

Configuring Audit Forwarding
To configure audit forwarding, you must install a single syslog connector in an ArcSight Management
Center container. (The connector may be the only connector in the container.)
The procedure for configuring audit forwarding differs for Software ArcSight Management Center and
ArcSight Management Center Appliance.
Note: If ArcSight Management Center has been installed by a root user, the syslog connector
should also be configured under the root user.
If the installation was by a non-root user, the syslog connector should be configured under the
non-root user.

For Software ArcSight Management Center
To configure audit forwarding for Software ArcSight Management Center:
1. Install the local Syslog Daemon connector to /opt/arcsight/connector.
2. Configure audit forwarding for the container that has the Syslog Daemon connector. Refer to
"Configuring Audit Forwarding to a Specific Destination" on the next page.
3. Click System Admin from the menu bar. In the navigation tree, select the newly-installed syslog
connector and enable audit forwarding.

For ArcSight Management Center Appliance
To configure audit forwarding for ArcSight Management Center Appliance:
1. In the menu bar, click Node Management.
2. In the navigation tree, select the default location. Then, in the management panel, select the local

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 240 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

host.
3. Select the container in which to install the syslog connector.
4. Click Add Connector and choose syslog as the connector to be installed.
5. Configure audit forwarding for the container that has the Syslog Daemon connector. Refer to
"Configuring Audit Forwarding to a Specific Destination" below.
6. Click System Admin from the menu bar. In the navigation tree, select the newly-installed syslog
connector and enable audit forwarding.

Configuring Audit Forwarding to a Specific Destination
You can forward audit and system health events to an ArcSight ESM destination for correlation and
analysis, and to Logger for event collection.

To forward audit events to specific destinations:
1. Click Setup > System Admin from the top-level menu bar.
2. Click Audit Forwarding in the Logs section.
3. Select destinations from the Available Destinations list and click the right arrow icon ( ) to
move the selected destination to the Selected Destinations list.
You can select multiple destinations at the same time and move them, or you can move all available
destinations by clicking the ( ) icon.
4. Click Save Settings.
Note: Destinations will not be displayed in Software ArcSight Management Center.

Storage
Use the Storage sub-menu to add an NFS mount or a CIFS mount, or SAN (if applicable) and to view
the status of the hard disk array (RAID) controller and specific system processes.

RAID Controller/Hard Disk SMART Data
You can view information about the RAID controller or hard disk SMART data in the General Controller
Information screen. This information is not needed during normal system operations, but it can be
helpful for diagnosing specific hardware issues. Due to the redundant nature of RAID storage, a single
drive failure will not disable your system. Instead, performance degrades. Use this report to determine
whether a performance issue is caused by a disk failure. Customer support can also use this information
to diagnose problems.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 241 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

To view the General Controller Information screen:
1. Click Administration > Setup > System Admin from the top-level menu bar.
2. Click RAID Controller in the Storage section in the left panel.

3.

Note: On some older models, the Hard Disk SMART Data menu item displays in the left pane
instead of the RAID Controller menu item. Click Hard Disk SMART Data in the Storage
section in the left pane to display diagnostic information from the hard drive.

4. The information displayed depends on the hardware model of your system. Click the arrows to
open and close the sections.

FTP
ArcSight Management Center allows for the use of FTP and FTPS (FTP over SSL) as a method of
delivering log files to the appliance. The default state for FTP and FTPS is disabled.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 242 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration
Blue Coat ProxySG appliances, in particular, support FTP and FTPS as a means of transferring files to
ArcSight Management Center (For details on this and other methods, refer to the SmartConnector
Configuration Guide for Blue Coat ProxySG).
FTPS
FTP can also be used over a secure channel, namely SSL. The use of FTPS requires that a certificate be
generated on ArcSight Management Center. This certificate can be self-signed or signed by a certificate
authority (CA). For detailed instructions on this option, see "Using FTPS (FTP over SSL)" on page 245.

Models Supporting FTP
The following table lists the ArcSight Management Center models that support the use of FTP. It can
also assist in determining the maximum directory size allowed for storing files received over these
protocols.
Note: If the maximum directory size is exceeded, FTP is disabled and audit event platform:453,
FTP service stopped is sent. Until the directory size is lowered, all FTP connections are denied.

Model Name

Maximum Directory Size (GB)

C1400

275

C3400

275

C3500

475

C5400

235

C5500

475

C6500

500

C6600

500

Enabling FTP
In order to use the FTP protocol, you need to enable it on the appliance and set a maximum directory
size for the accumulated files.
1. Click Administration > Setup > System Admin from the top-level menu bar.
2. Click FTP under the Storage section.
3. From within FTP Settings, check the Enable FTP check box.
4. If your FTP client is behind a firewall and you need to limit the ports used for passive mode data
transfer, check the Restrict port range... check box.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 243 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

l

Port Range allows you to set either an individual port (e.g., 12345) or a single port range (e.g.,
20001-20010). Ensure any ports specified open on your firewall.
Note: When choosing a port or port range, choose a port that is unlikely to already be in use.
If a chosen port is already in use, . For this FTP data transfers will fail. For this reason, HPE
Security recommends using ports in the range of 10000 and above.

l

The number of concurrent passive mode FTP clients is restricted to the number of ports
specified. For example, if the specified range is 10 ports, then only 10 concurrent passive FTP
clients can be transferring at the same time.
Tip: Is FTP Running? verifies (Yes or No) that your FTP server is running successfully.

5. Enter a maximum directory size.
l

The maximum directory size cannot be greater than that allowed on your appliance model (see
"Models Supporting FTP" on the previous page).

l

If you change the maximum size, it must be greater than the value in the Current Size field.

l

Current Size includes /opt/arcsight/incoming and all underlying subdirectories.

l

If the maximum you have set is exceeded, FTP stops automatically.

l

Once the file limitation is back within range, FTP automatically restarts.

6. Enter a password.
Caution: Anonymous FTP is not supported.
7. Click Save.
l

l

Only file put operations are supported by the FTP server. There is no capability to retrieve
data from the appliance.
Data is processed faster and more efficiently when transferred in many small files instead of
a few large files.

Adding a Subdirectory
Based on naming convention, incoming log files from different devices can potentially conflict within the
same directory. To prevent this, you can create subdirectories to separate them. This window also
shows the current size of the subdirectory.
Tip: Creating subdirectories is a good practice, as it allows you to verify how much space is being
used and to easily delete subsets of file data.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 244 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

To add files to the subdirectory:
1. From within the appliance, go to Setup > System Admin > FTP.
2. In the Subdirectory window, click Add to name the subdirectory.
The name appears in the window and displays its current size. Ensure that the directory name
matches the one configured on the FTP server.
Note: When naming subdirectories, the standard Linux directory naming conventions apply.

Processing Log Data Received via FTP
Receiving input from a connector via FTP requires that some steps be performed outside of the
appliance. The following steps allow for the successful transfer of log data.
1. Enable FTP on the appliance. For detailed instructions, see "Enabling FTP" on page 243.
2. Configure the SmartConnector. For instructions on how to do this, see the SmartConnector
Configuration Guide for Blue Coat ProxySG.
Tip: When configuring the Blue Coat SmartConnector for use with FTP, set up the
SmartConnector to delete files after processing. This step helps to prevent an over
accumulation of files on the FTP server.
To do so, in the agent.properties, change agents[0].foldertable
[0].mode=RenameInSameDirectory to agents[0].foldertable[0].mode=DeleteFile.
3.
Tip: When configuring the Blue Coat SmartConnector for use with FTP, point the connector
to /opt/arcsight/incoming/.
4. Configure the device. For instructions on how to do this, see the documentation for your device.

Using FTPS (FTP over SSL)
FTPS is FTP used over a secure SSL channel. The use of FTPS requires that a certificate is generated on
ArcSight Management Center.

Using FTPS with Blue Coat ProxySG
The use of FTPS requires several steps on both ArcSight Management Center and the Blue Coat
ProxySG appliance. The first step is that a self-signed certificate or CSR is generated on ArcSight
Management Center. If the certificate is self-signed, it must be imported into the Blue Coat ProxySG

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 245 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration
appliance. If signed by a CA, the certificate of the CA must be imported into the Blue Coat ProxySG
appliance.

On ArcSight Management Center:
1. Generate the certificate (either a self-signed certificate or CSR) on ArcSight Management Center.
l For a self-signed certificate, see "Generating a Self-Signed Certificate" on the next page.
l

For a CA-signed certificate, see "Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)" on page 248
and "Importing a Certificate" on page 250.

2. Enable FTP on Connector Appliance. For detailed steps, see "Enabling FTP" on page 243.

On the Blue Coat ProxySG Appliance:
See your current Blue Coat ProxySG documentation for detailed instructions to complete the following
necessary steps.
1. Import the self-signed or the certificate of the CA into the Blue Coat ProxySG appliance. If
importing a self-signed certificate into the Blue Coat ProxySG appliance, click the View Certificate
button on the Generate Certificate page to display the certificate to be used with FTPS. Copy its
entire contents and paste it into the Import CA Certificate window on the BlueCoat ProxySG
appliance.
2. Add the imported certificate into the browser-trusted CA Certificates Lists on the Blue Coat
ProxySG.
3. Configure the FTP upload client on the Blue Coat ProxySG appliance, ensuring that you select
the option to use secure connections.
4. Run an upload test on the Blue Coat ProxySG appliance to verify that it was able to successfully
upload its log files to Connector Appliance over FTPS.

Security
Security settings enable you to configure SSL server certificates, enable and disable FIPS (Federal
Information Processing Standards) mode on your system, and configure SSL client authentication for
client certificate and Common Access Card (CAC) support.
Tip: For steps on how to create a user DN, see "Users" on page 263, and refer to the section “Use
Client DN” in the parameters table.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 246 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

SSL Server Certificate
Your system uses Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) technology to communicate securely over an encrypted
channel with its clients, such as SmartConnectors, when using the SmartMessaging technology and
other ArcSight systems. Your system ships with a self-signed certificate so that an SSL session can be
established the first time you use the appliance. For more information on this option, see "Generating a
Self-Signed Certificate" below.
Although a self-signed certificate is provided for your use, you should use a certificate authority (CA)
signed certificate. To facilitate obtaining a CA-signed certificate, your system can generate a Certificate
Signing Request. After a signed certificate file is available from the CA, it can be uploaded to your
system for use in a subsequent authentication. For detailed instructions, see "Generating a Certificate
Signing Request (CSR)" on the next page.
Your system generates an audit event when the installed SSL certificate is going to expire in less than
30 days or has already expired. The event with Device Event Class ID “platform:407” is generated
periodically until you replace the certificate with one that is not due to expire within 30 days.

Generating a Self-Signed Certificate
Your system ships with a self-signed certificate so that an SSL session can be established the first time
you connect. This type of certificate does not require signing from another entity and can be used
immediately.

To generate a self-signed certificate:
1. Click Administration > Setup > System Admin.
2. Click SSL Server Certificate from the Security section in the left panel to display the Generate
Certificate/Certificate Signing Request page.
3. Click the Generate Certificate tab.
4. From the Generate Certificate For Protocol field, use the Network Protocol drop-down menu
to choose the appropriate protocol
Parameter Description
HTTPS

Choose this option to generate a CSR for use with the HTTPS protocol. This is the most commonly
used option.

FTPS

Choose this option only when generating a CSR for use with FTPS.

5. From the Enter Certificate Settings field, enter new values for the following fields:

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 247 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

Parameter

Description

Country

ISO 3166-1 two-letter country code, such as ‘US’ for the United States.

State/Province State or province name, such as ‘California.’
City/Locality

City name, such as ‘Sunnyvale’.

Organization
Name

Company name, governmental entity, or similar overall organization.

Organizational Division or department within the organization.
Unit
Hostname

The host name or IP address of this system.
When specifying the host name, make sure that this name matches the name registered in the
Domain Name Service (DNS) server for the system. Additionally, this name must be identical to
the host name specified in "NICs" on page 222.
Note: If the host name or IP address of this system changes in the future, you must generate a
new self-signed certificate or CSR. After a new certificate is obtained, you must upload it to
ensure that the connectors which communicate with the system are able to validate the host
name.

Email Address The email address of the administrator or contact person for this CSR.
Private Key
Length

Private key length is 2048 bits.

Use the first two buttons to generate a CSR or a self-signed certificate. The View Certificate
button is only used to view the resulting certificate.
Button

Description

Generate CSR

Click to generate a Certificate Signing Request (CSR).

Generate Certificate

Click to generate a self-signed certificate.

View Certificate

Click to view the generated certificate.

6. Click the Generate Certificate button to generate the self-signed certificate.
7. Click Ok after the confirmation message appears.
8. Click the View Certificate button to view the PEM encoded self-signed certificate.

Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
The first step in obtaining a CA-signed certificate is to generate a Certificate Signing Request (CSR).
The CSR must be generated on the system for which you are requesting a certificate. That is, you
cannot generate a CSR for System A on System B or use a third-party utility for generation.
The resulting CSR must be sent to a CA, such as VeriSign, which responds with a signed certificate file.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 248 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

To generate a certificate signing request:
1. Click Administration > System Admin.
2. Click SSL Server Certificate from the Security section in the left panel to display the Generate
Certificate/Certificate Signing Request page.
3. Click the Generate Certificate tab.
4. From the Generate Certificate For Protocol field, use the Network Protocol drop-down menu
to choose the appropriate protocol. From the Generate Certificate For Protocol field, use the
Network Protocol drop-down menu to choose the appropriate protocol.
Parameter Description
HTTPS

Choose this option to generate a CSR for use with the HTTPS protocol. This is the most commonly
used option.

FTPS

Choose this option only when generating a CSR for use with FTPS.

5. From the Enter Certificate Settings field, enter new values for the following fields:
Parameter

Description

Country

A two-letter country code, such as ‘US’ for the United States.

State /
Province

State or province name, such as ‘California.’

City / Locality

City name, such as ‘Sunnyvale’.

Organization
Name

Company name, governmental entity, or similar overall organization.

Organizational Division or department within the organization.
Unit
Hostname

The host name or IP address of this system.
When specifying the host name, make sure that this name matches the name registered in the
Domain Name Service (DNS) server for the system. Additionally, this name must be identical to
the host name specified in "NICs" on page 222.
Note: If the host name or IP address of this system changes in the future, you must generate a
new self-signed certificate or CSR. After a new certificate is obtained, you must upload it to
ensure that the connectors which communicate with the system are able to validate the host
name.

Email Address The email address of the administrator or contact person for this CSR.
Private Key
Length

Select the length (in bits) of the private key: 1024, 2048, 4096, or 8192.

6.
Use the first two buttons to generate a CSR or a self-signed certificate. The View Certificate
button is only used to view the resulting certificate.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 249 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

Button

Description

Generate CSR

Click to generate a Certificate Signing Request (CSR).

Generate Certificate

Click to generate a self-signed certificate.

View Certificate

Click to view the generated certificate.

7. Choose Generate CSR to generate a certificate signing request.
8. If the CSR was successfully generated, a pop-up window appears, allowing you to either download
the CSR file or to cut-and-paste its content.
To do so, copy all the lines from -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST----- to -----END
CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----.
9. Send the CSR file to your certificate authority to obtain the CA-signed certificate.
10. After the CA-signed certificate file is obtained, continue on to "Importing a Certificate" below
below.

Importing a Certificate
If you have obtained a certificate from your certificate authority (CA), follow the steps below to import
it onto your system.
1. Click Administration > System Admin.
2. Click SSL Server Certificate under the Security section in the left panel.
3. Select the Import Certificate tab.
4. From the Import Certificate For Protocol field, use the Network Protocol drop-down menu to
select the appropriate protocol type.
Parameter

Description

HTTPS

Choose to import an HTTPS certificate. (This option may require a reboot).

FTPS

Choose to import an FTPS certificate.

5. Click the Browse button to locate the signed certificate file on your local file system.
Note: The imported certificate must be in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format.
6. Click Import and Install to import the specified certificate.
7. If using HTTPS and depending on your browser, you may need to close and restart the browser for
the new certificate to take effect. If you are unsure of your browser's requirements, close and
restart it.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 250 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

SSL Client Authentication
Your system supports client authentication using SSL certificates. SSL client authentication is a form of
two-factor authentication that can be used as an alternate or in addition to local password
authentication.
Note: CAC is a form of client certificate authentication. Information on client certificate
authentication applies to CAC.
To configure ArcMC to support CAC, you need to upload a trusted certificate, and enable client
certificate authentication.

Uploading Trusted Certificates
A trusted certificate is used to authenticate users that log in to your system. Uploading a trusted
certificate is required if you are using LDAPS authentication. The trusted certificate is used to
authenticate the remote LDAPS server. The certificate needs to be in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM)
format.

To upload a trusted certificate:
1. Click Administration > Setup > System Admin.
2. Click SSL Client Authentication in the Security section in the left panel.
3. On the Trusted Certificates tab, click Browse to find the trusted certificate on your local file
system.
4. Click Upload.
The trusted certificate is uploaded and listed in the “Certificates in Repository” list on the same
page where you uploaded it.
To view details about a trusted certificate, click the link displayed in the Certificate Name column.
To delete a trusted certificate, select the certificate and click Delete.

Uploading a Certificate Revocation List
A certificate revocation list (CRL) is a computer-generated record that identifies certificates that have
been revoked or suspended before their expiration dates. To support CAC, you need to upload a CRL
file to your ArcSight system. The CRL file needs to be in PEM format.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 251 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

To upload a CRL file:
1. Click Administration > System Admin.
2. Click SSL Client Authentication in the Security section in the left panel.
3. In the Certificate Revocation List tab, click Browse to find the CRL file on your local file system.
4. Click Upload.
The CRL is uploaded and listed in the Certificate Revocation List.
To view details about a CRL, click the link displayed in the Issuer Name column.
To delete a CRL file, select it and click the Delete button.

Enabling Client Certificate Authentication
To enable client certificate authentication, see "Client Certificate Authentication " on page 257.

FIPS 140-2
Your system supports the Federal Information Processing Standard 140-2 (FIPS 140-2). FIPS 140-2 is a
standard published by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) and is used to
accredit cryptographic modules in software components. The US Federal government requires that all
IT products dealing with Sensitive, but Unclassified (SBU) information meet these standards.
If your system needs to be FIPS 140-2 compliant, you can enable FIPS. Once you do so, the system uses
the cryptographic algorithms defined by the NIST for FIPS 140-2 for all encrypted communication
between its internal and external components.
Note: Do not perform any FIPS-related activity on the appliance while a FIPS mode change is in
progress.
To be fully FIPS 140-2 compliant, all components that work together need to be in FIPS mode. For
example, when you enable FIPS on ArcSight Management Center, the appliance becomes FIPS enabled
and meets the standards for cryptographic algorithms defined by the NIST. However, containers must
also have FIPS enabled.
Note: In ArcSight Management Center, enabling FIPS mode will disable the ability to regenerate a
self-signed certificate.

To enable or disable FIPS mode:
1. Click Administration > Setup > System Admin from the top-level menu bar.
2. Click FIPS 140-2 in the Security section in the left panel.
3. Click Enable or Disable for the Select FIPS Mode option.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 252 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

4. Click Save.
5. When the Application Reboot Restart Required message displays, restart your system. click the
System Reboot link.
6. Check that the appropriate CA certificates are present in the trust store so that connectors can
validate their destinations (ArcSight ESM or ArcSight Management Center) successfully. If the
appropriate CA certificates are not in the trust store, you need to add them. For information on
viewing and adding certificates, see "Sending a Command to a Container" on page 82.

Users/Groups on ArcMC
Use the Users/Groups sub-menu to configure users and user groups on ArcMC, and to set
authentication options.
For managing users of managed products, see "Managing Users on Managed Products" on
page 170.

Authentication
Authentication Settings enable you to specify the settings and policies for user login sessions,
password rules and lockouts, and external authentication options.

Sessions
The Session tab enables you to specify the maximum number of simultaneous sessions for a single user
account, and the length of time after which a user session is automatically logged out or a user account
disabled. By default, a single user account can have up to 15 simultaneous active sessions, and a user
account is logged out after 15 minutes of inactivity.

To change session settings:
1. Click Administration > Setup > System Admin.
2. Click Authentication in the Users/Groups section.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 253 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

3. On the Sessions tab, update the parameters described in the following table.
Parameters

Description

Max
The maximum number of simultaneous sessions allowed for a single user account. The default
Simultaneous is 15 sessions.
Logins/User
Logout
The length of time, in minutes, after which an inactive session is automatically ended. The default
Inactive
is 15 minutes.
Session After This value does not apply to the user interface pages accessed through the Monitor menu. If a
user is on any of the Monitor menu pages and the session has been inactive for the specified
number of minutes, the user’s session remains active.
Disable
Inactive
Account
After

The number of days after which an inactive user account is disabled. The default is 0, meaning
the account is never disabled.

4. Click Save to make the changes, or click another tab to cancel.

Local Password
The Local Password tab enables you to set password policies, such as the minimum and maximum
number of characters and other password requirements.

To change the password settings:
1. Click Administration > System Admin.
2. Click Authentication in the Users/Groups section.
3. Choose the Local Password tab.
Use the parameters described in the following table to customize your password settings.
Authentication Settings, Local Password tab
Parameter

Description

Lockout Account (policy)
Enable Account Lockout

Select the checkbox to enable user accounts to be locked out as defined by the
following settings. By default, the policy is disabled.

Lockout Account After

Number of failed login attempts after which a user account is locked out. The default
is 3.

Remember Failed
Attempts For

The length of time, in minutes, for which a failed login attempt is remembered. The
default is 1.

Lockout Account For

The length of time, in minutes, for which a locked out account cannot be unlocked.
The default is 15.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 254 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

Authentication Settings, Local Password tab, continued
Parameter

Description

Password Expiration (policy)
Enable Password
Expiration

Select the checkbox to enable user passwords to expire as defined by the following
settings. By default, the policy is disabled.

Password Expires in

Number of days after which the password expires. The default is 90.

Notify User

Number of days before expiration to notify the user. Select this option to allow users to
update their password before expiration. The default is 5.

Users Exempted From
Password Expiration
Policy

Click the link to set the number of users whose password should never expire.
For information on how to use this feature, see "Users Exempted From Password
Expiration" on the next page.

Password Strength Rules (policy)
Enforce Password
Strength

Select the checkbox to enforce password policy as defined by the following settings.
By default, the policy is disabled.

Minimum Length

Minimum number of characters that a password must contain. The default is 10.

Maximum Length

Maximum number of characters that a password can contain. The default is 20.

Password Character Rules
Password character rules define additional character requirements to ensure password strength.
Numeric

Minimum number of numeric characters (0-9) in a password. The default is 2.

Uppercase

Minimum number of uppercase characters (A-Z) in a password. The default is 0.

Special

Minimum number of non-digit and non-letter characters that are required in a
password. The default is 2.

Lowercase

Minimum number of lowercase characters (a-z) in a password. The default is 0.

Password Must be At
Least N Characters
Different From Old
Password

Minimum number of characters by which the new password must differ by from the
previous one. The default is 2.

Include “Forgot
Password” link on Login
Screen

Select the checkbox to enable users to reset their local password using a “Forgot
Password” link on the login page. By default, the option is disabled.
An SMTP server must be configured on the system, and the username must have a
correct email address for this feature to work successfully.
If an SMTP server is not set, you cannot reset the password because the email
containing the temporary password cannot be sent.
You must specify an email address in the user settings for the user name. The
temporary password is sent to that email address. If no email address is specified or if
the email address is incorrect, the user will not receive the email.
For information on how to use this feature, see "Forgot Password" on the next page.

4. Click Save to save the changes, or click another tab to cancel.
HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 255 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

Users Exempted From Password Expiration
Even though you have set a password expiration policy for most users, you may want to have a user
whose password does not expire automatically.

To exempt a user from the password expiration policy:
1. Click Administration > System Admin.
2. Click Authentication in the Users/Groups section.
3. Choose the Local Password tab, and then click Users Exempted From Password Expiration
Policy.
4. The Exempt Users From Password Expiration page displays.
5. Select users from the Non-exempted Users list and click the right arrow icon
to move the
selected users to the Exempted Users list. Do the reverse to remove users from the list of
exempted users.
You can select multiple users at the same time and move them over. Or you can move all users by
clicking the icon.
6. Click Save to save the policy or Cancel to exit.

Forgot Password
This feature is available only if the Include “Forgot Password” link on Login Screen setting on the
Authentication Settings page (Setup > System Admin > Authentication > Local Password) is set to
Yes. By default, this setting is set to No. An SMTP server must be configured in order to use this
feature. For more details on how to enable it, see "Local Password" on page 254.
If you forget your system password, use this feature to receive an email that provides a temporary
password.
The temporary password is valid until the time specified in the email. If you do not log in within the
specified time, only an administrator can reset the password to generate another temporary password.

To reset your password:
1. Click the Forgot Password link on the Login screen.
2. Enter a user name on the Reset Password dialog box.
3. Click Reset Password.
An automated email with a temporary password is sent to the email address specified for that user.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 256 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

External Authentication
Besides providing a local password authentication method, your system supports Client
Certificate/CAC, LDAP, and RADIUS authentication. It is not possible to enable all authentication
methods simultaneously.
Note: CAC is a form of client certificate authentication. Information on client certificate
authentication applies to CAC.
From the External Authentication tab, use the drop-down menu to choose one of the following
authentication methods:
l

"Local Password" below

l

"Client Certificate Authentication " below

l

"Client Certificate and Local Password Authentication" on the next page

l

"LDAP/AD and LDAPS Authentication" on page 259

l

"RADIUS Authentication" on page 260

Local Password
This option is the default method and implements the local password policies set in the Local
Password tab. Leave this as the default, or click Save if changing from another option.

Client Certificate Authentication
This authentication method requires that users authenticate using a client certificate. For each client
certificate, a user account with a Distinguished Name (DN) matching the one in the client certificate
must exist on your system.
Caution: All SSL client certificates used for authentication must be FIPS compliant (hashed with
FIPS-compliant algorithms) even if FIPS is not enabled on your system.
To configure client certificate authentication:
1. Click Administration > System Admin.
2. Click Authentication in the Users/Groups section.
3. Choose the External Authentication tab.
4. From the drop-down menu, choose Client Certificate.
5. Allow Local Password Fallback provides two options:

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 257 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

l

l

Allow Local Password Fallback for Default Admin Only
Select this option to allow the default admin user to log in using only a username and password if
the client certificate is not available or invalid. This privilege is restricted to the default admin user
only. Other users must have a valid client certificate to gain access to the system. This option is
enabled by default.
Allow Local Password Fallback for All Users
Select this option to allow all users to log in using their local user name and password if their client
certificate is invalid or unavailable.
For more information, see "Local Password Fallback" on page 261.

6. Click Save.

Client Certificate and Local Password Authentication
This authentication method requires that users authenticate using an SSL client certificate and a valid
local password. Local Password refers to the password associated with the user credentials created in
User Management in the Users/Groups section. See "User Management" on page 263 for details.
A user account on your system must be defined with a Distinguished Name (DN) that matches the one
in the client certificate.
For instructions on how to create a user DN, see "Users" on page 263 and refer to the section called “Use
Client DN” in the parameters table.
Caution: All SSL client certificates used for authentication must be FIPS compliant (hashed with
FIPS-compliant algorithms) even if FIPS is not enabled on your system.

To configure client certificate and password authentication:
1. Click Administration > System Admin.
2. Click Authentication in the Users/Groups section.
3. Choose the External Authentication tab.
4. From the drop-down menu, choose Client Certificate AND Local Password.
5. Allow Local Password Fallback provides two options:
l

l

Allow Local Password Fallback for Default Admin Only
This option, always enabled, allows the default admin user to log in using only a username and
password.
Allow Local Password Fallback for All Users
This option is always disabled. You cannot enable it when using the Client Certificate AND
Local Password authentication method.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 258 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

For more information, see "Local Password Fallback" on page 261.
6. Click Save.

LDAP/AD and LDAPS Authentication
This authentication method authenticates users against an LDAP server. Even when LDAP is enabled,
each user account must exist locally on your system. Although the user name specified locally can be
different from the one specified on the LDAP server, the Distinguished Name (DN) specified for each
user account must match the one in the LDAP server.
Tip: For steps on how to create a user DN, see "Users" on page 263, and the parameter "Use Client
DN" on page 264”.

To set up LDAP authentication:
1. Click Administration > System Admin.
2. Click Authentication in the Users/Groups section.
3. Choose the External Authentication tab.
4. From the drop-down menu, choose LDAP.
5. Allow Local Password Fallback provides two options:
l

l

Allow Local Password Fallback for Default Admin Only
Select this option to allow the default admin user to log in using only a username and password if
LDAP authentication fails. This privilege is restricted to the default admin user only. All others
must be authenticated by LDAP. This option is enabled by default.
Allow Local Password Fallback for All Users
Select this option to allow all users to log in using their local user name and password if LDAP
authentication fails.
For more information, see "Local Password Fallback" on page 261.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 259 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

LDAP Server has the following parameters:
Parameter

Description

Server
Hostname
[:port]
(optional)

(Optional) Enter the host name or IP address and port of the LDAP server in the following
format:
ldap://:
ldaps://:

Additional steps are required for the use of LDAPS. See "Using the LDAP over SSL (LDAPS)
Protocol" below below.
Backup
Server
Hostname
[:Port]
(optional)

(Optional) Enter the backup LDAP server to use if the primary server does not respond. If the
server returns an authentication failure (bad password, unknown username, etc), then the backup
server is not tried. The backup server is tried only when the primary server has a communication
failure.

Request
Timeout

The length of time, in seconds, to wait for a response from the LDAP server. The default is 10.

Use the same format as the primary server to specify the host name and port.

6. When finished, click Save.
Using the LDAP over SSL (LDAPS) Protocol
When choosing the LDAPS protocol to authenticate users, make sure the following conditions are true:
l

The SSL certificate for the LDAPS server has been uploaded into the trusted store.

l

The external authentication method is set to “LDAP”.

l

The URL for the LDAPS server(s) starts with “ldaps://”.

After uploading the SSL certificate, restart the aps process (Setup >
System Admin > Process Status > aps Restart).
Caution: If the aps process is not restarted, attempts to authenticate using LDAPS will fail.

RADIUS Authentication
This authentication method allows users to authenticate against a RADIUS server. Even when RADIUS
authentication is enabled, each user account must exist locally on your system. The username must
match the one in the RADIUS server, although the password can be different. A user must present a
valid username and (RADIUS) password to be successfully authenticated.

To configure RADIUS authentication settings:
1. Click Administration > System Admin.
2. Click Authentication in the Users/Groups section.
3. Choose the External Authentication tab.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 260 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

4. From the drop-down menu, choose RADIUS.
5. Allow Local Password Fallback provides two options:
l

l

Allow Local Password Fallback for Default Admin Only
Select this option to allow the default admin user to log in using only a username and password if
RADIUS authentication fails. This privilege is restricted to the admin user only. All others must be
authenticated by RADIUS. This option is enabled by default.
Allow Local Password Fallback for All Users
Select this option to allow all users to log in using their local user name and password, if RADIUS
authentication fails. For more information, see "Local Password Fallback" below.

6. Update the RADIUS Server parameters as necessary:
Parameter

Description

Server
Hostname
[:port]

Enter the host name and port of the RADIUS server.

Backup Server
hostname
[:port]
(optional)

(Optional) Enter the backup RADIUS server to use if the primary server does not respond. If the
server returns an authentication failure (bad password, unknown username, etc), then the backup
server is not tried. The backup server is tried only when the primary server has a communication
failure.
Use the same format as the primary server to specify the host name and port.

Shared
Enter a RADIUS passphrase.
Authentication
Secret
NAS IP
Address

The IP address of the Network Access Server (NAS).

Request
Timeout

The length of time, in seconds, to wait for a response from the RADIUS server (in seconds). The
default is 10.

Retry Request

Number of times to retry a RADIUS request. The default is 1.

RADIUS
Protocol:

Use the drop-down menu to choose a protocol option. The default is None.

7. Click Save.

Local Password Fallback
You can use this feature to log in using your local user name and password if the external
authentication (Certificate, LDAP, or RADIUS) fails, if you forgot your password to the authentication
server, or if the authentication server is not available.
The Use Local Authentication allows the default admin to log in even when the remote authentication
server is not available, by adding a Use Local Authentication checkbox to the login screen. Out-ofbox, this option is enabled only for the default administrator. However, it is possible to allow local

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 261 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration
password fallback for all users. For example, you could configure the RADIUS authentication method to
allow users to log in using local authentication instead of RADIUS should they fail to authenticate to the
configured external RADIUS server(s).
For information on how to allow local password fallback for all users for all users, see "Client Certificate
Authentication " on page 257, "LDAP/AD and LDAPS Authentication" on page 259, or "RADIUS
Authentication" on page 260.

To log in when authentication fails:
1. Select the Use Local Authentication checkbox.
Note: This option is only available to the default admin unless it has been enabled for other
users.
2. Enter your login and password and click Login.

Login Banner
You can customize the message on the login screen to suit your needs. The text you enter in the
Content field is displayed above the Username and Password fields on the login screen. In addition, you
can enter a confirmation message that the user must click to enable the Username and Password
fields.
You must have the “Configure Login Settings” permission enabled for your user account to edit the
login banner.

To customize the login banner:
1. Click Administration > Setup > System Admin.
2. Click Login Banner in the Users/Groups section.
3. Enter the text you want to display as the login banner in the Content field.
You can enter only unformatted text in this field; however, you can apply standard HTML tags to
display formatted text. Loading images in this field is not allowed.
4. (Optional) Enter text in the Confirmation field. Any text entered will be displayed in the login
banner, accompanied by a check box that the user must click to enable the Username and
Password fields. For example, if you enter “Are you sure?”, then the user must click the checkbox
in order to confirm log in.
5. Click Save.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 262 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

User Management
The Users and Groups tabs enable you to manage users and user groups on your system. User groups
are a way to enforce access control to various sections of your system.

Users
Open the Users tab to manage the users that can log in to your system. You can add a new user, edit
user information, or delete a user at any time. You must have the appropriate System Admin group
rights to perform these functions.

To add a new user:
1. Click Administration > Setup > System Admin.
2. Click User Management in the Users/Groups section in the left panel.
3. In the Users tab, click Add from the top left side of the page.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 263 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

4. Enter the following parameters.
Parameter

Description

Credentials
Login

The user's login name.

Password

The user's password.

Confirm
Password

Reenter the users’ password.

Contact Information
Use Client
DN

If you enabled SSL client certificate or LDAP authentication, click this link to enter user’s the
Distinguished Name (Certificate Subject) information. The Distinguished Name should be similar to
this format:
CN=UserA,OU=Engg Team,O=ArcSight\, Inc.,L=Cupertino,C=US,ST=California

To determine the DN, use this URL to display the certificate:
https:///platform-service/
DisplayCertificate

OR
Obtain the DN information for a user from the browser that the user will open to connect to the
system. For example, on Mozilla Firefox, click Tools > Options > Advanced > Encryption > View
Certificates > Your Certificates > Select the certificate > View.
First Name

The user’s first name.

Last Name

The user’s last name.

Email

The user’s email address.

Phone
Number

(Optional) The user’s phone number.

Title

(Optional) The user’s title.

Department (Optional) The user’s department.
Fax

(Optional) The user’s fax number.

Alternate
Number

(Optional) The user’s alternate phone number.

Assign to
Groups

Select the groups to which this user belongs. This setting controls the privileges a user has on this
ArcSight Management Center.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 264 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

Parameter

Description

System
Admin

Select a rights level from the drop-down list:

ArcMC
Rights

Notes

l

Default System Admin Group gives the user rights to change the settings in the System Admin
menu. Choosing this option displays all the tabs and menus.

l

Read Only System Admin Group allows the user read-only access.

l

Unassigned prevents user access to the System Admin menu.

Select a rights level from the drop-down list:
l

Default ArcMC Rights Group gives the user rights to the Dashboard, Node Management, and
Configuration Management menus, as well as the Backup/Restore and Repositories menus.
Choosing this option displays all the tabs and menus.

l

Read Only ArcMC Group allows the user read-only access.

l

Unassigned prevents user access to all ArcMC components.

(Optional) Other information about the user.

5. Click Save and Close.

To edit a user:
1. Click Administration > System Admin.
2. Click User Management in the Users/Groups section in the left panel.
3. In the Users tab, select the user (or users) you want to edit.
4. Click Edit from the top left side of the page.
5. Update the user information as necessary.
6. Click Save User.

To delete a user:
1. Click Administration > System Admin.
2. Click User Management in the Users/Groups section in the left panel.
3. In the Users tab, select the user (or users) you want to delete.
4. Click Delete from the top left side of the page.

Reset Password
The Reset Password feature enables you to reset a user's password without knowing their password. If
you are using an SMTP-configured server and have permissions to create and update users, you can
reset a user’s password by clicking the Reset Password button. An automated email including the new
password string is sent to the user.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 265 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration
An SMTP server must be configured for the automated email containing the temporary password to be
sent. If an SMTP server is not configured, the password will not be reset because an email cannot be
sent.

To reset a user’s password:
1. Click Administration > System Admin.
2. Click User Management in the Users/Groups section in the left panel.
3. In the Users tab, select the user (or users) whose passwords you want to reset.
4. Click Reset Password from the top left side of the page.
The user must use the temporary string to log in within the time specified in the email. If the user does
not log in within the specified time, the account becomes deactivated. If the account has been
deactivated, the admin must re-activate it before resetting the password.

To activate a user:
1. Click Administration > System Admin.
2. Click User Management in the Users/Groups section in the left panel.
3. In the Users tab, select the user (or users) that you want to activate.
4. Choose Edit.
5. Check the Active box.
6. Save the changes.

Groups
User groups define privileges to specific functions on your system and serve to enforce access control
to these functions. For example, if you want User A to perform system admin related activities that are
not Connector Appliance management specific, assign that user to the System Admin group, but not to
the Connector Appliance group.
User groups are divided into the following types: System Admin and Connector Appliance Rights
Groups. Each type has a pre-defined, default user group in which all privileges for the type are enabled.
To authorize a subset of the privileges for a specific group type, create a new user group and enable
only the privileges you want to provide for that group. Then, assign restricted users to the newly
created group.

System Admin Groups
System Admin Group

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 266 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration
The System Admin Group controls the system administration operations for your system, such as
configuring network information, setting storage mounts, installing SSL certificates, and user
management.
Read Only System Admin Group
In addition to the default System Admin Group that enables all rights (privileges), a Read Only System
Admin Group is available on your system. Users assigned to this group can view System Admin settings,
but cannot change them.

ArcSight Management Center Rights Groups for ArcSight Management
Center
ArcSight Management Center Rights Group
The Connector Appliance Rights Group controls the ArcSight Management Center application
operations for your system, such as viewing the ArcSight Management Center dashboards and backup
operations.
Read Only ArcSight Management Center Group
In addition to the default Connector Appliance Rights Group that enables all rights (privileges),
Connector Appliance provides more controlled authorizations and a “view only” default option. A readonly user can view the tabs and the operations displayed on the tabs, and can perform operations such
as refresh, view certificate list, and Logfu.
Refer to your system’s user interface for a complete list of rights available to this group.
It is strongly recommended not to modify any rights for the default admin user, as this can cause
access issues.

Managing a User Group
To create a new user group:
1. Click Administration > System Admin.
2. Click User Management in the Users/Groups section in the left panel.
3. Click the Groups tab.
4. Click Add from the top left side of the page.
5. Define the new group:
a. In the Group Name field, provide a name for the group.
b. In the Description field, provide a description for the group.
c. From the Group Type drop-down box, select the group type.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 267 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

d. Click the down arrow icon ( ) next to the group type name to view and select privileges that
you want to assign to the users in this group.
6. Click Save and Close to save the settings of the group, or click Save and Edit Membership to add
users to this group.

To edit a user group:
1. Click Administration > System Admin.
2. Click User Management in the Users/Groups section in the left panel.
3. Click the Groups tab.
4. Select the group that you want to edit, and click Edit at the top left side of the page.
5. Update the user group information.
If you need to edit the group’s membership:
a. Click Save and Edit Membership to display the Edit Group Membership page.
b. Click Add from the top left of the Edit Group Membership page.
c. Select users you want to add. By default, you can add only users who do not belong to other
groups of the type that you are editing. To add such users, click Show users that belong to
other  groups.
When you add a user who belongs to another group of the same group type as the one you are
updating, that user is automatically removed from the previous group.
d. Click OK.
e. Click Back to Group List.
6. Click Save and Close.

To delete a user group:
1. Click Administration > System Admin.
2. Click User Management in the Users/Groups section in the left panel.
3. Click the Groups tab.
4. Select the group (or groups) that you want to delete.
5. Click Delete at the top left side of the page.

Change Password
You can use the Change Password menu to change your application password. This feature is
available to all users for changing their passwords, unlike the Reset Password feature that enables a
system administrator to reset the password of users without knowing the password. Passwords are
subject to the password policy specified by the Admin user.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 268 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Chapter 13: System Administration

To change your password:
1. Click Administration > Setup > System Admin.
2. Click Change Password in the Users/Groups section in the left panel to display the Change
Password for  page.
3. Enter the Old Password, the New Password, and enter the New Password a second time to confirm.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 269 of 316

Appendix A: Audit Logs
The following topics are discussed here.

•
•
•
•
•

Audit Event Types
Audit Event Information
Application Events
Platform Events
System Health Events

270
270
271
277
281

Audit Event Types
You can forward ArcSight Management Center application audit events, which are in Common Event
Format (CEF), to a destination of your choice.
Several types of audit events are generated by ArcSight Management Center:
l

Application events: related to ArcSight Management Center functions and configuration changes

l

Platform events: related to the ArcSight Management Center system

l

System health events: related to ArcSight Management Center health.

Audit Event Information
An ArcSight Management Center audit event contains information about the following prefix fields.
l

Device Event Class ID

l

Device Severity

l

Name

l

Device Event Category (cat)

See "Audit Logs" on page 239 for details on how to generate audit logs.
Note: If no Syslog Daemon connector is installed or configured on your local machine, then no
audit events will be visible.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 270 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix A: Audit Logs

Application Events
Application Events
Signature

Severity Description

deviceEventCategory

connector:101

1

Register connector successful

/Connector/Add/Success

connector:102

1

Connector removed successfully

/Connector/Delete

connector:103

1

Update connector parameters
successful

/Connector/Parameter/Update/
Success

connector:104

1

AUP Package create successful

/Connector/AUP Package/Create/Success

connector:105

1

AUP Package deploy successful

/Connector/AUP Package/Deploy/Success

connector:201

1

Connector add failed

/Connector/Add/Fail

connector:202

1

Connector delete failed

/Connector/Delete/Fail

connector:203

1

Connector parameters update
failed

/Connector/Parameter/Update/
Fail

Connector

ArcSight Management Center
arcmc:101

1

ConfigurationBackupScheduler
add success

/BackupScheduler/Add/Success

arcmc:102

1

ConfigurationBackupScheduler
update successful

/BackupScheduler/Update/
Success

arcmc:103

1

ConfigurationBackupScheduler
delete success

/BackupScheduler/Delete/
Success

arcmc:104

1

Scheduled Backup triggered

/Backup/Scheduled/Trigger

arcmc:105

1

Scheduled Backup completed

/Backup/Scheduled/Complete/Success

arcmc:106

1

Manual Backup completed

/Backup/Manual/Complete/
Success

arcmc:107

1

Local Backup completed

/Backup/Local/Complete/
Success

arcmc:108

1

You have exceeded the maximum
number of managed connectors
allowed by your license

/RemotelyManagedConnectors/
Exceeded

arcmc:110

1

You have attempts to exceed the
maximum number of managed
products allowed by your license

/managedproducts/exceeded

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 271 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix A: Audit Logs
Application Events, continued
Signature

Severity Description

deviceEventCategory

arcmc:111

1

Reboot command launched
successfully

Node/reboot/launched/Success

arcmc:112

1

New configuration created
successfully

/Configuration/Add/Success

arcmc:113

1

Edit configuration succesful

/Configuration/Edit/Success

arcmc:114

1

Delete configurations successful

/Configuration/Delete/Success

arcmc:115

1

Push configuration successful

/Configuration/Push/Success

arcmc:116

1

Import configuration successful

/Configuration/Import/Success

arcmc:117

1

Add subscriber to configuration
successful

/Configuration/Subscribe/
Success

arcmc:118

1

Unsubscribe node for
configuration successful

/Configuration/Unsubscribe/
Success

arcmc:119

1

Check compliance of
configuration successful

/Configuration/Check Compliance/Success

arcmc:120

1

Configuration set successfully

/Node/Set/Configuration/
Success

arcmc:121

1

Configuration appended
successfully

/Node/Append/Configuration/
Success

arcmc:122

1

Agent install success

/ArcMCAgent/Install/Success

arcmc:123

1

Upgrade agent successfully

/ArcMCAgent/Upgrade/Success

arcmc:124

1

Add/Push Logger Peers Successful /Logger/AddPeers/Success

arcmc:125

1

Remove Logger Peers Successful

/Logger/RemovePeers/Success

arcmc:127

1

Create/Import Logger Peer Group
Successful

/Logger/AddPeerGrp/Success

arcmc:128

1

Delete Logger Peer Group
Successful

/Logger/DeletePeerGrp/Success

arcmc:129

1

Edit Logger Peer Group Successful /Logger/EditPeerGrp/Success

arcmc:130

1

Import Initial Configuration
Successful

/Logger/ImportInitConfig/Success

arcmc:131

1

Pushed Initial Configuration

/Logger/PushInitConfig/Success

arcmc:132

1

Deleted Initial Configuration

/Logger/DelInitConfig/Success

arcmc:133

1

Host upgrade started.

/Node/Upgrade/Start

arcmc:134

1

Host upgrade successful.

/Node/Upgrade/Success

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 272 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix A: Audit Logs
Application Events, continued
Signature

Severity Description

deviceEventCategory

arcmc:138

1

Update rule/s

/ArcMC/UpdateRules/Success

arcmc:201

1

ConfigurationBackupScheduler
add failed

/BackupScheduler/Add/Fail

arcmc:202

1

ConfigurationBackupScheduler
update failed

/BackupScheduler/Update/Fail

arcmc:203

1

ConfigurationBackupScheduler
delete failed

/BackupScheduler/Delete/Fail

arcmc:205

1

Scheduled Backup failed

/Backup/Scheduled/Complete/
Fail

arcmc:206

1

Manual Backup failed

/Backup/Manual/Complete/Fail

arcmc:212

1

New configuration creation failed

/Configuration/Add/Fail

arcmc:213

1

Edit configuration failed

/Configuration/Update/Fail

arcmc:214

1

Configuration deletion failed

/Configuration/Delete/Fail

arcmc:215

1

Push configuration failed

/Configuration/Import/Fail

arcmc:216

1

Import configuration failed

/Backup/Local/Push/Fail

arcmc:217

1

Add subscriber to configuration
failed

/Configuration/Subscribe/Fail

arcmc:218

1

Unsubscribe node for
configuration failed

/Configuration/Unsubscribe/Fail

arcmc:219

1

Check compliance of
configuration failed

/Configuration/Check Compliance/Success

arcmc:220

1

Configuration set failed

/Node/Set/Configuration/
Fail

arcmc:221

1

Configuration append failed

/Node/Append/Configuration/
Fail

arcmc:222

1

Agent install failed

/ArcMCAgent/Install/Failure

arcmc:223

1

Upgrade agent failed

/ArcMCAgent/Upgrade/Fail

arcmc:224

1

Add/Push Logger Peers Failed

/Logger/AddPeers/Fail

arcmc:225

1

Remove Logger Peers Failed

/Logger/RemovePeers/Fail

arc mc:226

1

Alert message payload

/ArcMCMonitor/Breach

arcmc:230

1

Import Initial Configuration Failed

/Logger/ImportInitConfig/Fail

arcmc:234

1

Host upgrade failed.

/Node/Upgrade/Fail

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 273 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix A: Audit Logs
Application Events, continued
Signature

Severity Description

deviceEventCategory

arcmc:250

1

Push user assignment 

arcmc:251

1

Decommission user 

/ArcMCUM/DeleteUser

arcmc:252

1

Add user 

/ArcMCUM/AddUser

destination:102

1

Update destination successful

/Connector/Destination/Update/Success

destination:103

1

Remove destination successful

/Connector/Destination/Delete/Success

destination:104

1

Update destination configuration
successful

/Connector/Destination/
Configuration/Update/Success

destination:105

1

Register destination successful

/Connector/Destination/
Registration/Success

destination:106

1

Create destination configuration
successful

/Connector/Destination/
Configuration/Add/Success

destination:107

1

Destination configuration delete
successful

/Connector/Destination/
Configuration/Delete/Success

destination:202

1

Destination update to a connector /Connector/Destination/Update/Fail
failed

destination:203

1

Destination delete from a
connector failed

/Connector/Destination/Delete/
Fail

destination:204

1

Destination configuration update
failed

/Connector/Destination/
Configuration/Update/Fail

destination:205

1

Register destination failed

/Connector/Destination/
Registration/Fail

destination:206

1

Destination configuration add
failed

/Connector/Destination/
Configuration/Add/Fail

destination:207

1

Destination configuration delete
failed

/Connector/Destination/
Configuration/Delete/Fail

container:101

1

Container upgrade successful

/Container/Upgrade/Success

container:102

1

Push user file successful

/Container/UserFiles/Push/
Success

container:103

1

User file delete from container

/Container/UserFiles/Delete

container:104

1

CA cert push to a container
successful

/Container/CACert/Push/
Success

Destination

Container

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 274 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix A: Audit Logs
Application Events, continued
Signature

Severity Description

deviceEventCategory

container:105

1

Container demo CA enable
successful

/Container/DemoCA/Enable/
Success

container:106

1

Container demo CA disable
successfu

/Container/DemoCA/Disable/
Success

container:109

1

Delete property from a container
successful

/Container/Property/Delete/Success

container:110

1

Modify properties successful

/Container/Property/Update/Success

container:111

1

Container password update
successful

/Container/Password/Update/
Success

container:112

1

Container add successful

/Container/Add/Success

container:113

1

Container edit

/Container/Update

container:114

1

Remove container

/Container/Delete

container:115

1

Add certificate for a container
successful

/Container/Certificate/Add/
Success

container:116

1

Removing certificates successful
[addtrust class 1ca]

/Container/Certificate/Delete/
Success

container:117

1

Enabling FIPS mode successful

/Container/FIPS/Enable/Success

container:118

1

Disabling FIPS mode successful

/Container/FIPS/Disable/
Success

container:119

1

Upgrade was triggered for
container that resides on end of
life appliance model

Container/FromEndOfLifeModel/Upgrade/Triggered

container:201

1

Container upgrade failed

/Container/Upgrade/Fail

container:202

1

User file push to a container failed /Container/UserFiles/Push/Fail

container:204

1

CA cert push to a container failed

/Container/CACert/Push/Fail

container:205

1

Enable demo CA for a container
failed

/Container/DemoCA/Enable/Fail

container:206

1

Disable demo CA for a container
failed

/Container/DemoCA/Disable/
Fail

container:209

1

Delete property from a container
failed

/Container/Property/Delete/Fail

container:210

1

Update property to a container
failed

/Container/Property/Update/Fail

container:211

1

Container password update failed

/Container/Password/Update/
Fail

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 275 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix A: Audit Logs
Application Events, continued
Signature

Severity Description

deviceEventCategory

container:212

1

Container add failed

/Container/Add/Fail

container:215

1

Add certificate for a container
failed

/Container/Certificate/Add/Fail

container:216

1

Delete certificate for a container
failed

/Container/Certificate/Delete/
Fail

container:217

1

Enable FIPS on a container failed

/Container/FIPS/Enable/Fail

container:218

1

Disable FIPS on a container failed

/Container/FIPS/Disable/Fail

container:219

1

SSL Certificate downloaded
successfully

/Container/Certificate/Download/Success

container:220

1

SSL Certificate download failed

/Container/Certificate/Download/Fail

container:221

1

SSL Certificate imported
successfully

/Container/Certificate/Import/
Success

container:222

1

SSL Certificate import failed

/Container/Certificate/Import/
Fail

container:301

1

Container upgrade started

/Container/Upgrade/Start

eventbroker:146

1

Event broker Add Topic succesful

/EventBroker/Topic/Add/Success

eventbroker:147

1

Event broker delete route/s
successful

/EventBroker/Route/Add/Success

eventbroker:148

1

Event broker Add Route/s
successful

/EventBroker/Route/Add/Success

eventbroker:149

1

Event broker Update Route
successful

/EventBroker/Route/Update/Success

eventbroker:241

1

Event broker Add Topic failed

/EventBroker/Topic/Add/Fail

eventbroker:242 1

Event broker delete route/s failed

/EventBroker/Route/Add/Fail

eventbroker:243 1

Event broker Add Route failed

/EventBroker/Route/Add/Fail

eventbroker:244 1

Event broker Update Route failed

/EventBroker/Route/Update/Fail

Event Broker

Location
location:101

1

Location add successful

/Location/Add/Success

location:102

1

Location edit

/Location/Update

location:103

1

Remove location

/Location/Delete

location:201

1

Location add failed

/Location/Add/Fail

Host

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 276 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix A: Audit Logs
Application Events, continued
Signature

Severity Description

deviceEventCategory

host:101

1

Host add successful

/Host/Add/Success

host:103

1

Remove host

/Host/Delete

host:105

1

Host certificate download and
import successful

/Host/Certificate/Download
/Import/Success

host:201

1

Host add failed

/Host/Add/Fail

host:205

1

Host certificate download and
import failed

/Host/Certificate/Download
Import/Fail

Platform Events
Platform Events
Signature

Severity Definition

Category

platform:200

7

Failed password change

/Platform/Authentication/
PasswordChange/Failure

platform:201

7

Failed login attempt

/Platform/Authentication/Failure/
Login

platform:202

5

Password changed

/Platform/Authentication/
Password

platform:203

7

Login attempt by inactive user

/Platform/Authentication/
InactiveUser/Failure

platform:213

7

Audit forwarding modified

/Platform/Configuration/Global/
AuditEvents

platform:220

5

Installed certificate

/Platform/Certificate/Install

platform:221

7

Certificate mismatch failure

/Platform/Certificate/Mismatch

platform:222

1

Created certificate signing request

/Platform/Certificate/Request

platform:224

5

Re-generate self-signed certificate

/Platform/Certificate/Regenerate

platform:226

7

Uploaded update file damaged or
corrupt

/Platform/Update/Failure/
CorruptPackage

platform:227

5

Update installation success

/Platform/Update/Applied

platform:228

7

Update installation failure

/Platform/Update/Failure/Installation

platform:230

3

Successful login

/Platform/Authentication/Login

platform:234

7

Failed login attempt (LOCKED)

/Platform/Authentication/Failure/
LOCKED

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 277 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix A: Audit Logs
Platform Events, continued
Signature

Severity Definition

Category

platform:239

1

User logout

/Platform/Authentication/Logout

platform:240

3

Added user group

/Platform/Groups/Add

platform:241

3

Updated user group

/Platform/Groups/Update

platform:242

5

Removed all members from group

/Platform/Authorization/Groups/
Membership/Update/Clear

platform:244

3

Deleted user group

/Platform/Groups/Remove

platform:245

3

Added user

/Platform/Users/Add

platform:246

3

Updated user

/Platform/Users/Update

platform:247

3

Deleted user

/Platform/Users/Delete

platform:248

3

Session expired

/Platform/Authentication/Logout/
SessionExpiration

platform:249

7

Account locked

/Platform/Authentication/
AccountLocked

platform:250

3

Added remote mount point

/Platform/Storage/RFS/Add

platform:251

5

Edited remote mount point

/Platform/Storage/RFS/Edit

platform:252

7

Failed to create remote mount
point

/Platform/Storage/RFS/Failure

platform:253

5

Removed remote mount point

/Platform/Storage/RFS/Remove

platform:260

5

Static route modified

/Platform/Configuration/Network/Route/Update

platform:261

5

Static route removed

/Platform/Configuration/Network/Route/Remove

platform:262

5

Appliance time modified

/Platform/Configuration/Time

platform:263

NIC settings modified

/Platform/Configuration/NIC

platform:264

NTP server settings modified

/Platform/Configuration/NTP

platform:265

5

DNS settings modified

/Platform/Configuration/Network/DNS

platform:266

5

Hosts file modified

/Platform/Configuration/Network/Hosts

platform:267

5

SMTP settings modified

/Platform/Configuration/SMTP

platform:268

5

Static route added

/Platform/Configuration/Network/Route/Add

platform:269

5

Updated Platform Settings

/Platform/Configuration

platform:280

7

Appliance reboot initiated

/Appliance/State/Reboot/Initiate

platform:281

3

Appliance reboot canceled

/Appliance/State/Reboot/Cancel

platform:282

9

Appliance poweroff initiated

/Appliance/State/Shutdown

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 278 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix A: Audit Logs
Platform Events, continued
Signature

Severity Definition

Category

platform:284

5

Enabled SAN Multipathing

/Platform/Storage/Multipathing/Enable

platform:285

5

Disabled SAN Multipathing

/Platform/Storage/Multipathing/Disable

platform:300

5

Installed trusted certificate

/Platform/Certificate/Install

platform:301

5

Installed certificate revocation list

/Platform/Certificate/Revocation/
Install

platform:302

5

Deleted trusted certificate

/Platform/Certificate/Delete

platform:303

5

Deleted certificate revocation list

/Platform/Certificate/Revocation/
Delete

platform:304

7

Failed installing trusted certificate

/Platform/Certificate/Install/Failure

platform:305

7

Failed installing certificate
revocation list

/Platform/Certificate/Revocation/
Install/Failure

platform:306

5

Start process

/Platform/Process/Start

platform:307

5

Stop process

/Platform/Process/Stop

platform:308

5

Restart process

/Platform/Process/Restart

platform:310

5

Enabled FIPS mode

/Platform/Configuration/FIPS/Enable

platform:311

7

Disabled FIPS mode

/Platform/Configuration/FIPS/Disable

platform:312

7

Web server cipher strength
changed

/Platform/Configuration/WebServer/CipherStrength

platform:313

5

Enable SSH

/Platform/Configuration/SSH/Enable

platform:314

7

Disable SSH

/Platform/Configuration/SSH/Disable

platform: 315

7

Enable SSH only during
startup/reboot

/Platform/Configuration/SSH/StartupOnly

platform:316

7

Enable SSH only for 8 hours

/Platform/Configuration/SSH/Enable8Hours

platform: 320

3

Appliance poweroff canceled

/Appliance/State/Shutdown/Cancel

platform:371

5

Restarted OS service

/Platform/Service/Restart

platform:400

1

Ran diagnostic command

/Platform/Diagnostics/Command

platform:407

7

SSL certificate expiration warning

/Platform/Certificate/SSL/Expiration

platform:408

5

Appliance startup completed

/Appliance/State/Startup

platform:409

3

Configure login warning banner

/Platform/Configuration/LoginBanner

platform:410

3

Network settings modified

platform:411

5

Automated password reset

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

/Platform/Authentication/PasswordChange

Page 279 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix A: Audit Logs
Platform Events, continued
Signature

Severity Definition

Category

platform:412

3

Set locale

/Platform/Configuration/Locale

platform:440

3

SNMP configuration modified

Platform/Configuration/SNMP

platform:450

3

FTP service enabled

platform:451

3

FTP service disabled

platform:454

3

FTP service configuration changed

platform:455

3

Added sub directory

platform:456

3

Removed sub directory

platform:460

3

NIC alias added

/Platform/Network/Alias/Add

platform:462

3

NIC alias removed

/Platform/Network/Alias/Remove

platform:500

5

Remove member from group

/Platform/Authorization/Groups/
Membership/Remove

platform:501

5

Group member added

/Platform/Authorization/Groups/
Membership/Add

platform:502

5

User removed from group

/Platform/Authorization/Users/
Groups/Remove

platform:503

5

User added to group

/Platform/Authorization/Users/
Groups/Add

platform:530

5

Authentication Session settings
successfully changed

/Platform/Configuration/
Authentication/Sessions/Success

platform:540

5

Password Lockout settings
successfully updated

/Platform/Configuration/
Authentication/Password/Lockout/
Success

platform:550

5

Password Expiration settings
successfully updated

/Platform/Configuration/
Authentication/Password/Expiration/Success

platform:560

5

Password Validation settings
successfully updated

/Platform/Configuration/
Authentication/Password/Validation/Success

platform:570

5

Allow Automated Password Reset
settings successfully changed

/Platform/Configuration/
Authentication/Password/
AutomatedReset/Success

platform:590

5

RADIUS authentication settings
successfully changed

/Platform/Configuration/
Authentication/RADIUS/Success

platform:600

5

LDAP authentication settings
successfully changed

/Platform/Configuration/
Authentication/LDAP/Success

platform:610

5

Global authentication settings
successfully changed

/Platform/Configuration/
Authentication/Global/Success

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 280 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix A: Audit Logs

System Health Events
System health events provide four status indicators:
l

OK

l

Degraded

l

Rebuilding

l

Failed

An OK event, indicating normal system behavior, is generated once every ten minutes (six events per
hour, per sensor). For a status other than OK (Degraded, Rebuilding, or Failed), the event is sent
every minute until the sensor returns an OK status.

SNMP Related Properties
The following list provides the event fields for system health events sent via SNMP traps. For detailed
instructions on setting up SNMP traps, see "SNMP" on page 228.
l

event.deviceReceiptTime

l

event.endTime

l

event.deviceVendor

l

event.deviceProduct

l

event.deviceVersion

l

event.deviceEventClassId

l

event.name

l

event.deviceSeverity

l

event.deviceEventCategory

l

event.deviceCustomNumber1

l

event.deviceCustomNumber1Label

l

event.deviceCustomString1

l

event.deviceCustomString1Label

l

event.deviceCustomString2

l

event.deviceCustomString2Label

l

event.deviceCustomString3

l

event.deviceCustomString3Label

l

event.deviceCustomString4

l

event.deviceCustomString4Label

l

event.deviceCustomString5

l

event.deviceCustomString5Label

l

event.deviceCustomString6

l

event.deviceCustomString6Label

l

event.destinationAddress

l

event.deviceAddress

The snmp.mib.version is set to 5.0.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 281 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix A: Audit Logs
System Health Events
Signature

Severity

Definition

Category

cpu:100

1

CPU Usage

/Monitor/CPU/Usage

cpu:101

1

Health statistics per CPU

/Monitor/CPUn/Usage

disk:101

1

Root Disk Space Remaining

/Monitor/Disk/Space/Remaining/Data

disk:102

1

Disk bytes read

/Monitor/Disk/drive/Read

disk:103

1

Disk bytes written

/Monitor/Disk/drive/Write

disk:104

1

Disk Space Remaining

/Monitor/Disk/Space/Remaining/Root

hardware:101

1

Electrical (Current) OK

/Monitor/Sensor/Current/Ok**

hardware:102

5

Electrical (Current) Degraded

/Monitor/Sensor/Current/Degraded**

hardware:103

8

Electrical (Current) Failed

/Monitor/Sensor/Current/Failed**

hardware:111

1

Electrical (Voltage) OK

/Monitor/Sensor/Voltage/Ok**

hardware:112

1

Electrical (Voltage) Degraded

/Monitor/Sensor/Voltage/Degraded**

hardware:113

1

Electrical (Voltage) Failed

/Monitor/Sensor/Voltage/Failed**

hardware:121

1

Battery OK

/Monitor/Sensor/Battery/Ok**

hardware:122

5

Battery Degraded

/Monitor/Sensor/Battery/Degraded **

hardware:123

8

Battery Failed

/Monitor/Sensor/Battery/Failed**

hardware:131

1

Fan OK

/Monitor/Sensor/Fan/Ok

hardware:132

5

Fan Degraded

/Monitor/Sensor/Fan/Degraded

hardware:133

8

Fan Failed

/Monitor/Sensor/Fan/Failed

hardware:141

1

Power Supply OK

/Monitor/Sensor/PowerSupply/Ok

hardware:142

5

Power Supply Degraded

/Monitor/Sensor/PowerSupply/
Degraded

hardware:143

8

Power Supply Failed

/Monitor/Sensor/PowerSupply/Failed

hardware:151

1

Temperature OK

/Monitor/Sensor/Temperature/Ok

hardware:152

1

Temperature Degraded

/Monitor/Sensor/Temperature/
Degraded

hardware:153

1

Temperature Failed

/Monitor/Sensor/Temperature/Failed

CPU

Disk

Hardware

Memory

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 282 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix A: Audit Logs
System Health Events, continued
Signature

Severity

Definition

Category

memory:100

1

Platform memory usage

/Monitor/Memory/Usage/Platform

memory:101

1

Health statistics for JVM memory

/Monitor/Memory/Usage/Jvm

memory:102

1

Health statistics for platform buffers memory

/Monitor/Memory/Usage/Platform/
Buffers

memory:103

1

Health statistics for platform cached memory

/Monitor/Memory/Usage/Platform/
Cached

memory:104

1

Health statistics for platform free memory

/Monitor/Memory/Usage/Platform/
Free

memory:105

1

Health statistics for JVM heap memory

/Monitor/Memory/Usage/Jvm/Heap

memory:106

1

Health statistics for JVM non-heap memory

/Monitor/Memory/Usage/Jvm/
NonHeap

network:100

1

Network usage—Inbound

/Monitor/Network/Usage/iface/In

network:101

1

Network usage—Outbound

/Monitor/Network/Usage/iface/Out

network:200

1

Number of Apache connections

1

NTP synchronization

raid:101

1

RAID Controller OK

/Monitor/RAID/Controller/OK

raid:102

5

RAID Controller Degraded

/Monitor/RAID/Controller/Degraded

raid:103

8

RAID Controller Failed

/Monitor/RAID/Controller/Failed

raid:111

1

RAID BBU OK

/Monitor/RAID/BBU/Ok

raid:112

5

RAID BBU Degraded

/Monitor/RAID/BBU/Degraded

raid:113

8

RAID BBU Failed

/Monitor/RAID/BBU/Failed

raid:121

1

RAID Disk OK

/Monitor/RAID/DISK/Ok

raid:122

5

RAID Disk Rebuilding

/Monitor/RAID/DISK/Rebuilding

raid:123

8

RAID Disk Failed

/Monitor/RAID/DISK/Failed

Network

NTP
ntp:100
RAID

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 283 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix B: Destination Runtime Parameters

Appendix B: Destination Runtime Parameters
The following table describes configurable destination parameters. The parameters listed in the table
are not available for all destinations. The user interface automatically displays the parameters valid for a
destination. For step-by-step instructions on updating the runtime parameters of a destination, see
"Editing Connector Parameters" on page 97.
Parameter

Description

Batching

Connectors can batch events to increase performance and optimize network bandwidth. When
activated, connectors create blocks of events and send them when they either (1) reach a certain
size or (2) the time window expires, whichever occurs first. You can also prioritize batches by
severity, forcing the connector to send the highest-severity event batches first and the lowestseverity event batches later.

Enable Batching
(per event)

Create batches of events of this specified size (5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 300 events).

Enable Batching
(in seconds)

The connector sends the events if this time window expires (1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60).

Batch By

This is Time Based if the connector should send batches as they arrive (the default) or Severity
Based if the connector should send batches based on severity (batches of Highest Severity events
sent first).

Time Correction

The values you set for these fields establish forward and backward time limits, that if exceeded,
cause the connector to automatically correct the time reported by the device.

Use Connector
Time as Device
Time

Override the time the device reports and instead use the time at which the connector received the
event. This option assumes that the connector will be more likely to report the correct time. (No |
Yes)

Enable Device
Time Correction
(in seconds)

The connector can adjust the time reported by the device Detect Time , using this setting. This
is useful when a remote device's clock isn't synchronized with the ArcSight Manager. This should
be a temporary setting. The recommended way to synchronize clocks between Manager and
devices is the NTP protocol. The default is 0.

Enable Connector
Time Correction
(in seconds)

The connector can also adjust the time reported by the connector itself, using this setting. This is
for informational purposes only and allows you to modify the local time on the connector. This
should be a temporary setting. The recommended way to synchronize clocks between Manager
and connectors is the NTP protocol. The default is 0.

Set Device Time
Zone To

Ordinarily, it is presumed that the original device is reporting its time zone along with its time.
And if not, it is then presumed that the connector is doing so. If this is not true, or the device isn't
reporting correctly, you can switch this option from Disabled to GMT or to a particular world time
zone. That zone is then applied to the time reported. Default: Disabled.

Device Time Autocorrection

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 284 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix B: Destination Runtime Parameters

Parameter

Description

Future Threshold

The connector sends the internal alert if the detect time is greater than the connector time by
Past Threshold seconds.

Past Threshold

The connector sends the internal alert if the detect time is earlier than the connector time by
Past Threshold seconds.

Device List

A comma-separated list of the devices to which the thresholds apply. The default, (ALL) , means
all devices.

Time Checking

These are the time span and frequency factors for doing device-time auto-correction.

Future Threshold

The number of seconds by which to extend the connector's forward threshold for time checking.
The default is 5 minutes (300 seconds).

Past Threshold

The number of seconds by which to extend the connector's rear threshold for time checking.
Default is 1 hour (3,600 seconds).

Frequency

The connector checks its future and past thresholds at intervals specified by this number of
seconds. Default is 1 minute (60 seconds).

Cache

Changing these settings will not affect the events cached, it will only affect new events sent to
the cache.

Cache Size

Connectors use a compressed disk cache to hold large volumes of events when the ArcSight
Manager is down or when the connector receives bursts of events. This parameter specifies the
disk space to use. The default is 1 GB which, depending on the connector, can hold about 15
million events, but it also can go down to 5 MB. When this disk space is full, the connector drops
the oldest events to free up disk cache space. (5 MB, 50 MB, 100 MB, 150 MB, 200 MB, 250 MB, 500
MB, 1 GB, 2.5 GB, 5 GB, 10 GB, 50 GB.)

Notification
Threshold

The size of the cache's contents at which to trigger a notification. Default is 10,000.

Notification
Frequency

How often to send notifications after the Notification Threshold is reached. (1 minute, 5 minutes,
10 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes.)

Network
Heartbeat
Frequency

This setting controls how often the connector sends a heartbeat message to the destination. The
default is 10 seconds, but it can go from 5 seconds to 10 minutes. Note that the heartbeat is also
used to communicate with the connector; therefore, if its frequency is set to 10 minutes, then it
could take as much as 10 minutes to send any configuration information or commands back to the
connector.

Enable Name
Resolution

The connector tries to resolve IP addresses to hostnames, and hostnames to IP addresses , if
required and if the event rate allows. This setting controls this functionality. The Source, Target
and Device IP addresses , and Hostnames might also be affected by this setting. By default, name
resolution is enabled (Yes).

Name Resolution
Host Name Only

Default: Yes.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 285 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix B: Destination Runtime Parameters

Parameter

Description

Name Resolution
Domain From Email

Default: Yes.

Clear Host Names
Same as IP
Addresses

Default: Yes.

Limit Bandwidth
To

A list of bandwidth options you can use to constrain the connector's output over the network.
(Disabled, 1 kbit/sec to 100 Mbits/sec.)

Transport Mode

You can configure the connector to cache to disk all the processed events it receives. This is
equivalent to pausing the connector. However, you can use this setting to delay event-sending
during particular time periods. For example, you could use this setting to cache events during the
day and send them at night. You can also set the connector to cache all events, except for those
marked with a very-high severity, during business hours, and send the rest at night. (Normal |
Cache | Cache (but send Very High severity events).

Address-based
Zone Population
Defaults Enabled

This field applies to v3.0 ArcSight Managers. This field is not relevant in ESM v3.5 because the
system has integral zone mapping. Default: Yes.

Address-based
Zone Population

This field applies to v3.0 ArcSight Managers. This field is not relevant in ESM v3.5 because the
system has integral zone mapping.

Customer URI

Applies the given customer URI to events emanating from the connector. Provided the customer
resource exists, all customer fields are populated on the ArcSight Manager. If this particular
connector is reporting data that might apply to more than one customer, you can use Velocity
templates in this field to conditionally identify those customers.

Source Zone URI

Shows the URI of the zone associated with the connector's source address. (Required for ESM v3.0
compatibility.)

Source Translated
Zone URI

Shows the URI of the zone associated with the connector's translated source address. The
translation is presumed to be NAT. (Required for ESM v3.0 compatibility.)

Destination Zone
URI

Shows the URI of the zone associated with the connector's destination address. (Required for ESM
v3.0 compatibility.).

Destination
Translated Zone
URI

Shows the URI of the zone associated with the connector's translated destination address. The
translation is presumed to be NAT. (Required for ESM v3.0 compatibility.)

Connector Zone
URI

Shows the URI of the zone associated with the connector's address. (Required for ESM v3.0
compatibility.)

Connector
Translated Zone
URI

Shows the URI of the zone associated with the connector's translated address. The translation is
presumed to be NAT. (Required for ESM v3.0 compatibility.)

Device Zone URI

Shows the URI of the zone associated with the device's address. (Required for ESM v3.0
compatibility.)

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 286 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix B: Destination Runtime Parameters

Parameter

Description

Device Translated
Zone URI

Shows the URI of the zone associated with the device's translated address. The translation is
presumed to be NAT. (Required for ESM v3.0 compatibility.)

Field Based
Aggregation

This feature is an extension of basic connector aggregation. Basic aggregation aggregates two
events if, and only if, all the fields of the two events are the same (the only difference being the
detect time). However, field-based aggregation implements a less strict aggregation mechanism;
two events are aggregated if only the selected fields are the same for both alerts. It is important
to note that field-based aggregation creates a new alert that contains only the fields that were
specified, so the rest of the fields are ignored.
Connector aggregation significantly reduces the amount of data received, and should be applied
only when you use less than the total amount of information the event offers. For example, you
could enable field-based aggregation to aggregate “accepts” and “rejects” in a firewall, but you
should use it only if you are interested in the count of these events, instead of all the information
provided by the firewall.

Time Interval

Choose a time interval, if applicable, to use as a basis for aggregating the events the connector
collects. It is exclusive of Event Threshold. (Disabled, 1 sec, 5 sec, and so on, up to 1 hour.)

Event Threshold

Choose a number of events, if applicable, to use as a basis for aggregating the events the
connector collects. This is the maximum count of events that can be aggregated; for example, if
150 events were found to be the same within the time interval selected (that is, contained the
same selected fields) and you select an event threshold of 100, you will then receive two events,
one of count 100 and another of count 50. This option is exclusive of Time Interval. (Disabled, 10
events, 50 events, and so on, up to 10,000 events.)

Field Names

Enter one or more fields, if applicable, to use as the basis for aggregating the events the
connector collects. The result is a comma-separated list of fields to monitor. For example,
"eventName,deviceHostName" would aggregate events if they have the same event- and devicehostnames. Names can contain no spaces and the first letter should not be capitalized.

Fields to Sum

Enter one or more fields, if applicable, to use as the basis for aggregating the events the
connector collects.

Preserve Common
Fields

Choosing Yes adds fields to the aggregated event if they have the same values for each event.
Choosing No, the default, ignores non-aggregated fields in aggregated events.

Filter
Aggregation

Filter Aggregation is a way of capturing aggregated event data from events that would otherwise
be discarded due to an agent filter. Only events that would be filtered out are considered for filter
aggregation (unlike Field-based aggregation, which looks at all events).
Connector aggregation significantly reduces the amount of data received, and should be applied
only when you use less than the total amount of information the event offers.

Time Interval

Choose a time interval, if applicable, to use as a basis for aggregating the events the connector
collects. It is exclusive of Event Threshold. (Disabled, 1 sec, 5 sec, and so on, up to 1 hour.)

Event Threshold

Choose a number of events, if applicable, to use as a basis for aggregating the events the
connector collects. This is the maximum count of events that can be aggregated; for example, if
150 events were found to be the same within the time interval selected (that is, contained the
same selected fields) and you select an event threshold of 100, you will then receive two events,
one of count 100 and another of count 50. This option is exclusive of Time Interval. (Disabled, 10
events, 50 events, and so on, up to 10,000 events.)

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 287 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix B: Destination Runtime Parameters

Parameter

Description

Fields to Sum

(Optional) Choose one or more fields, if applicable, to use as the basis for aggregating the events
the connector collects.

Processing
Preserve Raw
Event

For some devices, a raw event can be captured as part of the generated alert. If that is not the
case, most connectors can also produce a serialized version of the data stream that was
parsed/processed to generate the ArcSight event. This feature allows the connector to preserve
this serialized "raw event" as a field. This feature is disabled by default since using raw data
increases the event size and therefore requires more database storage space. You can enable this
by changing the Preserve Raw Event setting. The default is No. If you choose Yes, the serialized
representation of the "Raw Event" is sent to the destination and preserved in the Raw Event field.

Turbo Mode

You can accelerate the transfer of a sensor's event information through connectors by choosing
one of two “turbo” (narrower data bandwidth) modes. The default transfer mode is called
Complete, which passes all the data arriving from the device, including any additional data
(custom, or vendor-specific).
Complete mode does indeed use all the database performance advances of ArcSight ESM v3.x.
The first level of Turbo acceleration is called Faster and drops just additional data, while
retaining all other information. The Fastest mode eliminates all but a core set of event attributes,
in order to achieve the best throughput.
The specific event attributes that apply to these modes in your enterprise are defined in the selfdocumented $ARCSIGHT_HOME/config/connector/agent.properties file for the
ArcSight Manager. Because these properties might have been adjusted for your needs, you should
refer to this file for definitive lists. Only scanner connectors need to run in Complete mode, to
capture the additional data.
Note: Connector Turbo Modes are superseded by the Turbo Mode in use by the ArcSight
Managers processing their events. For example, a Manager set to Faster will not pass all the data
possible for a connector that is set for the default of Complete.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 288 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix B: Destination Runtime Parameters

Parameter

Description

Enable
Aggregation (in
seconds)

When enabled, aggregates two or more events on the basis of the selected time value. (Disabled,
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 30, 60)
The aggregation is performed on one or more matches for a fixed subset of fields:
l

Agent ID

l

Name

l

Device event category

l

Agent severity

l

Destination address

l

Destination user ID

l

Destination port

l

Request URL

l

Source address

l

Source user ID

l

Source port

l

Destination process name

l

Transport protocol

l

Application protocol

l

Device inbound interface

l

Device outbound interface

l

Additional data (if any)

l

Base event IDs (if any)

The aggregated event shows the event count (how many events were aggregated into the
displayed event) and event type. The rest of the fields in the aggregated event take the values of
the first event in the set of aggregated events.
Limit Event
Processing Rate

You can moderate the connector's burden on the CPU by reducing its processing rate. This can
also be a means of dealing with the effects of event bursts.
The choices range from Disabled (no limitation on CPU demand) to 1 eps (pass just one event per
second, making the smallest demand on the CPU).
Note: The effect of this option varies with the category of connector in use, as described in the
connector Processing Categories table below.

Fields to Obfuscate
Store Original
Time in

Disabled or Flex Date 1.

Enable PortService Mapping

Default: No.

Enable User Name Default: No.
Splitting

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 289 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix B: Destination Runtime Parameters

Parameter

Description

Split File Name
into Path and
Name

Default: No.

Event Integrity
Algorithm

Disabled, SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-512, or MD5.

Generate
Unparsed Events

Default: No.

Preserve System
Health Events

Yes, No, or Disabled.

Enable Device
Status Monitoring
(in minutes)

Disabled or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 30, 60, or 120 minutes.

Filters
Filter Out

NA

“Very High
Severity” Event
Definition

NA

“High Severity”
Event Definition

NA

“Medium Severity”
Event Definition

NA

“Low Severity”
Event Definition

NA

“Unknown
Severity” Event
Definition

NA

Payload Sampling (When available.)
Max. Length

Discard, 128 bytes, 256 bytes, 512 bytes, 1 kbyte

Mask NonPrintable
Characters

Default: False.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 290 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix B: Destination Runtime Parameters

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 291 of 316

Appendix C: Special Connector Configurations
Certain connectors require additional configuration when used with ArcSight Management Center. This
appendix describes the additional configuration. For general information about installing connectors,
see "Adding a Connector" on page 94.
The following topics are discussed here:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Microsoft Windows Event Log - Unified Connectors
Database Connectors
Add a JDBC Driver
API Connectors
File Connectors
Syslog Connectors

292
294
295
296
297
297

Microsoft Windows Event Log - Unified Connectors
The SmartConnector for Microsoft Windows Event Log - Unified is not part of a FIPS-compliant
solution. When you add a Windows Event Log - Unified connector, be sure the container is not FIPSenabled in order for the connector to collect events.
When adding a Windows Event Log - Unified connector, follow the specific instructions in the
SmartConnector configuration guide for entering parameters, entering security certifications when
using SSL, enabling audit policies, and setting up standard user accounts.
There are currently two parser versions for the Microsoft Windows Event Log - Unified
SmartConnector.
l

Parser Version 0 is generally available with each SmartConnector release

l

Parser Version 1 is available with the Microsoft Windows Monitoring content

The Microsoft Windows Event Log - Unified SmartConnector configured for you during initial
configuration uses Parser Version 1.
Detailed Security Event mappings for this parser version can be found in Security Event Mappings:
SmartConnectors for Microsoft Windows Event Log - Unified with Parser Version 1
(MSWindowsEventLogUnifiedMappingsParserVersion1.pdf), available on HPE ArcSight Protect724.
When you install additional Microsoft Windows Event Log Unified connectors, they are installed with
the generally available base parser version (Parser Version 0). Mappings for the base parser version are
available with each SmartConnector release (Security Event Mappings: SmartConnectors for Microsoft
Windows Event Log) and can be found on Protect724, along with the SmartConnector configuration
guide. You must use Parser Version 1 if you want the default Windows Monitoring content to work. For

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 292 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix C: Special Connector Configurations
details see the SmartConnector Configuration Guide for Microsoft Windows Event Log - Unified, or
SmartConnector Configuration Guide for Microsoft Windows Security Events - Mappings.
Note: The pre-bundled SmartConnector for Microsoft Windows Event Log - Unified installed using
the First Boot Wizard is installed with Parser Version 1. Any Windows Event Log - Unified
connectors you add using the connector configuration wizard are installed with Parser Version 0
(the base parser).

Change Parser Version by Updating Container Properties
A parser is a SmartConnector component that specifies how to parse the information contained in the
device raw events, and how to map it to HPE ArcSight security event schema fields. Parsers can be in
the form of property files, map files, or CSV files. Each SmartConnector has its own parser or set of
parsers.
Multiple parser versions enables each SmartConnector parse raw events in many different ways to
generate ArcSight security events with appropriate mappings. The SmartConnector for Microsoft
Windows Event Log -- Unified, supports two parser versions: Base Parser and Parser Version 1.
With multiple parser versions:
l
l

l

One SmartConnector build supports multiple parser versions.
Users can configure their connectors to use the available parser versions of their choice, depending
on their event mapping requirements.
Users can reconfigure connectors to use the appropriate parser version as needed.

Multiple parser versions currently are supported only for the SmartConnector for Microsoft Windows
Event Log -- Unified. This functionality is not supported for user-developed ArcSight FlexConnectors.
Each SmartConnector has its own internal fcp.version parameter setting to represent its current
parser version. The default value for the fcp.version parameter is the base (or default) parser version,
which is Parser Version 0. Each SmartConnector can support a total of 8 parser versions. The
fcp.version parameter values range from 0 through 7. Microsoft Windows Unified SmartConnector
supports parser versions 0 and 1.
Be sure that when you have content with new mappings, you change the parser version to match that
content.
To update container properties (located in the agent.properties file) to change the parser version being
used when mapping events:
1. Click Manage from the top-level menu bar.
2. Select a navigation path.
3. Select the container whose properties you want to update. You can select multiple containers.
4. Click Properties.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 293 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix C: Special Connector Configurations

5. Follow the instructions in the wizard to update connector properties.
The fcp.version parameter value 0 designates the base parser. To use parser 1, change the
fcp.version parameter value to 1. For example:
agents[0].fcp.version=1

SSL Authentication
If you choose to use SSL as the connection protocol, you must add security certificates for both the
Windows Domain Controller Service and for the Active Directory Server. Installing a valid certificate on a
domain controller permits the LDAP service to listen for, and automatically accept, SSL connections for
both LDAP and global catalog traffic. With the First Boot Wizard installation of the connector, the
certificates are already imported for you. If you add Windows Event Log - Unified connectors, see the
SmartConnector Configuration Guide for Microsoft Windows Event Log - Unified for instructions.

Database Connectors
The following database connectors are available for installation with ArcSight Express:
l

IBM SiteProtector DB*

l

McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator DB*

l

McAfee Vulnerability Manager DB*

l

McAfee Network Security Manager DB*

l

Microsoft SQL Server Audit Multiple Instance DB*

l

Oracle Audit DB

l

Symantec Endpoint Protection DB*

l

Trend Micro Control Manager NG DB*

l

Snort DB*

*These connectors extract events from an SQL Server or MySQL databases, which requires a JDBC
driver. See "Add a JDBC Driver" on the next page for instructions.
All of these database connectors require the following information when being added to ArcSight
Express; some connectors require additional parameters, such as event types or polling frequency.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 294 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix C: Special Connector Configurations

Parameter Description
Database
JDBC
Driver

If you are using an ODBC DRIVER, select 'sun.jdbc.odbc.JdbcOdbcDriver' driver. For JDBC drivers, select the
'com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.SQLServerDriver' driver. If you are using an ODBC DRIVER, select
'sun.jdbc.odbc.JdbcOdbcDriver' driver. For JDBC drivers, select the
'com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.SQLServerDriver' driver.

Database
URL

If you are using an ODBC DRIVER, enter: 'jdbc:odbc:, where the  is the name of the ODBC data source you just created. If you are using a JDBC DRIVER,
enter: 'jdbc:sqlserver://:1433;DatabaseName=,' substituting actual values for  and .

Database
User

Enter the login name of the database user with appropriate privilege.

Database
Password

Enter the password for the SiteProtector Database User.

Add a JDBC Driver
The IBM SiteProtector DB, McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator DB, McAfee Vulnerability Manager DB,
McAfee Network Security Manager DB, Microsoft SQL Server Audit Multiple Instance DB, Symantec
Endpoint Protection DB, and Trend Micro Control Manager NG DB connectors extract events from a
SQL Server database. For information about and to download the MS SQL Server JDBC Driver, see the
Microsoft web site.
Note: Different versions of the JDBC driver are required for different SQL Server database
versions; be sure to use the correct driver for your database version. The name of the jar file may be
different for some JDBC driver versions.
The SmartConnector for Snort DB extracts events from a MySQL database.
After downloading and extracting the JDBC driver, upload the driver into the repository and apply it to
the appropriate container or containers, as follows:
1. From ArcSight Express, select Setup > Repositories.
2. Select JDBC Drivers from the left pane and click the JDBC Drivers tab.
3. Click Upload to Repository.
4. From the Repository File Creation Wizard, select Individual Files, and then click Next.
5. Retain the default selection and click Next.
6. Click Upload and locate and select the .jar file you downloaded.
7. Click Submit to add the specified file to the repository and click Next to continue.
8. After adding all files you require, click Next.
9. In the Name field, enter a descriptive name for the zip file (JDBCdriver, for example). Click Next.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 295 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix C: Special Connector Configurations

10. Click Done to complete the process; the newly added file is displayed in the Name field under Add
Connector JDBC Driver File.
11. To apply the driver file, select the driver .zip file and click the up arrow to invoke the Upload
Container Files wizard. Click Next.
12. Select the container or containers into which the driver is to be uploaded; click Next.
13. Click Done to complete the process.
Configuration guides for the database connectors supported with ArcSight Express can be found on
the Protect 724 community. The individual configuration guides that provide setup information and
mappings for the applications listed below can be found on Protect 724:
l

IBM SiteProtector DB

l

McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator DB

l

McAfee Vulnerability Manager DB (formerly FoundScan)

l

McAfee Network Security Manager DB

l

Microsoft SQL Server Multiple Instance Audit DB

l

Oracle Audit DB

l

Symantec Endpoint Protection DB

l

Trend Micro Control Manager DB

l

Snort DB

API Connectors
The following API connectors are available for installation with ArcSight Express. They require a client
and authentication credentials, as well as configuring the events types to be sent to the connector by
the device.
l

Cisco Secure IPS SDEE

l

Sourcefire Defense Center eStreamer

For Cisco Secure IPS SDEE, if you want the SmartConnector to validate the Cisco IPS sensor's
authentication certificate, obtain the authentication certificate from the IPS sensor and import it to the
appliance.
For Sourcefire Defense Center eStreamer, add an eStreamer client, create an authentication certificate,
and select event types to be sent to the connector.
See the individual configuration guides for these connectors for instructions.
Follow the instructions in "Uploading Certificates to the Repository" in the Connector Management for
ArcSight Express 4.0 User's Guide to import the trusted certificates to ArcSight Express.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 296 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix C: Special Connector Configurations
Configuration guides for the API connectors supported with ArcSight Express can be found on the
Protect 724 community. The individual configuration guides that provide setup information and
mappings for the applications listed below can be found on Protect 724:
l

Cisco Secure IPS SDEE

l

Sourcefire Defense Center eStreamer

File Connectors
File-based connectors use the Network File System (NFS) or the Common Internet File System (CIFS).
The following File connector is available for installation with ArcSight Express:
l

Blue Coat Proxy SG Multiple Server File

See the configuration guide for device setup, parameter configuration, and mappings information for
the SmartConnector for Blue Coat Proxy SG Multiple Server File.
File-based connectors use the Network File System (NFS) or the Common Internet File System (CIFS).
For the file-based connectors on a Windows system, configure a CIFS share before you add the
connectors.
For information on creating a CIFS Mount or an NFS Mount, see "Managing a Remote File System" in
the Connector Management for ArcSight Express 4.0 User's Guide.

Syslog Connectors
If you selected Syslog Daemon during initial installation with the First Boot Wizard, the Syslog Daemon
connector has already been installed.
You can add a Syslog File, Pipe, or Daemon connector in a new container. Syslog connectors for the
following devices are available with ArcSight Express:
l

Cisco PIX/ASA Syslog

l

Cisco IOS Router Syslog

l

Juniper Network and Security Manager Syslog

l

Juniper JUNOS Syslog

l

UNIX OS Syslog

Be sure your device is set up to send syslog events. See your device documentation or the
SmartConnector Configuration Guide for device configuration information; the guide also includes
specific device mappings to ArcSight event fields as well as further information needed for
configuration if you are installing the Pipe or File connectors. Mappings in the SmartConnector for
UNIX OS Syslog configuration guide apply to all syslog connectors. Specific mappings per device are
documented in the configuration guide for the device.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 297 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix C: Special Connector Configurations
Configuration guides for these syslog connectors supported with ArcSight Express can be found on the
Protect 724 community:
l

Cisco PIX/ASA Syslog

l

Cisco IOS Syslog

l

Juniper JUNOS Syslog

l

Juniper Network and Security Manager Syslog

l

UNIX OS Syslog

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 298 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix D: Setting Up Your ArcSight Management Center Appliance

Appendix D: Setting Up Your ArcSight
Management Center Appliance
This appendix gives instructions on setting up your ArcSight Management Center Appliance for first
use.

Preparation
Prior to first use of your ArcSight Management Center appliance, do each of the following:
1. Unpack the appliance and its accompanying accessories.
2. Read carefully through the instructions, cautions, and warnings packaged with the appliance.
Failure to do so can result in bodily injury or appliance malfunction.
3. Note and save the rack-mounting instructions included in the package.
4. Redeem your Management Appliance license key by following the instructions in the “Hewlett
Packard Enterpise Entitlement Certificate” document. You will need this key to access Management
Appliance functionality.
5. Apply for an account on Protect 724, the HPE ArcSight user community. You will need this account
to access product documentation and other community-based resources for your HPE ArcSight
products.
6. Follow the rack installation instructions (included in your Appliance package) to securely mount the
appliance in its rack and make the back panel connections.
7. Do one of the following to enable local access to the Appliance:
l Connect a keyboard, monitor, and mouse to the ports on the Appliance.
l

Connect a terminal to the serial port on the Appliance using a null modem cable with DB-9
connector. The serial port requires a standard VT100-compatible terminal: 9600 bps, 8-bits,
no parity, 1 stop bit (8N1), no flow control.

8. Power on the appliance.
9. Optionally, enable your appliance for out-of-band remote access. Download, review, and follow the
instructions in the HPE ProLiant Integrated Lights-Out User Guide, available at
http://www.hpe.com/go/iLO.
You are now ready to begin appliance set up.

Setup
During appliance setup, you will do the following:
HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 299 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix D: Setting Up Your ArcSight Management Center Appliance

1. Configure a new IP address for the appliance at the CLI.
2. Accept the End User License Agreement, and then log in to the appliance.
3. Initialize the ArcSight Management Centerappliance.
Each of these steps is described in detail below.

Configure a New IP Address
Use the appliance's Command Line Interface (CLI) to configure a new IP address . ArcSight
Management Center Appliance ships with the default IP address 192.168.35.35 (subnet mask
255.255.255.0) on Eth0. You will also need to specify a default gateway, hostname, and DNS and
NTP servers.
You will need the following information on hand before beginning:
l

The new IP address , plus prefix or subnet mask.

l

Your default gateway address.

l

Your fully-qualified domain name.

l

One or more name search domains and server addresses for DNS resolution.

l

One or more NTP server addresses.

To configure a new IP address on the CLI:
1. On the CLI, connect to the appliance using these default credentials:
Login:admin
Password:password
2. Enter the new IP address with one of the following commands:
l

l

set ip eth0 /, where  is the new IP address and  is
your prefix, OR,
set ip eth0  , where  the new IP address and
 is your subnet mask .
3. Enter set defaultgw 
, replacing 
 with your default gateway IP
address .
4. Enter set hostname , replacing  with the fully-qualified domain name of the
host.
5. Enter set dns , ...  ..., replacing each
 with a search domain, and each  with the IP address
of a nameserver you wish to use for DNS.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 300 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix D: Setting Up Your ArcSight Management Center Appliance

6. Enter set  ..., replacing each
 with the IP address of an NTP server you wish to set appliance time.
7. Enter show config and review your settings. If any are incorrect, correct them as described in
earlier steps.
You are now ready to accept the End User License Agreement.

Accept the End User License Agreement
Upon first connecting to the appliance through a browser, you are prompted to accept the End User
License Agreement (EULA).

To accept the EULA:
1. In a browser, connect to the ArcSight Management Center appliance at https://, where
 is the new IP address you just configured.
2. Review the license.
3. Select the I accept the terms of the License Agreement checkbox, and then click Accept.
4. Log in as an administrator using the default credentials.
Login:admin
Password:password
You may now initialize the appliance.

Initialize the ArcSight Management Center Appliance
You can now initialize the appliance by uploading the license file; optionally, setting date and time
settings; and then changing the admin login credentials to non-default values.

To initialize the appliance:
1. On the ArcSight Management Center Appliance Configuration page, in the License field,
browse for and upload your current license.
2. Click Save.
3. Set your date and time settings for the appliance.
4. Change the admin login credentials from their default values. For instructions, see "Change
Password" on page 268.
Your ArcSight Management Center appliance is now ready for use.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 301 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix D: Setting Up Your ArcSight Management Center Appliance

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 302 of 316

Appendix E: Restoring Factory Settings
Overview
You can restore an ArcSight Management Center to its factory settings using a built-in utility on the
appliance. Restoration applies to new model ArcSight Management Centers as well as former Connector
Appliances that have been migrated to ArcSight Management Center.
Restoring an ArcSight Management Center Appliance to factory settings irretrievably deletes all
configuration settings. You should back up your configuration settings before performing a factory
restore.
The utility used for the factory restore (and resulting appliance image) depends on the type of
appliance being restored. Consult the table below to determine the utility to employ.
Appliance Model

System Restore Utility

Resulting Appliance Image

C6600

HPE System Restore

ArcSight Management Center

Any CX500 (including C6500)

HPE System Restore

ArcSight Management Center

CX400 (running RHEL 5.x pre-Migration)

HPE System Restore

ArcSight Management Center

CX400 (running RHEL 6.x pre-Migration)

Acronis True Image

Connector Appliance

Factory Restore Using HPE System Restore
An appliance restored using HPE System Restore will be restored to an ArcSight Management Center
image.

To perform a factory restore using HPE System Restore:
1. Note the IP address , default gateway, and netmask of the appliance.
2. Attach a keyboard, monitor, and mouse directly to the appliance.
3. Reboot ArcSight Management Center from the GUI. Click Setup > System Admin > Reboot and
then click the Start Reboot Now button. You can also reboot using the command line interface.
4. When the following screen displays, press any key on your keyboard.
Note: This screen is displayed for a very short time. Make sure you press a key on your

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 303 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix E: Restoring Factory Settings

keyboard quickly; otherwise, the appliance continues to boot normally.

5. A screen similar to the one shown below appears on the attached monitor. Use the mouse or arrow
keys to select System Restore and press Enter. The HPE System Restore utility launches.

6. Press the F1 (Auto-Select) key.

7. Press the F2 key to Restore the appliance.
8. When prompted Proceed with restore?, press y. The restore begins.
9. Allow the restore utility to complete the process.
10. When complete, press Enter.
11. Press the F12 key to reboot the appliance.
12. When prompted Reboot appliance?, press y. The appliance will be rebooted.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 304 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix E: Restoring Factory Settings
The result of the restore process is a factory restored ArcSight Management Center.
For use, the appliance must now be configured with an IP address , default gateway, and netmask you
noted previously. For configuration instructions, see the document Getting Started with ArcSight
Management Center Appliance, available from HPE ArcSight’s online community, Protect724.

Factory Restore Using Acronis True Image
An appliance restored using Acronis True Image will be restored to a Connector Appliance image.

To perform a factory restore using Acronis True Image:
1. Note the IP address , default gateway, and netmask of the appliance.
2. Attach a keyboard, monitor, and mouse directly to the appliance.
3. Reboot ArcSight Management Center from the GUI. Click Setup > System Admin > Reboot and
then click the Start Reboot Now button. You can also reboot using the command line interface.
4. When the following screen displays, press any key on your keyboard.
Note: This screen is displayed for a very short time. Make sure you press a key on your
keyboard quickly; otherwise, the appliance continues to boot normally.

5. A screen similar to the one shown below appears on the attached monitor. Use the mouse or arrow
keys to select System Restore and press Enter.

6. Click Acronis True Image Server to continue.
7. In the Acronis True Image Echo Server dialog box, select Recovery from the Pick a Task list and
press Enter.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 305 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix E: Restoring Factory Settings

8. When the Restore Data Wizard starts, click Next to continue.
9. On the Backup Archive Selection page, select Acronis Secure Zone and click Next.
10. On the Restoration Type Selection page, select Restore disks or partitions and click Next.
11. On the Partition or Disk to Restore page, select the entire drive, labeled cciss/c0d0 or sda
(depending on the appliance model) and click Next.
12. On the NT Signature selection for image restoration page, select how you want the NT
signature for the restored disk to be processed and click Next.
13. On the Restored Hard disk Location page, select the drive to restore (cciss/c0d0 or sda) and
click Next.
14. On the Non-empty Destination Hard Disk Drive page, select Yes, I want to delete all
partitions on the destination hard disk drive before restoring and click Next.
15. On the Next Selection page, select No, I do not and click Next (there are no other partitions or
disks to restore).
16. On the Restoration Options page, select Validate backup archive for the data restoration
process if you want to validate the archive before resetting the appliance. Select Reboot the
computer automatically after the restoration is finished if you want to reboot the appliance
automatically. Click Next.
17. Review the checklist of operations to be performed and click Proceed to begin factory reset. Click
Back to revisit previous pages.
Caution: Do not interrupt or power down the ArcSight Management Center during the reset
process. Interrupting the reset process can force the system into a state from which it cannot
recover.
Progress bars show the status of the current operation and the total progress.
18. When you see a message indicating that the data was restored successfully, click OK.
19. If you specified automatic reboot previously, the appliance reboots when the reset is complete.
Otherwise, reboot manually.
The result of the restore process is a factory restored Connector Appliance.
For use, the appliance must now be configured with an IP address , default gateway, and netmask you
noted previously. For configuration instructions, see the document Getting Started with Connector
Appliance, available from HPE ArcSight’s online software community, Protect724.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 306 of 316

Appendix F: SuperSchema
The following comprises the superschema used by the CEF to Avro (c2a) stream processor in Event
Broker.
Field Name

Data Type

Length

agentAddress

VARCHAR

16

agentDnsDomain

VARCHAR

255

agentHostName

VARCHAR

1023

agentId

VARCHAR

40

agentMacAddress

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

agentReceiptTime

DATE

agentSeverity

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

agentTimeZone

VARCHAR

255

agentTranslatedAddress

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

agentTranslatedZoneURI

VARCHAR

2048

agentType

VARCHAR

63

agentVersion

VARCHAR

31

agentZoneURI

VARCHAR

2048

applicationProtocol

VARCHAR

40

baseEventCount

INT

bytesIn

Long

bytesOut

Long

categoryDeviceGroup

VARCHAR

1023

categoryDeviceType

VARCHAR

1023

categoryObject

VARCHAR

1023

categoryOutcome

VARCHAR

1023

categorySignificance

VARCHAR

1023

categoryTechnique

VARCHAR

1023

cryptoSignature

VARCHAR

512

customerURI

VARCHAR

2048

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 307 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix F: SuperSchema

Field Name

Data Type

Length

destinationAddress

VARCHAR

16

destinationDnsDomain

VARCHAR

255

destinationGeoLocationInfo

VARCHAR

1023

destinationHostName

VARCHAR

1023

destinationMacAddress

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

destinationNtDomain

VARCHAR

255

destinationPort

INT

destinationProcessId

INT

destinationProcessName

VARCHAR

1023

destinationServiceName

VARCHAR

1023

destinationTranslatedAddress

VARCHAR

16

destinationTranslatedPort

INT

destinationTranslatedZoneURI

VARCHAR

2048

destinationUserId

VARCHAR

1023

destinationUserName

VARCHAR

1023

destinationUserPrivileges

VARCHAR

1023

destinationZoneURI

VARCHAR

2048

deviceAction

VARCHAR

63

deviceAddress

VARCHAR

16

deviceAssetId

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

deviceCustomDate1

DATE

deviceCustomDate1Label

VARCHAR

deviceCustomDate2

DATE

deviceCustomDate2Label

VARCHAR

1023

deviceCustomDescriptorId

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

deviceCustomFloatingPoint1

FLOAT

deviceCustomFloatingPoint1Label

VARCHAR

deviceCustomFloatingPoint2

FLOAT

deviceCustomFloatingPoint2Label VARCHAR
deviceCustomFloatingPoint3

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

1023

1023

1023

FLOAT

Page 308 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix F: SuperSchema

Field Name

Data Type

deviceCustomFloatingPoint3Label VARCHAR
deviceCustomFloatingPoint4

Length
1023

FLOAT

deviceCustomFloatingPoint4Label VARCHAR

1023

deviceCustomIPv6Address1

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

deviceCustomIPv6Address1Label

VARCHAR

1023

deviceCustomIPv6Address2

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

deviceCustomIPv6Address2Label

VARCHAR

1023

deviceCustomIPv6Address3

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

deviceCustomIPv6Address3Label

VARCHAR

1023

deviceCustomIPv6Address4

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

deviceCustomIPv6Address4Label

VARCHAR

1023

deviceCustomNumber1

LONG VARCHAR

deviceCustomNumber1Label

VARCHAR

deviceCustomNumber2

LONG VARCHAR

deviceCustomNumber2Label

VARCHAR

deviceCustomNumber3

LONG VARCHAR

deviceCustomNumber3Label

VARCHAR

1023

deviceCustomString1

VARCHAR

4000

deviceCustomString1Label

VARCHAR

1023

deviceCustomString2

VARCHAR

4000

deviceCustomString2Label

VARCHAR

1023

deviceCustomString3

VARCHAR

4000

deviceCustomString3Label

VARCHAR

1023

deviceCustomString4

VARCHAR

4000

deviceCustomString4Label

VARCHAR

1023

deviceCustomString5

VARCHAR

4000

deviceCustomString5Label

VARCHAR

1023

deviceCustomString6

VARCHAR

4000

deviceCustomString6Label

VARCHAR

1023

deviceDirection

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

1023

1023

Page 309 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix F: SuperSchema

Field Name

Data Type

Length

deviceDnsDomain

VARCHAR

255

deviceDomain

VARCHAR

1023

deviceEventCategory

VARCHAR

1023

deviceEventClassId

VARCHAR

100

deviceExternalId

VARCHAR

255

deviceFacility

VARCHAR

1023

deviceHostName

VARCHAR

100

deviceInboundInterface

VARCHAR

128

deviceMacAddress

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

deviceNtDomain

VARCHAR

255

deviceOutboundInterface

VARCHAR

128

devicePayloadId

VARCHAR

128

deviceProcessId

INT

deviceProcessName

VARCHAR

1023

deviceProduct

VARCHAR

100

deviceReceiptTime

DATE

deviceSeverity

VARCHAR

63

deviceTimeZone

VARCHAR

255

deviceTranslatedAddress

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

deviceTranslatedZoneURI

VARCHAR

2048

deviceVendor

VARCHAR

100

deviceVersion

VARCHAR

16

deviceZoneURI

VARCHAR

2048

endTime

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

eventId

Long

DEFINE DEFAULT

eventOutcome

VARCHAR

63

externalId

VARCHAR

40

fileCreateTime

DATE

fileHash

VARCHAR

255

fileId

VARCHAR

1023

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 310 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix F: SuperSchema

Field Name

Data Type

Length

fileModificationTime

DATE

fileName

VARCHAR

1023

filePath

VARCHAR

1023

filePermission

VARCHAR

1023

fileSize

LONG

fileType

VARCHAR

flexDate1

DATE

flexDate1Label

VARCHAR

flexNumber1

LONG

flexNumber1Label

VARCHAR

flexNumber2

LONG

flexNumber2Label

VARCHAR

128

flexString1

VARCHAR

1023

flexString1Label

VARCHAR

128

flexString2

VARCHAR

1023

flexString2Label

VARCHAR

128

locality

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

message

VARCHAR

1023

name

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

oldFileCreateTime

DATE

oldFileHash

VARCHAR

255

oldFileId

VARCHAR

1023

oldFileModificationTime

DATE

oldFileName

VARCHAR

1023

oldFilePath

VARCHAR

1023

oldFilePermission

VARCHAR

1023

oldFileSize

LONG

oldFileType

VARCHAR

1023

rawEvent

VARCHAR

4000

version

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

1023

128

128

Page 311 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix F: SuperSchema

Field Name

Data Type

Length

reason

VARCHAR

1023

requestClientApplication

VARCHAR

1023

requestContext

VARCHAR

2048

requestCookies

VARCHAR

1023

requestMethod

VARCHAR

1023

requestUrl

VARCHAR

1023

requestUrlFileName

VARCHAR

1023

requestUrlQuery

VARCHAR

1023

severity

INT

sourceAddress

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

sourceDnsDomain

VARCHAR

255

sourceGeoLocationInfo

VARCHAR

1023

sourceHostName

VARCHAR

1023

sourceMacAddress

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

sourceNtDomain

VARCHAR

255

sourcePort

INT

sourceProcessId

INT

sourceProcessName

VARCHAR

1023

sourceServiceName

VARCHAR

1023

sourceTranslatedAddress

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

sourceTranslatedPort

INT

sourceTranslatedZoneURI

VARCHAR

2048

sourceUserId

VARCHAR

1023

sourceUserName

VARCHAR

1023

sourceUserPrivileges

VARCHAR

1023

sourceZoneURI

VARCHAR

2048

startTime

DATE

transportProtocol

VARCHAR

31

type

VARCHAR

DEFINE DEFAULT

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 312 of 316

Appendix G: The Topology View and
Unmanaged Devices
This section details various scenarios for the inclusion of devices not managed by ArcMC in your
network, and the effect of each scenario on the ArcMC Topology View. Particularly when connectors
are chained together in a multi-tier configuration, unmanaged products can block the view from their
immediate downstream neighbor.

Scenario 1: No Unmanaged Devices
In this scenario, no umanaged products are included in the network. As a result, the ArcMC Topology
view is unimpeded and gives an accurate picture of the logical topology as viewed from any location.

Scenario 2: Unmanaged Connector in Location L1
This scenario shows an unmanaged connector in location L1 and the results on the Topology View as
seen from locations L2 and L3. No view is seen from L1, since it does not include any managed nodes.
The view at the other downstream locations is as expected.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 313 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix G: The Topology View and Unmanaged Devices

Scenario 3: Unmanaged Connector in Location L2
In this scenario, an unmanaged connector is located in Location L2 and chained to connectors in
locations L1 ans L2. This blocks the Topology view of L1 as seen from L3. In addition, the destination
Logger or ESM shows no traffic from L1.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 314 of 316

Administrator's Guide
Appendix G: The Topology View and Unmanaged Devices

Scenario 4: Unmanaged Connector in Location L3
In this scenario, an unmanaged connector is in Location L3. This impedes an accurate Topology view of
location 3. In fact, no traffic from locations L1 and L2 is shown for the destination Logger/ESM.

To get the most complete and accurate topological view, you are strongly encouraged to use ArcMC to
manage all supported connectors included in your logical topology.

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 315 of 316

Send Documentation Feedback
If you have comments about this document, you can contact the documentation team by email. If an
email client is configured on this system, click the link above and an email window opens with the
following information in the subject line:
Feedback on Administrator's Guide (ArcSight Management Center 2.6x)
Just add your feedback to the email and click send.
If no email client is available, copy the information above to a new message in a web mail client, and send
your feedback to arc-doc@hpe.com.
We appreciate your feedback!

HPE Security ArcSight Management Center 2.6x

Page 316 of 316



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Has XFA                         : No
Language                        : en-us
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c006 80.159825, 2016/09/16-03:31:08
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development LP
Description                     : 
Title                           : HPE ArcSight Management Center Administrator's Guide
Create Date                     : 2017:07:11 12:50:15-07:00
Modify Date                     : 2017:07:12 13:05:57-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2017:07:12 13:05:57-07:00
Keywords                        : 
Producer                        : madbuild
Document ID                     : uuid:0607092e-38ff-4e0b-aec2-18bb02e85c32
Instance ID                     : uuid:d85f8057-9f43-4464-81d2-aa982a91e2b6
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 316
Author                          : Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development LP
Subject                         : 

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools